M Y CM CT6 - Cadillac...the turn signal lamps flash. 3. Start the vehicle normally after entering. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on. Remote start can be extended

CT6

2019

CT6

84075049 A

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_CAD_CT6_COV_en_US_84075049A_2018JUL20.ai 1 6/29/2018 7:53:08 AM19_CAD_CT6_COV_en_US_84075049A_2018JUL20.ai 1 6/29/2018 7:53:08 AM

Cadillac CT6 Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-12533370) -2019 - CRC - 8/1/18

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Keys, Doors, and Windows . . . . . . . . . 28

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Instruments and Controls . . . . . . . . 118

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 377

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Customer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . 407

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Connected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423


2 INTRODUCTION

Introduction

The names, logos, emblems, slogans,vehicle model names, and vehiclebody designs appearing in this manualincluding, but not limited to, GM, theGM logo, CADILLAC, the CADILLACEmblem, and CT6 are trademarks and/or service marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “General Motorsof Canada Company” for CadillacMotor Car Division wherever itappears in this manual.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on the vehiclebecause of optional equipment thatwas not purchased on the vehicle,model variants, country specifications,features/applications that may not beavailable in your region, or changessubsequent to the printing of thisowner’s manual.

Refer to the purchase documentationrelating to your specific vehicle toconfirm the features.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle OwnersA French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

Propriétaires Canadiens

On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ceguide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170USA

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in the backof the manual. It is an alphabeticallist of what is in the manual and thepage number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 84075049 A First Printing ©2018 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


INTRODUCTION 3

Danger, Warning, andCautionWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

{ Danger

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will resultin serious injury or death.

{ Warning

Warning indicates a hazard thatcould result in injury or death.

Caution

Caution indicates a hazard thatcould result in property or vehicledamage.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “Do Not,”“Do not do this,” or “Do not let thishappen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message, gauge,or indicator.

M : Shown when the owner’s manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

* : Shown when the service manualhas additional instructions orinformation.

0 : Shown when there is moreinformation on another page —“see page.”

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbols thatmay be found on the vehicle and whatthey mean. See the features in thismanual for information.

u : Air Conditioning System

G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

9 : Dispose of Used ComponentsProperly

P : Do Not Apply High PressureWater

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

g : First Responder

_ : Flame/Fire Prohibited

H : Flammable

[ : Forward Collision Alert

R : Fuse Block Cover Lock Location

+ : Fuses

_ : High Voltage


4 INTRODUCTION

j : ISOFIX/LATCH System ChildRestraints

Q : Keep Fuse Block Covers ProperlyInstalled

| : Lane Change Alert

@ : Lane Departure Warning

A : Lane Keep Assist

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

X : Park Assist

~ : Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

O : Power

7 : Rear Cross Traffic Alert

I : Registered Technician

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Seat Belt Reminders

I : Side Blind Zone Alert

h : Stop/Start

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

a : Under Pressure

V : Vehicle Ahead Indicator


IN BRIEF 5

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . 6

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Heated and Ventilated Seats . . . . . . 13Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . 14Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 14Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . 15Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . 17Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Vehicle FeaturesInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . 19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Night Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . 21Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . 21Surround Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . 22Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Automatic ParkingAssist (APA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Surround Vision Recorder . . . . . . . . . 23Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . 23Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Fuel (2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) . . . . . . 25Fuel (3.0L Twin Turbo V6 and 4.2LTwin Turbo V8 Engines) . . . . . . . . . 26

Fuel (3.6L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27


6 IN BRIEF

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


IN BRIEF 7

1. Air Vents 0 186.

2. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 166.

Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals 0 170.

3. Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped).See Manual Mode 0 214.

4. Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 130or Instrument Cluster (Base Level)0 127.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Display. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

5. Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 120.

6. ENGINE START/STOP Button.See Ignition Positions 0 200.

7. Park Assist Button. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 251.

Automatic Parking Assist (APA)Button (If Equipped). SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 251.

Automatic Engine Stop/StartDisable Switch (If Equipped). SeeStop/Start System 0 202.

8. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 169.

9. Hazard Warning Flashers 0 169.

Glove Box Button. See Glove Box0 114.

10. Infotainment 0 174.

11. Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 69 (If Equipped).

12. Wireless Charging 0 123.

13. Automatic Climate Control System(Dual Zone) 0 175 or AutomaticClimate Control System (QuadZone) 0 180.

14. Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH)0 218 (If Equipped).

MODE Button. See Driver ModeControl 0 221.

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control 0 219.

15. Infotainment Control Knob. Seethe infotainment manual.

16. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission 0 209.

17. Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

18. Steering Wheel Controls. See theinfotainment manual.

19. Horn 0 120.

20. Steering Wheel Adjustment 0 119(Out of View).

21. Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 260 (If Equipped).

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 270 (IfEquipped).

Heated Steering Wheel 0 119 (IfEquipped).

22. Cruise Control 0 225.

Adaptive Cruise Control 0 227 (IfEquipped).

Super Cruise 0 235 (If Equipped).

Phone Button. See “SteeringWheel Controls” in theinfotainment manual.


8 IN BRIEF

23. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp (Check EngineLight) 0 139.

24. Instrument Panel Storage 0 114.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block0 328.

25. Electric Parking Brake 0 216.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 170 (Out of View).

Head-Up Display (HUD) 0 152 (IfEquipped) (Out of View).

Initial Drive InformationThis section provides a brief overviewabout some of the important featuresthat may or may not be on yourspecific vehicle.

For more detailed information, refer toeach of the features which can befound later in this owner’s manual.

Stop/Start SystemIf equipped, the Stop/Start system willshut off the engine to help conservefuel. It has components designed forthe increased number of starts.

When the brakes are applied and thevehicle is at a complete stop, theengine may turn off. When stopped,the tachometer displays AUTO STOP.See Tachometer 0 133. When the brakepedal is released or the acceleratorpedal is pressed, the engine willrestart. See Stop/Start System 0 202.

The automatic engine Stop/Startfeature can be disabled and enabledby touchingh on the center stack.Auto Stop is enabled each time youstart the vehicle.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter may work up to 60 m(197 ft) away.

Press the button on the side of theRKE transmitter to remove the key.Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button. The key can beused for the driver door.

Press K to unlock the driver door orall doors, depending on the vehiclepersonalization settings.


IN BRIEF 9

If equipped, press K to unlock thefuel door.

Press Q to lock all doors.

If equipped, press Q to lock thefuel door.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

PressX twice quickly to open thetrunk.

Press 7 and release to initiate vehiclelocator.

Press and hold 7 for more thanthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

Press 7 again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys 0 28 and Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Remote Vehicle StartThe engine can be started fromoutside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on the RKEtransmitter.

2. Immediately, press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

3. Start the vehicle normally afterentering.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on.

Remote start can be extended.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 36.

Door Locks

Keyless Access

Press the button on the door handleand pull the handle when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Manual Operation

From outside, use the key in thedriver door. The key lock cylinder iscovered by a cap. See Door Locks 0 37.

From the inside rear doors, push downon the door lock knob on top of thedoor. To unlock a door, pull once onthe door handle to unlock it, andagain to open it.


10 IN BRIEF

Power Door Locks

From outside, press Q or K on theRKE transmitter.

From inside, press Q or K. See PowerDoor Locks 0 40.

Trunk

To open the trunk:

. Press| on the driver door.

. PressX twice quickly on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

. Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk above the license plateafter unlocking all doors.

If equipped, these will also open thepower trunk. See Trunk 0 42.

WindowsThe power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 205.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

See Power Windows 0 56.


IN BRIEF 11

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust the seat:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment 0 64.

See Thigh Support Adjustment 0 65.

Uplevel Seat Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Platinum Seat Shown, Uplevel SeatSimilar

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Forward4. Down5. Rearward

. Press Feature Select (1) to displayseat adjustments on theinfotainment display. Press andrelease or hold to scroll throughfeatures.

. Press Up (2) to make upwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Forward (3) to make forwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Down (4) to make downwardadjustments of the selectedfeature.

. Press Rearward (5) to makerearward adjustments of theselected feature.


12 IN BRIEF

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks 0 66.

Memory Features

Platinum Driver Seat Shown,Passenger Seat Similar

If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall their uniqueseat positions for driving the vehicle,and a shared exit position for gettingout of the vehicle. Other featurepositions may also be saved, such aspower mirrors and power steeringwheel, if equipped. Memory positionsare linked to RKE transmitter 1 or 2for automatic memory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and releaseSET; a beep will sound. Thenimmediately press and hold 1, 2,orB (Exit) until two beeps sound.To manually recall these positions,press and hold 1, 2, orB until thesaved position is reached.

When Seat Entry Memory is enabledin vehicle personalization, positionspreviously saved to memory buttons1 and 2 are recalled when the ignitionis changed from off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.

When Seat Exit Memory is enabled invehicle personalization, the featureautomatically recalls the previouslysaved exit position when exiting thevehicle.

Memory adjustments may not beavailable upon delivery or after serviceuntil steps in “Saving MemoryPositions” section are performed. SeeMemory Seats 0 66.


IN BRIEF 13

Second Row SeatsIf equipped, the armrest may haveseat adjustment controls.

1. Seatback Display and LumbarAdjustment Control

2. Power Seat Adjustment3. Power Seat Adjustment4. Massage

See Rear Seats 0 72.

Easy Exit

If equipped, press S to tilt the front ofthe seat fully downward and to movethe entire seat fully rearward. The seatwill also move to this position whenthe rear door is opened.

Heated and VentilatedSeats

If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.

Press J or z to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion and seatback.

PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

PressC or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat.


14 IN BRIEF

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights above the buttonsindicate three for the highest settingand one for the lowest. If the frontheated seats are on high, the levelmay automatically be lowered afterapproximately 30 minutes.

See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 69.

Head Restraint AdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatback reclineangle as little as necessary whilekeeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the proper position.

See Head Restraints 0 62 and PowerSeat Adjustment 0 64.

Seat Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to useseat belts properly:

. Seat Belts 0 75

. How to Wear Seat Belts Properly0 76

. Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 78

. Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 102

Passenger Sensing System

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbag isaffected by the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing System0 89.

The passenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator0 138.


IN BRIEF 15

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirror

1. Move the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows tomove the mirror.

3. Move the selector switch to ) todeselect the mirror.

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors or, if equipped, power foldingmirrors. See Power Mirrors 0 51.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind your vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

Automatic dimming reduces the glareof headlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

Rear Camera Mirror

If equipped, this automatic dimmingrearview mirror provides a wide anglecamera view of the area behind thevehicle. For ease of use, adjust themirror for a clear view of the areabehind the vehicle while the display isoff. See Rear Camera Mirror 0 53.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentPower Tilt and Telescoping SteeringWheel

Press the control to move the tilt andtelescoping steering wheel up anddown or forward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Interior LightingDome Lamp

The dome lamp is in the overheadconsole.


16 IN BRIEF

To change the dome lamp settings,press:

( OFF : Turns the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

+ ON/OFF : Turns the lamp onor off.

Reading Lamps

There are front and rear readinglamps on the overhead console andover the rear passenger doors. Theselamps come on automatically whenany door is opened.

To manually turn the reading lampson or off:

Pressm orn next to each overheadconsole reading lamp.

Press the lamp lenses over the rearpassenger doors.

For more information on interiorlighting, see Instrument PanelIllumination Control 0 170.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns the exterior lamps off anddeactivates the AUTO mode. Turn toO again to reactivate the AUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.


IN BRIEF 17

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:

. Exterior Lamp Controls 0 166.

. Turn and Lane-Change Signals0 170.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the lever up ordown to select the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

AUTO : Use this setting forintermittent wipes when Rainsense isdisabled, or for Rainsense wipes whenit is enabled. For intermittent wipes,move the lever up to AUTO, then turnthe band on the wiper lever up formore frequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

If Rainsense is enabled in vehiclepersonalization, move the lever up toAUTO, then turn the band on thewiper lever to adjust the sensitivity tomoisture.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiper leverout of the AUTO position todeactivate Rainsense.

To enable or disable this feature, see“Rain Sense Wipers” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe lever down. For several wipes, holdthe lever down.

f : Pull the lever toward you tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 120.


18 IN BRIEF

Climate ControlsThe climate control buttons on the center stack and on the climate controldisplay are used to adjust the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

Dual and Quad Zone Climate Control Buttons

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

2. Fan Control

3. Driver and Passenger Heated andVentilated Seats (If Equipped)

4. Rear Window Defogger

5. Defrost

6. OFF (Fan)

7. Recirculation

8. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Climate Control Display

1. Driver and PassengerTemperature Display

2. Fan Control


4. Sync (SynchronizedTemperature)

5. Recirculation

6. Driver and Passenger AirDelivery Mode Controls

7. Auto (Automatic Operation

8. A/C (Air Conditioning)

9. On/Off


IN BRIEF 19

See Automatic Climate Control System(Dual Zone) 0 175 or Automatic ClimateControl System (Quad Zone) 0 180.

Transmission

Tap Shift

If equipped, Tap Shift allows you toshift an automatic transmissionsimilar to a manual transmission. Touse the Tap Shift feature:

1. When in D (Drive), pull back onthe shift lever to enterM (Manual Mode).

2. Use Tap Shift to manually shiftthe automatic transmission.

3. To exit, pull back on the shiftlever a second time.

See Manual Mode 0 214.

Vehicle Features

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, and voice or speechrecognition. It also includesinformation on settings.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainment manual.

Cruise Control

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when turned on.

RES+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If the cruise control isalready active, use to increase vehiclespeed. To increase speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent.To increase speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press RES+ to the second detent.


20 IN BRIEF

SET− : Press briefly to set the speedand activate cruise control. If thecruise control is already active, use todecrease vehicle speed. To decreasespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET−to the first detent. To decrease speedto the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark onthe speedometer, press SET− to thesecond detent.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

See Cruise Control 0 225, AdaptiveCruise Control 0 227 (if equipped),or Super Cruise 0 235 (if equipped).

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

y orz : Press to go to the previousor next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.

SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)0 149.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a greenindicator,V, when a vehicle isdetected ahead. This indicatordisplays amber when following avehicle much too closely. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a flashing redalert on the windshield and rapidlybeeps or pulses the driver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 260.

Night Vision SystemIf equipped, this system can help thedriver see and alert the driver topedestrians or large animals ahead ofthe vehicle beyond the area lit by theheadlamps.

See Night Vision System 0 266.


IN BRIEF 21

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is traveling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear.

See Forward Automatic Braking (FAB)0 262.

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) SystemIf equipped, the FPB system may helpavoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes with nearbypedestrians when driving in aforward gear. FPB displays an amberindicator, ~, when a nearbypedestrian is detected directly ahead.When approaching a detectedpedestrian too quickly, FPB provides a

red flashing alert on the windshieldand rapidly beeps or pulses the driverseat. FPB can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle.

See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System 0 263.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signal inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alertas the lane marking is crossed. Thesystem will not assist or alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)0 270 and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)0 270.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the turn signal is on. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) system isincluded as part of the LCA system.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) 0 268and Lane Change Alert (LCA) 0 268.

Surround VisionIf equipped, views around the vehicleappear in the infotainment display toaid with parking and low-speedmaneuvers.

See “Surround Vision” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 251.


22 IN BRIEF

Front Vision Camera

If equipped, a view of the area in frontof the vehicle appears on theinfotainment display to aid withparking and low-speed maneuvers.

See “Front Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 251.

Rear Vision Camera (RVC)If equipped, RVC shows a view of thearea behind the vehicle on theinfotainment display when the vehicleis shifted into R (Reverse) to aid withparking and low-speed backingmaneuvers.

See Assistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 251.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) SystemIf equipped, the RCTA system shows atriangle with an arrow on theinfotainment display to warn of trafficbehind your vehicle that may cross

your vehicle's path while inR (Reverse). In addition, beeps willsound, or the driver seat will pulse.


Park AssistIf equipped, Rear Park Assist (RPA)uses sensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h(5 mph). RPA may show a warningtriangle on the infotainment displayand a graphic on the instrumentcluster to provide the object distance.In addition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have the FrontPark Assist system.


Automatic ParkingAssist (APA)If equipped, the APA system helps tosearch for and maneuver the vehicleinto parallel or perpendicular parkingspots using automatic steering,displays, and beeps. When the vehiclespeed is below 30 km/h (18 mph),touchO to enable the system.

See “Automatic Parking Assist (APA)”under Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing 0 251.

Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB)If the vehicle has Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC) it also has the RABsystem, which is designed to helpavoid or reduce the harm caused bybacking crashes when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). If the systemdetects the vehicle is backing too fastto avoid a crash with a detected objectbehind your vehicle in your path, itmay automatically brake hard toa stop.


IN BRIEF 23


Rear Pedestrian AlertUnder certain conditions, this featurecan provide alerts of a pedestrianwithin the system’s range directlybehind the vehicle. See Rear PedestrianAlert 0 258.

Surround Vision RecorderIf equipped, the Surround VisionRecorder records 360° camera views toan SD card. Only images are recorded,no sound.

See Surround Vision Recorder 0 272.

Power OutletsThe 12-volt accessory power outletcan be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessory poweroutlet on the rear seat trim panel.

Lift the cover to access the accessorypower outlet.

See Power Outlets 0 122.

Universal Remote System

If equipped, this system provides away to replace up to three remotecontrol transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers,security systems, and homeautomation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Remote system. Because ofthe steps involved, it may be helpfulto have another person available toassist you with programming theUniversal Remote system.

See Universal Remote System 0 162.


24 IN BRIEF

SunroofIf equipped with a sunroof, theignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active, tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions 0 200 and Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 205.

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Pressthe rear or front ofD (1) to thesecond detent and release toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) :Press the rear ofD (1) to the firstdetent and hold to open the sunroof.Press the front ofD (1) to the firstdetent and hold to close the sunroof.

Tilt Switch

Vent Feature : Press and hold thefront ofE (2) to vent the sunroof.

Press and hold the rear ofE (2) toclose the sunroof vent.

See Sunroof 0 59.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/ElectronicStability ControlThe Traction Control System (TCS)limits wheel spin. The system is onwhen the vehicle is started.

The StabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.

. To turn off TCS, press andreleaseY on the center console.i illuminates in the instrumentcluster and the appropriate DICmessage displays.

. Press and releaseY again to turnTCS back on.


IN BRIEF 25. To turn off both TCS and

StabiliTrak/ESC, press and holdY on the center console until gand i illuminate in theinstrument cluster. Theappropriate DIC message displays.

. Press and releaseY again to turnon both systems.

See Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 219.

The vehicle has Driver Mode Control.See Driver Mode Control 0 221.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss in pressureof one of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop as soon

as possible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 195. Thewarning light will remain on until thetire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that the tirepressures are getting low and the tiresneed to be inflated to the properpressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System0 345.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure. See “Tire Fill Alert (IfEquipped)” under Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 346.

Fuel (2.0L L4 Turbo Engine)

Premium Recommended

Use premium 93 octane — (R+M)/2 —unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. Unleaded gasoline withan octane rating as low as 87 may beused, but it will reduce performanceand fuel economy. See RecommendedFuel (2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 274 orRecommended Fuel (3.0L Twin TurboV6 and 4.2L Twin Turbo V8 Engines)0 275 or Recommended Fuel (3.6LV6 Engine) 0 275.


26 IN BRIEF

Fuel (3.0L Twin TurboV6 and 4.2L Twin TurboV8 Engines)

Premium Required

Use premium 93 octane — (R+M)/2 —unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. Unleaded gasoline witha 91 octane rating may be used, but itwill reduce performance and fueleconomy. See Recommended Fuel (2.0LL4 Turbo Engine) 0 274 orRecommended Fuel (3.0L Twin TurboV6 and 4.2L Twin Turbo V8 Engines)0 275 or Recommended Fuel (3.6LV6 Engine) 0 275.

Fuel (3.6L V6 Engine)

Regular Unleaded Fuel

Use only Regular 87 octane — (R+M)/2 — or higher unleaded gasoline inyour vehicle. TOP TIER DetergentGasoline is recommended. Do not usegasoline with an octane rating loweras it will result in reducedperformance and lower fuel economy.See Recommended Fuel (2.0L L4 TurboEngine) 0 274 or Recommended Fuel(3.0L Twin Turbo V6 and 4.2L TwinTurbo V8 Engines) 0 275 orRecommended Fuel (3.6L V6 Engine)0 275.

E85 or FlexFuel

No E85 or FlexFuel

Gasoline-ethanol fuel blends greaterthan E15 (15% ethanol by volume),such as E85, cannot be used in thisvehicle.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is time tochange the engine oil and filter. Theoil life system should be reset to 100%only following an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC buttons, displayREMAINING OIL LIFE on theDIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 149.


IN BRIEF 27

2. Press and hold SEL to clear theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage and reset the oil lifeat 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

See Engine Oil Life System 0 300.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuel mileage.Here are some driving tips to get thebest fuel economy possible:

. Set the climate controls to thedesired temperature after theengine is started, or turn them offwhen not required.

. Avoid fast starts and acceleratesmoothly.

. Brake gradually and avoid abruptstops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speed limitsor drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires with thesame TPC Spec number moldedinto the tire's sidewall nearthe size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438

New Cadillac owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside ServiceProgram.

See Roadside Service 0 401.


28 KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . 52Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . 53Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . 58

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle with aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the RKE transmitterin the vehicle, and children orothers could be caught in the pathof a closing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with an RKEtransmitter.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 29

This key, inside the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, is used forthe driver door.

To remove the key, press the buttonon the side of the RKE transmitternear the bottom, and pull the key out.Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

See your dealer if a new key is needed.

Contact Roadside Service if locked outof the vehicle. See Roadside Service0 401.

With an active OnStar or connectedservice plan, an OnStar Advisor mayremotely unlock the vehicle. SeeOnStar Overview 0 411.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 407.

If there is a decrease in the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) operating range:

. Check the distance. Thetransmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Other vehiclesor objects may be blocking thesignal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see your dealeror a qualified technician forservice.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Keyless Access system allows forvehicle entry when the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter iswithin 1 m (3 ft). See “Keyless AccessOperation” later in this section.

The RKE transmitter may work up to60 m (197 ft) away from the vehicle.

Other conditions can impact theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 29.



Q : Press to lock all doors and thefuel door, if equipped. The turn signalindicators may flash and/or the hornmay sound on the second press toindicate locking. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed and Open Door Anti-Lockoutis enabled through vehiclepersonalization, all doors will lock andthen the driver door will immediatelyunlock. See Vehicle Personalization0 157. If the passenger door is openwhen Q is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 48.

If equipped with remote mirrorfolding, pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors,if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 157.

K : Press to unlock the driver doorand the fuel door, if equipped. PressK again within five seconds to unlockall doors. The RKE transmitter can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first button press. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157. When remotelyunlocking the vehicle at night, theheadlamps and back-up lamps willcome on for about 30 seconds to lightyour approach to the vehicle. The turnsignal indicators may flash to indicateunlocking.

Pressing K will disarm the alarmsystem. See Vehicle Alarm System 0 48.

If equipped with remote mirrorfolding, pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors,if enabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Press and hold K until the windowsfully open. Windows will not operateunless remote window operation isenabled. See Vehicle Personalization0 157.

/ : Press and release Q and thenimmediately press and hold / for atleast four seconds to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle using theRKE transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart 0 36.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirps threetimes. Press and hold 7 for morethan three seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the turnsignal lamps flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thevehicle is started.



X : Press twice quickly to open thetrunk. Press once to stop the trunkfrom moving. See Trunk 0 42.

Keyless Access Operation

The Keyless Access system lets youlock and unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunkor door being opened. If equipped,there will be a button on the outsidedoor handles.

The Keyless Access system can beprogrammed to unlock all doors onthe first lock/unlock button press fromthe driver door. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

If equipped with memory seats, RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 are linked toseating positions of memory 1 or 2.See Memory Seats 0 66.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from theDriver Door

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/

unlock button on the driver doorhandle will unlock the driver door.If the lock/unlock button is pressedagain within five seconds, allpassenger doors will unlock.

Driver Door Shown, Passenger Similar

Pressing the lock/unlock button willcause all doors to lock if any of thefollowing occur:

. It has been more than five secondssince the first lock/unlock buttonpress.

. Two lock/unlock button presseswere used to unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has opened andall doors are now closed.

Keyless Unlocking/Locking from thePassenger Doors

When the doors are locked and theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger doorhandle will unlock all doors. Pressingthe lock/unlock button will cause alldoors to lock if any of the followingoccur:

. The lock/unlock button was usedto unlock all doors.

. Any vehicle door has opened andall doors are now closed.

Disable/Enable Keyless Unlocking ofExterior Door Handles and Trunk

If equipped, keyless unlocking of theexterior door handles and trunk canbe disabled and enabled.

Disabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Qand K on the RKE transmitter at thesame time for approximatelythree seconds. The turn signal lampswill flash four times quickly toindicate access is disabled. Using any



exterior handle to unlock the doors oropen the trunk will cause the turnsignal lamps to flash four timesquickly, indicating access is disabled.If disabled, disarm the alarm systembefore starting the vehicle.

Enabling Keyless Unlocking:

With the vehicle off, press and hold Qand K on the RKE transmitter at thesame time for approximatelythree seconds. The turn signal lampswill flash twice quickly to indicateaccess is enabled.

Passive Locking

The Keyless Access system will lockthe vehicle several seconds after alldoors are closed if the vehicle is offand at least one transmitter has beenremoved or none remain in thevehicle.

The fuel door will also lock.

If other electronic devices interferewith the RKE transmitter signal, thevehicle may not detect the RKEtransmitter inside the vehicle.If passive locking is enabled, the doorsmay lock with the RKE transmitter

inside the vehicle. Do not leave theRKE transmitter in an unattendedvehicle.

To customize the doors toautomatically lock when exiting thevehicle, see Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Temporary Disable of PassiveLocking

Temporarily disable passive locking bypressing and holding K on theinterior door switch with a door openfor at least four seconds, or until threechimes are heard. Passive locking willthen remain disabled until Q on theinterior door is pressed, or until thevehicle is turned on.

Remote Left In Vehicle Alert

When the vehicle is turned off and anRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle,the horn will chirp three times afterall doors are closed. To turn on or offsee Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

Remote No Longer in Vehicle Alert

If the vehicle is on with a door open,and then all doors are closed, thevehicle will check for RKEtransmitters inside. If an RKEtransmitter is not detected, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displayNO REMOTE DETECTED and the hornwill chirp three times. This occursonly once each time the vehicle isdriven. To turn on or off, see VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Keyless Trunk Opening

To open the trunk, press the touchpad on the rear of the trunk above thelicense plate. The doors must beunlocked or the RKE transmitter mustbe within 1 m (3 ft).

Key Access

To access a vehicle with a weaktransmitter battery, see Door Locks0 37.



Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmed tothe vehicle will work. If a transmitteris lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. The vehicle can bereprogrammed so that lost or stolentransmitters no longer work. Eachvehicle can have up to eighttransmitters matched to it.

Programming with RecognizedTransmitters

A new transmitter can be programmedto the vehicle when there are tworecognized transmitters.

To program, the vehicle must be offand all transmitters, both currentlyrecognized and new, must bewith you.

1. Remove the vehicle key from therecognized transmitter.

2. Place the two recognizedtransmitters in the cupholder.

3. Remove the key lock cylinder capon the driver door handle. SeeDoor Locks 0 37. Insert the

vehicle key into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle, then turn the keycounterclockwise to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4, ETC.

4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket. Thecenter console storage area willneed to be opened.

5. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC display will show that itis ready to program the nexttransmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press Kor Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4–6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

7. Put the vehicle key back into thetransmitter.

8. Replace the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks 0 37.

Programming without RecognizedTransmitters

If two currently recognizedtransmitters are not available, followthis procedure to program up to eighttransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedure



will take approximately 30 minutes tocomplete. The vehicle must be off andall transmitters to be programmedmust be with you.

1. Remove the vehicle key from thetransmitter.

2. Remove the key lock cylinder capon the driver door handle. SeeDoor Locks 0 37. Insert thevehicle key into the key lockcylinder on the driver doorhandle, then turn the keycounterclockwise to the unlockposition five times within10 seconds.

The DIC displays REMOTELEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARN andthen press ENGINESTART/STOP.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

4. Repeat Step 3 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during the nextsteps.

The DIC display should nowshow READY FOR REMOTE # 1.

5. Place the new transmitter in thetransmitter pocket. The centerconsole storage area will need tobe opened.

6. Press ENGINE START/STOP.When the transmitter is learned,the DIC display will show that itis ready to program the nexttransmitter.

7. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press Kor Q on the transmitter.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 5–7.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdENGINE START/STOP forapproximately 12 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

8. Put the vehicle key back into thetransmitter.

9. Replace the key lock cylindercap. See Door Locks 0 37.

Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak or ifthere is interference with the signal,the DIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED or NO REMOTE KEY WASDETECTED PLACE KEY IN



TRANSMITTER POCKET THENSTART YOUR VEHICLE when startingthe vehicle.

To start the vehicle:

1. Open the center consolestorage area.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral) press the brake pedaland ENGINE START/STOP.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Caution

When replacing the battery, do nottouch any of the circuitry on thetransmitter. Static from your bodycould damage the transmitter.

Replace the battery if the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY.

1. Press the button on the side ofthe RKE transmitter near thebottom and pull the key out.Never pull the key out withoutpressing the button.

2. Separate the two halves of thetransmitter using a flat toolinserted into the bottom centerof the transmitter. Do not usethe key slot.



3. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

4. Insert the new battery on theback housing, positive side facingdown. Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Align the front and back housing,then snap the transmittertogether.

6. Reinsert the key.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows the engine to bestarted from outside the vehicle.

/ : This button is on the RKEtransmitter for remote start.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during a remotestart. The rear window defogger maycome on during remote start based oncold ambient conditions. The reardefog indicator light does not come onduring remote start.

If equipped, the heated steering wheelmay come on during cold weatherwhen enabled in vehiclepersonalization. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

If equipped, the heated and ventilatedfront seats may also come on whenthe vehicle personalization setting isenabled. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats 0 69.

Laws in some local communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters. Forexample, some laws may require aperson using remote start to have thevehicle in view. Check localregulations for any requirements.

If your vehicle is low on fuel, do notuse the remote start feature. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beshorter while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System0 29.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Press and release Q on the RKEtransmitter.

2. Immediately press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash. Thisconfirms the request to remotestart the vehicle has beenreceived.

During the remote start, thedoors will be locked and theparking lamps will remain on aslong as the engine is running.

The engine will shut off after15 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the vehicleis started.

3. Press the brake pedal and startthe vehicle to drive.



Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can also beextended by another 15 minutes,if during the first 15 minutesSteps 1 and 2 are repeated while theengine is still running. An extensioncan be requested 30 seconds afterstarting. This provides a total of30 minutes.

The remote start can only beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 15-minute period is addedon to the first 15 minutes for a totalof 30 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts, or aremote start with an extension, areallowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must be turnedfrom on to off before the remote startprocedure can be used again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:

. Press and hold/ until theparking lamps turn off.


. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote start will not operate ifany of the following occur:

. The ignition is in any mode otherthan off.

. A transmitter is in the vehicle.

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperature istoo high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts or astart with an extension havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The doors can beunlocked and opened whilethe vehicle is moving. Thechance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle in a crash isincreased if the doors are notlocked. So, all passengersshould wear seat beltsproperly and the doors shouldbe locked whenever thevehicle is driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the door fromoutside the vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. In the case of a dead battery, usethe key in the driver door. The keycylinder is covered with a cap.

To lock or unlock the door from insidethe vehicle:

. Press Q or K on the power doorlock switch.

. Pulling an interior door handlewill unlock the door. Pulling thedoor handle again unlatches it.

Keyless Access

Press the lock/unlock button when theRKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) ofthe driver door handle. Whenunlocking from the driver door, thefirst press unlocks that door; pressagain within five seconds to unlock allpassenger doors. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 29.

Driver Door Key Lock CylinderAccess (In Case of Dead Battery)

To access the driver door key lockcylinder:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil the cap removal iscomplete.

2. Insert the key into the slot (3) onthe bottom of the cap (2) and liftthe key upward.

3. Move the cap (2) rearward andremove.

4. Use the key in the cylinder.



To replace the cap:

1. Pull the door handle (1) to theopen position and hold it openuntil the cap installation iscomplete.

2. Insert the two tabs (6) at theback of the cap between theseal (5) and the metal base (4).

3. Slide the cap forward and pressthe forward edge to install thecap in place.

4. Release the door handle.

5. Check that the cap is secure.

Free-Turning Locks

The door key lock cylinder turns freelywhen either the wrong key is used,or the correct key is not fully inserted.The free-turning door lock featureprevents the lock from being forcedopen. To reset the lock, turn it to thevertical position with the correct keyfully inserted. Remove the key andinsert it again. If this does not resetthe lock, turn the key halfway aroundin the cylinder and repeat the resetprocedure.



Power Door Locks

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of thedoors until five seconds after all doorsare closed.

Delayed locking can only be turned onwhen the Open Door Anti-Lockout hasbeen turned off.

When Q is pressed on the power doorlock switch while the door is open, achime will sound three timesindicating delayed locking is active.

The doors will lock automaticallyfive seconds after all doors are closed.If a door is reopened before that time,the five-second timer will reset whenall doors are closed again.

Press Q on the door lock switch again

or press Q on the RKE transmitter tolock the doors immediately.

This feature can also be programmed.See Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, the ignitionis on, and the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

If a vehicle door is unlocked and thenopened and closed, the doors will lockeither when your foot is removed fromthe brake or the vehicle speedbecomes faster than 13 km/h (8 mph).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on the power door lockswitch.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).

Automatic door locking cannot bedisabled. Automatic door unlockingcan be programmed. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Lockout ProtectionIf the ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, and the power door lockswitch is pressed with the driver dooropen, all the doors will lock and onlythe driver door will unlock.

If the vehicle is off and locking isrequested while a door is open, whenall doors are closed the vehicle willcheck for RKE transmitters inside.If an RKE transmitter is detected andthe number of RKE transmitters insidehas not reduced, the driver door willunlock and the horn will chirp threetimes. Lockout protection can be



manually overridden with the driverdoor open by pressing and holding Qon the power door lock switch.

Open Door Anti-Lockout

If Open Door Anti-Lockout is turnedon and the vehicle is off, the driverdoor is open, and locking is requested,all the doors will lock and the driverdoor will remain open. Press thebutton again to lock the driver door.The Open Door Anti-Lockout featurecan be turned on or off. See VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Manual Safety Locks

If equipped, the safety lock is on theinside edge of the rear doors. To usethe safety lock:

1. Move the lever down to the lockposition.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same for the otherrear door.

To open a rear door when the safetylock is on:

1. Unlock the door by activating theinside handle, by pressing thepower door lock switch, or byusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

2. Open the door from the outside.

When the safety lock is enabled,adults and older children will not beable to open the rear door from theinside. Cancel the safety locks toenable the doors to open from theinside.

To cancel the safety lock:

1. Unlock the door and open itfrom the outside.

2. Move the lever up to unlock. Dothe same for the other door.



Doors

Trunk

{ Warning

Exhaust gases can enter the vehicleif it is driven with the liftgate ortrunk/hatch open, or with anyobjects that pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousness andeven death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in the Index.

See Engine Exhaust 0 208.

To open the trunk, the vehicle mustbe off or the transmission must be inP (Park).

Manual Trunk

. Press| on the driver door.

. PressX twice quickly on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

. Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk above the license platewhen all doors are unlocked.

For Keyless Access, the trunk can beopened while the vehicle is locked bypressing the touch pad above thelicense plate while the RKEtransmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of therear of the vehicle. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation 0 29.



Close the trunk by pulling on thehandle. Do not use the handle as atie-down. Do not press the touch padwhile closing the trunk; this will causethe trunk lid to be unlatched.

The trunk has an electric latch. If thevehicle has lost power or the batteryis disconnected, the trunk will notopen. If this happens, use theemergency trunk release handle.

Power Trunk

Caution

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powertrunk. Make sure there is no one inthe way of the power trunk as it isopening and closing.

Caution

Do not mount any load-carryingaccessories, such as a bike rack orluggage carriers, to the trunk of a

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle equipped with the powertrunk feature. This may damage thepower trunk system.

If equipped, to open the power trunk:

. Press and release| on thedriver door. The driver door mustbe unlocked, the ignition must beon, or Retained Accessory Power(RAP) must be active.

. PressX twice quickly on the RKEtransmitter.

. Press the touch pad on the rear ofthe trunk after unlocking all doorsor with the RKE transmitter inrange for Keyless Access.

Monitor the trunk area to make surenothing will come in contact or moveinto the path of the trunk lid whenpower closing.

To close the power trunk:

. Press and hold| on the driverdoor until the trunk latches.A chime will sound and a DICmessage will display when theoperation is complete.

. Press the power trunk button onthe trunk lid.

Press any trunk button or the touchpad to stop the power operation.Pressing a trunk button again startsthe operation in the reverse direction.The touch pad will not close thetrunk lid.



Do not manually force the trunk lidopen or closed during a power cycle.The power trunk may be temporarilydisabled under extreme lowtemperatures, or after repeated powercycling over a short period of time.The trunk can be opened manually.

Obstacle Detection Features

If there is an obstruction during apower open or close cycle, a closingtrunk will reverse direction and anopening trunk will stop poweroperation. If there are multipleobstructions on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.After removing the obstructions,manually close the trunk lid to allownormal power operation functions toresume.

If the vehicle is locked and anobstacle prevents the trunk fromclosing and latching, the horn willsound as an alert that the trunk didnot close.

Hands-Free Power Trunk

If equipped, the power trunk may beoperated with a kicking motion underthe rear bumper at the location of theprojected logo. The RKE transmittermust be within 1 m (3 ft).

The hands-free feature will not workwhile the trunk lid is moving. To stopthe trunk while in motion, use one ofthe power trunk buttons.

The hands-free feature can becustomized. See Vehicle Personalization0 157. Choose from the following:

On-Open and Close : The kickingmotion is activated to both open andclose the trunk.

On-Open Only : The kicking motion isactivated to only open the trunk.

Off : The feature is disabled.

To operate, kick your foot straight upin one swift motion under the centerof the rear bumper at the location ofthe projected logo, then pull it back.


KEYS, DOORS, AND WINDOWS 45. Do not sweep your foot side

to side.

. Do not keep your foot under thebumper; it will not activate.

. Do not touch the trunk lid until ithas stopped moving.

. This feature may be temporarilydisabled under some conditions.If it does not respond to the kick,operate the power trunk byanother method or start thevehicle and the feature will bere-enabled.

When closing the power trunk usingthis feature, there will be a shortdelay. The taillamps will flash and achime will sound. Move away from thetrunk before it starts moving.

Projected Logo

If equipped with this feature, a vehiclelogo will be projected for one minuteonto the ground near the rear bumperwhen an RKE transmitter is detectedwithin approximately 2 m (6 ft). Theprojected logo may not be visibleunder brighter daytime conditions.

1. 1 m (3 ft) Hands-FreeOperation Detection Zone

2. 2 m (6 ft) Projected LogoDetection Zone

The projected logo shows where thekicking motion is to take place.

The projected logo will only beavailable for this RKE transmitter afterit has been out of range for at least20 seconds.

If an RKE transmitter is againdetected within approximately 2 m(6 ft) of the trunk, or anotherhands-free operation has beendetected, the one-minute timer will bereset.

The projected logo will not workunder these conditions:

. The vehicle battery is low.

. The transmission is not inP (Park).

. Hands Free Trunk Control is set toOff in vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.

. Power trunk is turned off.

. The vehicle remains parked for72 hours or more, with no RKEtransmitter use or Keyless Accessoperation. To re-enable, press anybutton on the RKE transmitter oropen and close a vehicle door.

The projected logo will not work for asingle RKE transmitter when atransmitter:

. Has been left withinapproximately 5 m (15 ft) of thetrunk for several minutes.

. Has been left inside the vehicleand all vehicle doors are closed.

. Has approached the area outsideof the trunk five times within10 minutes.



Hands-Free Trunk and Projected Logo Availability

Action Hands-Free Trunk Projected Logo

RKE transmitter entering projected logodetection zone

Operative On for one minute

RKE transmitter left inside projectedlogo detection zone for minimum of10 minutes

Operative Off until RKE transmitter button pressor a door is opened and closed

RKE transmitter brought in and out ofprojected logo detection zone five timesor more within 10 minutes

Operative Off for one hour or until RKEtransmitter button press or a door isopened and closed

Vehicle remains parked for more than72 hours

Operative Off until RKE transmitter button pressor a door is opened and closed

Vehicle battery is low Non-operative Off

Transmission is not in P (Park) Non-operative Off

Power trunk is turned off Non-operative Off

Hands-free trunk is disabled in vehiclepersonalization

Non-operative Off



Lens Cleaning

Clean the recessed lens using a soft,dampened cloth.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Caution

Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down oranchor point when securing itemsin the trunk as it could damage thehandle.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergencytrunk release handle on the trunk lid.This handle will glow following

exposure to light. Pull the releasehandle to open the trunk from theinside.

After pulling the emergency trunkrelease handle, push the handle backinto the bezel.

Rear Seat Pass-Through

If equipped, use the rear seatpass-through door when transportinglong items. See Rear Seat Pass-ThroughDoor 0 75.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

The indicator light, on the instrumentpanel near the windshield, indicatesthe status of the system.

Off : Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid : Vehicle is secured duringthe delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash : Vehicle is unsecured.A door, the hood, or the trunk is open.

Slow Flash : Alarm system is armed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle in one ofthree ways:

. Use the RKE transmitter.

. Use the Keyless Accesssystem.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin toslowly flash indicating the alarmsystem is operating. Pressing Qon the RKE transmitter a secondtime will bypass the 30-seconddelay and immediately arm thealarm system.

The vehicle alarm system will not armif the doors are locked with the key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking with the RKEtransmitter, the horn will chirp andthe lights will flash to indicatepre-alarm. If the vehicle is not started,or the door is not unlocked bypressing K on the RKE transmitterduring the 10-second pre-alarm, thealarm will be activated.

The alarm will also be activated if apassenger door, the trunk, or the hoodis opened without first disarming thesystem. When the alarm is activated,the turn signals flash and the hornsounds for about 30 seconds. Thealarm system will then re-arm tomonitor the next unauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Unlock the vehicle using theKeyless Access system.

. Start the vehicle.



To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

. Lock the vehicle after alloccupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.

. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter or use the KeylessAccess system.

Unlocking the driver door with the keywill not disarm the system or turn offthe alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps andthe lights flash three times, a previousalarm occurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Power Sounder, InclinationSensor, and Intrusion Sensor

In addition to the standardtheft-deterrent system features, thissystem may also have a powersounder, inclination sensor, andintrusion sensor.

The power sounder provides anaudible alarm, which is distinct fromthe vehicle’s horn. It has its ownpower source, and can sound an alarmif the vehicle’s battery iscompromised.

The inclination sensor can set off thealarm if it senses movement of thevehicle, such as a change in vehicleorientation.

The intrusion sensor monitors thevehicle interior, and can activate thealarm if it senses unauthorized entryinto the vehicle’s interior. Do notallow passengers or pets to remain inthe vehicle when the intrusion sensoris activated.

Before arming the theft-deterrentsystem and activating the intrusionsensor:

. Make sure all doors and windowsare completely closed.

. Secure any loose items such assunshades.

. Make sure there are noobstructions blocking the sensorsin the front overhead console.

Inclination and IntrusionSensors Disable Switch

It is recommended that the intrusionand inclination sensors be deactivatedif pets are left in the vehicle or if thevehicle is being transported.



With the vehicle turned off, pressoin the front overhead console. Theindicator light will come onmomentarily, indicating that thesesensors have been disabled for thenext alarm system arming cycle.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 407.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the vehicle is startedor the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORYand a valid transmitter is present inthe vehicle.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is a problemwith arming or disarming thetheft-deterrent system.

The system has one or more RKEtransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle. Only a correctly matched RKEtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light may come on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the vehicle will not change ignitionmodes (ACC/ACCESSORY, on, off), andthe RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter.Or, you may try placing thetransmitter in the transmitter pocketlocated in the center console. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

If the ignition modes will not changewith the other transmitter or with thetransmitter in the transmitter pocket,your vehicle needs service. If theignition does change modes, the firsttransmitter may be faulty. See yourdealer.



It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementRKE transmitters. Up to eighttransmitters can be programmed forthe vehicle. To program additionaltransmitters, see “ProgrammingTransmitters to the Vehicle” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

Do not leave the transmitter or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, youcould hit a vehicle on the right.Check the inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changinglanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen from thedriver seat.

Power Mirrors

1. Move the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press one of the four arrows tomove the mirror.

3. Move the selector switch to ) todeselect the mirror.

Memory Mirrors

The vehicle may have memorymirrors. See Memory Seats 0 66.



Lane Change Alert (LCA)

The vehicle may have LCA. See LaneChange Alert (LCA) 0 268.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle has a turn signal indicatoron the mirror housings. The indicatorwill flash when a turn signal or thehazard warning flashers are used.

Folding MirrorsPower Folding Mirrors

If equipped with power foldingmirrors, press the down arrow on thecontrol pad while the selector switchis at ). Press again to unfold.

Remote Mirror Folding

If equipped, press and hold Q on theRKE transmitter for approximatelyone second to remotely fold theexterior mirrors. Press and hold K onthe RKE transmitter for approximatelyone second to unfold. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Manual Folding Mirrors

If equipped, the mirrors can be foldedinward toward the vehicle to preventdamage when going through anautomatic car wash. Push the mirroroutward to return it to the originalposition.

Heated MirrorsThe rear window defogger also heatsthe outside mirrors.

K : Press to heat the outside mirrors.

See Automatic Climate Control System(Dual Zone) 0 175 or Automatic ClimateControl System (Quad Zone) 0 180.

Automatic Dimming MirrorThe vehicle has automatic dimmingoutside mirrors. The mirrors willadjust for the glare of the headlampsbehind you.

Reverse Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with memory seats, thepassenger and/or driver mirror tilts toa preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). This allowsthe curb to be seen when parallelparking.

The mirror(s) return to the originalposition when:

. The vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or remains inR (Reverse) for about 30 seconds.

. The ignition is turned off.

. The vehicle is driven inR (Reverse) above a set speed.

To turn this feature on or off, seeVehicle Personalization 0 157.



Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind your vehicle.

Do not spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror. Use a soft towel dampenedwith water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming rearview mirror. The mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

Rear Camera MirrorIf equipped, this automatic dimmingmirror provides a wide angle cameraview of the area behind the vehicle.

Pull the tab to turn on the display.Push the tab to turn it off. When offthe mirror is automatic dimming.Adjust the mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle while thedisplay is off.

Press V to scroll through theadjustment options.

Presst andu to adjust the settingsusing the indicators on the mirror.The indicators will remain visible forfive seconds after the last buttonactivation, and the settings willremain saved.



The adjustment options are:

. Brightness

. Zoom

. Tilt

{ Warning

The Rear Camera Mirror (RCM) hasa limited view. Portions of the road,vehicles, and other objects may notbe seen. Do not drive or park thevehicle using only this camera.Objects may appear closer thanthey are. Check the outside mirrorsor glance over your shoulder whenmaking lane changes or merging.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.



Troubleshooting

See your dealer for service if a bluescreen and3 are displayed in themirror, and the display shuts off. Also,push the tab as indicated to return tothe automatic dimming mode.

The Rear Camera Mirror may not workproperly or display a clear image if:

. There is glare from the sun orheadlamps. This may obstructobjects from view.

. Dirt, snow, or other debris blocksthe camera lens. Clean the lenswith a soft damp cloth, or ifequipped, with the Rear CameraWasher. See Windshield Wiper/Washer 0 120.

. The camera’s mounting on thevehicle has been damaged, and/orthe position or the mounting angleof the camera has changed.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helpless adult,or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windows closedin warm or hot weather. They canbe overcome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in a



pulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce the sound,open either a front window or thesunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriously injuredor killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Never leave theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter in a vehicle withchildren. When there are children inthe rear seat, use the windowlockout switch to prevent operationof the windows. See Keys 0 28.

Power windows work when theignition is on, in ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 205.

Using the window switch, press toopen or pull to close the window.

The windows may be temporarilydisabled if they are used repeatedlywithin a short time.

Window Lockout

This feature stops the rear passengerwindows from working.

. PressZ to engage the rearwindow lockout feature. Theindicator light is on when engaged.

. PressZ again to disengage.

Window Express Movement

All windows can be opened withoutholding the window switch. Press theswitch down fully and quickly releaseto express open the window.



If equipped, pull the window switchup fully and quickly release to expressclose the window.

Briefly press or pull the windowswitch in the same direction to stopthat window’s express movement.

Window Automatic ReversalSystem

The express-close feature will reversewindow movement if it comes incontact with an object. Extreme coldor ice could cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will operatenormally after the object or conditionis removed.

Automatic Reversal SystemOverride

{ Warning

If automatic reversal systemoverride is active, the window willnot reverse automatically. You orothers could be injured and thewindow could be damaged. Beforeusing automatic reversal system

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

override, make sure that all peopleand obstructions are clear of thewindow path.

When the engine is on, override theautomatic reversal system by pullingand holding the window switch ifconditions prevent it from closing.

Programming the PowerWindows

Programming may be necessary if thevehicle battery has been disconnectedor discharged. If the window is unableto express-up, program eachexpress-close window:

1. Close all doors.

2. Turn the ignition on or to ACC/ACCESSORY.

3. Partially open the window to beprogrammed. Then close it andcontinue to pull the switchbriefly after the window has fullyclosed.

4. Open the window and continueto press the switch briefly afterthe window has fully opened.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature allows all thewindows to be opened remotely.If enabled in vehicle personalization,press and hold K on the RKEtransmitter. See Vehicle Personalization0 157.

Sun Visors



Pull the sun visor down to block glare.Detach the sun visor from the centermount to pivot to the side window,or to extend along the rod.

Rear Window Sunshade

If equipped, press and release theswitch. The rear window sunshadewill fully extend. To close thesunshade, press and release the switchagain. The sunshade will fully close.

When shifting the vehicle intoR (Reverse), the rear windowsunshade will automatically retract if

it is extended. It may re-extend after ashort delay when shifting into D(Drive).

There is also a control for the rearwindow sunshade on the rear doorpanel.

Rear Passenger Door Sunshades

If equipped, use the handle to pull thesunshade up and attach to the holderat the top of the window.

To close the sunshade, use the handleto unhook and hold it while itretracts down.



Roof

SunroofIf equipped with a sunroof, theignition must be on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active, tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions 0 200 and Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) 0 205.

1. SLIDE Switch2. TILT Switch

Slide Switch

Express-Open/Express-Close : Pressthe rear or front ofD (1) to thesecond detent and release toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Open/Close (Manual Mode) :Press the rear ofD (1) to the firstdetent and hold to open the sunroof.Press the front ofD (1) to the firstdetent and hold to close the sunroof.

Tilt Switch

Vent Feature : Press and hold thefront ofE (2) to vent the sunroof.

Press and hold the rear ofE (2) toclose the sunroof vent.

Power Sunshades

If equipped, pressF to open orclose the front sunroof sunshade.



If equipped, pressG to open orclose the rear sunroof sunshade.

The rear door panels have controls forthe rear sunroof sunshade. PressQto open or close.

Automatic Reversal System

The sunroof has an automatic reversalsystem that is only active when thesunroof is operated inexpress-close mode.

If an object is in the path whileexpress closing, the reversal systemwill detect an object, stop, and openthe sunroof again.

If frost or other conditions preventclosing, override the feature by closingthe sunroof in manual mode. To stopmovement, release the switch.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loose debris.Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealingarea using a clean cloth, mild soap,and water. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this is normal.


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 61

Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 64Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . 65Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Heated and Ventilated RearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Rear Seat Pass-Through Door . . . . . 75

Seat BeltsSeat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Seat Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Replacing Seat Belt System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . 85When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . 87How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . 87What Will You See after an AirbagInflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . 89Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . 93

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Replacing Airbag System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Infants and Young Children . . . . . . 97Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . 99Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . 101Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . 102

Replacing LATCH System PartsAfter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theRear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in theFront Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110


62 SEATS AND RESTRAINTS

Head RestraintsThe vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinalinjury in a crash. Do not drive untilthe head restraints for all occupantsare installed and adjusted properly.

If your vehicle has rear headrestraints that fold down, alwaysreturn them to the full uprightposition whenever an occupant isseated in the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

Pull the head restraint up to raise it.Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked in place.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton located on top of the seatback,and push the head restraint down. Tryto move the head restraint after thebutton is released to make sure that itis locked in place.



The fore and aft position of the headrestraint can be adjusted.

To adjust the head restraint forwardand rearward, press the button locatedon the side facing of the headrestraint and move it forward orrearward until the desired lockingposition is reached. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it is lockedin place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it is lockedin place.

To lower the head restraint, press thebutton, located on the top of theseatback, and push the head restraintdown. Try to move the head restraintafter the button is released to makesure that it is locked in place.

Always adjust the head restraint sothat the top of the restraint is at thesame height as the top of theoccupant's head.

Rear outboard head restraints are notremovable.

The rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be folded.



Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ Warning

You can lose control of the vehicleif you try to adjust a driver seatwhile the vehicle is moving. Adjustthe driver seat only when thevehicle is not moving.

{ Warning

The power seats will work with theignition off. Children could operatethe power seats and be injured.Never leave children alone in thevehicle.

To adjust:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control forward orrearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat by movingthe rear of the control up or down.

To adjust the seatback, see RecliningSeatbacks 0 66.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment 0 64.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibrating pulsealert in the driver seat to help avoidcrashes. See Driver Assistance Systems0 250.

Lumbar Adjustment

Base Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

. Press Forward (2) to move lumbarsupport forward.

. Press Rearward (1) to movelumbar support rearward.



Uplevel Lumbar and Upper BackSupport Adjustment

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use all uplevel seat features.

Platinum Seat

1. Feature Select2. Up3. Forward4. Down5. Rearward

1. To adjust lumbar support,if equipped: Toggle the FeatureSelect (1) to view adjustable seatoptions on the infotainmentdisplay.

2. Select lumbar support.

. Press Up (2) to move lumbarsupport upward.

. Press Forward (3) to movelumbar support forward.

. Press Down (4) to movelumbar support down.

. Press Rearward (5) to movelumbar support rearward.

To adjust upper back support,if equipped:

1. Toggle the Feature Select (1) toview adjustable seat options onthe infotainment display.

2. Select Upper Back Support.

3. Press Forward (3) to movesupport forward or Rearward (5)to move support rearward.

Thigh Support Adjustment

To adjust thigh support, if equipped:

1. Toggle the Feature Select (3) toview adjustable seat options onthe infotainment display.

2. Select cushion length adjuster.

3. Press and hold the controlforward (2) to increase orrearward (1) to decrease cushionlength.



Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust:

. Tilt the top of the controlrearward to recline.

. Tilt the top of the control forwardto raise the seatback.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckled up,the seat belts cannot do their job.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it will bein front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit well backin the seat and wear the seat beltproperly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if thevehicle is moving.

Memory Seats



If equipped, memory seats allow twodrivers to save and recall their uniqueseat positions for driving the vehicle,and a shared exit position for gettingout of the vehicle. Other featurepositions may also be saved, such aspower mirrors and power steeringwheel, if equipped. Memory positionsare linked to RKE transmitter 1 or 2for automatic memory recalls.

Before saving, adjust all availablememory feature positions. Turn theignition on and then press and releaseSET; a beep will sound. Thenimmediately press and hold 1, 2,orB (Exit) until two beeps sound.To manually recall these positions,press and hold 1, 2, orB until thesaved position is reached. Follow theinstructions under “Saving MemoryPositions.”

The vehicle identifies the currentdriver’s RKE transmitter number(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29. Only RKEtransmitters 1 and 2 can be used forautomatic memory recalls. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) welcomemessage indicating the transmitter

number may display for the first fewignition cycles following a transmitterchange. For Seat Entry Memory towork properly, save the positions tothe memory button (1 or 2) matchingthe RKE transmitter number displayedin the DIC welcome message. Carrythe linked RKE transmitter whenentering the vehicle.

Memory adjustments may not beavailable upon delivery or after serviceuntil steps in “Saving MemoryPositions” section are performed.

Vehicle Personalization Settings

. To have the Seat Entry Memorymovement begin when the vehicleis started, select the Settingsmenu, then Vehicle, then SeatingPosition, and then Seat EntryMemory. Select On or Off. See“Seat Entry Memory” later in thissection.

. Seat Exit Memory movementbegins when the ignition is turnedoff and the driver door is opened,or when the ignition is turned offwith the driver door alreadyopened, select the Settings menu,

then Vehicle, then SeatingPosition, and then Seat ExitMemory. Select On or Off. See“Seat Exit Memory” later in thissection.

. See Vehicle Personalization 0 157for additional setting information.

Identifying Driver Number

To identify the driver number:

1. Start the vehicle with a differentkey or RKE transmitter. The DICshould display the drivernumber; 1 or 2. Turn the ignitionoff and remove the key or RKEtransmitter from the vehicle.

2. Start the vehicle with the initialkey or RKE transmitter. The DICshould display the other drivernumber not shown in Step 1.

Saving Memory Positions

Read these instructions completelybefore saving memory positions.

To save preferred driving positions1 and 2:




A DIC welcome message mayindicate driver number 1 or 2.

2. Adjust all available memoryfeatures to the desired drivingposition.

3. Press and release SET; a beepwill sound.

4. Immediately press and hold the1 or 2 memory button matchingthe above DIC welcome messageuntil two beeps sound.

If too much time passes betweenreleasing SET and pressing 1, thememory position will not besaved and two beeps will notsound. Repeat Steps 3 and 4.

1 or 2 corresponds to the drivernumber. See “Identifying DriverNumber” previously in thissection.

5. Repeat Steps 1–4 for a seconddriver using 1 or 2.

To save the position forB and SeatExit Memory, repeat Steps 1–4 usingB. This saves the position for gettingout of the vehicle.

Save preferred memory featurepositions to both 1 and 2 if you arethe only driver.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

Press and hold 1, 2, orB to recallthe previously saved memorypositions.

To stop Manual Memory Recallmovement, release 1, 2, orB or pressany of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected

. Power steering wheel, if equipped

Seat Entry Memory

If equipped with memory seat 1, 2,orB buttons on the passenger door,those positions must be recalledmanually. They will not be linked toan RKE transmitter.

The vehicle identifies the number ofthe current driver’s RKE transmitter(1–8). See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation 0 29. If the RKEtransmitter is 1 or 2, and Seat EntryMemory is programmed on in vehiclepersonalization, the positions saved tothe same memory button number 1 or2 are automatically recalled when theignition is turned on, or turned fromoff to ACC/ACCESSORY. RKEtransmitters 3–8 will not provideautomatic memory recalls.

To turn Seat Entry Memory on or off,see "Vehicle Personalization Settings"previously in this section and VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) tostart Seat Entry Memory. Seat EntryMemory will complete if the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park) prior toreaching the saved memory position.

To stop Seat Entry Memorymovement, turn the ignition off orpress any of the following controls:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 69. Power mirror, with the driver or

passenger side mirror selected


If the saved memory seat positiondoes not automatically recall or recallsto the wrong positions, the driver’sRKE transmitter number (1 or 2) maynot match the memory buttonnumber that positions were saved to.Try saving the position to the othermemory button or try the other RKEtransmitter.

Seat Exit Memory

Seat Exit Memory is not linked to anRKE transmitter. The position saved toB is used for all drivers. To turn SeatExit Memory on or off, see "VehiclePersonalization Settings" previously inthis section and Vehicle Personalization0 157.

If turned on, the position saved toBis automatically recalled when one ofthe following occurs:

. The vehicle is turned off and thedriver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

To stop Seat Exit Memory movement,press any of the following memorycontrols:

. Power seat

. Memory SET, 1, 2, orB

. Power mirror, with the driver orpassenger side mirror selected


Obstructions

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or power steering wheelwhile recalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction and try the recall again.If the memory position still does notrecall, see your dealer for service.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. To reducethe risk of burns, use care whenusing the seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do not placeanything on the seat that insulatesagainst heat, such as a blanket,cushion, cover, or similar item. Thismay cause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seat heatermay cause a burn or may damagethe seat.



If equipped, the buttons are near theclimate controls on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.


PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

PressC or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat.

Press the button once for the highestsetting. With each press of the button,the seat will change to the next lowersetting, and then to the off setting.The indicator lights above the buttons

indicate three for the highest settingand one for the lowest. If the frontheated seats are on high, the levelmay automatically be lowered afterapproximately 30 minutes.

When this feature is off, the heatedand ventilated seat symbols on thebuttons are white. A ventilated seathas a fan that pulls or pushes airthrough the seat. The air is notcooled. When a heated seat is turnedon, the symbol turns red. When aventilated seat is turned on, thesymbol turns blue.

The passenger seat may take longer toheat up.

Auto Heated and Ventilated Seats

If the vehicle is equipped with autoheated or ventilated seats, and theengine is running, this feature willautomatically activate the heated orventilated seats at the level requiredby the vehicle's interior temperature.

The active high, medium, low, or offheated or ventilated seat level will beindicated by the manual heated andventilated seat buttons on the centerstack. Use the manual heated and

ventilated seat buttons on the centerstack to turn auto heated or ventilatedseats off. If the passenger seat isunoccupied, the auto heated orventilated seats feature will notactivate that seat. The auto heatedand ventilated seats feature can beprogrammed to always be enabledwhen the vehicle is on. If equippedwith a heated steering wheel, the autoheated steering wheel activation willfollow the heated seat auto activationand the heated wheel indicator willfollow the state of the steeringwheel heat.

See Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

Remote Start Heated and VentilatedSeats

If equipped, the heated seats will turnon automatically during a remotestart if it is cold outside and theventilated seats will turn onautomatically if it is hot outside.If equipped, the heated steering wheelwill turn on automatically during aremote start if it is cold outside. Theheated and ventilated seat indicators



and heated steering wheel indicatormay not come on during thisoperation.

The heated and ventilated seats andheated steering wheel may cancelwhen the vehicle is started. Thesefeatures can be manually selectedafter the ignition is turned on.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced. Thisis normal.

The heated or ventilated seats will notturn on during a remote start unlessthey are enabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start 0 36 andVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Massage

If equipped, the ignition must be onto use the massage feature.

To activate and adjust the massagefeature:

1. Toggle the center selectioncontrol (2) to view availablemassage options on theinfotainment display.

2. Select massage feature.

3. Press the control up (3) ordown (5) to select themassage type.

4. Press the control forward (4) orrearward (6) to change theintensity.

5. Press the massage controlbutton (1) to recall the lastmassage type and intensity.



Rear SeatsRear Seat Reminder

If equipped, the message REAR SEATREMINDER LOOK IN REAR SEATdisplays under certain conditionsindicating there may be an item orpassenger in the rear seat. Checkbefore exiting the vehicle.

This feature will activate when asecond row door is opened while thevehicle is on or up to 10 minutesbefore the vehicle is turned on. Therewill be an alert when the vehicle isturned off. The alert does not directlydetect objects in the rear seat; instead,under certain conditions, it detectswhen a rear door is opened andclosed, indicating that there may besomething in the rear seat.

The feature is active only once eachtime the vehicle is turned on and off,and will require reactivation byopening and closing the second rowdoors. There may be an alert evenwhen there is nothing in the rear seat;for example, if a child entered the

vehicle through the rear door and leftthe vehicle without the vehicle beingshut off.

The feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

Rear Seat Adjustment

Caution

Do not adjust the power seat whena child restraint is installed.Adjusting the seat may causedamage to the installed childrestraint. Use the window lockoutbutton on the driver door toprevent adjustment of the seatwhenever a child restraint isinstalled.

If equipped, the armrest may haveseat adjustment controls. The rearseat adjustment controls are lockedwhen the window lockout switch isengaged. See Armrest Storage 0 115.

1. Seatback Display and LumbarAdjustment Control

2. Up3. Rearward4. Down5. Forward6. Power Seat Adjustment7. Power Seat Adjustment8. Massage

When the seatback display control (1)is toggled, a panel display will beactivated from the driver or passengerseatback. The rear seatback willautomatically recline when the rearseat is moved forward.



To adjust the seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or rearwardby sliding the control (6) forwardor rearward or by tilting thecontrol (7) forward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part of theseat cushion by moving the frontof the control (6) up or down.

To activate the massage feature,if equipped:

1. Press the seatback displaycontrol (1).

2. Press up (2) or down (4) to selectthe massage type.

3. Press forward (5) or rearward (3)to change the intensity.

4. Press the massage control button(8) to recall the last massagetype and intensity.

Easy Exit

If equipped, press S to tilt the front ofthe seat fully downward and to movethe entire seat fully rearward. The seatwill also move to this position whenthe rear door is opened.

Lumbar AdjustmentIf a child restraint is installed, seeRear Seats 0 72.

If equipped, the armrest may havecontrols for lumbar and upper backsupport. See Armrest Storage 0 115.

When the center selection control (1)is toggled, a panel display will beactivated from the driver or passengerseatback.

To adjust lumbar support, if equipped:

1. Toggle the center selectioncontrol (1) to view adjustableseat options on the display.

2. Select lumbar support.

3. Press and hold the controlforward (5) to increase orrearward (3) to decrease support.



4. Press and hold the controlupward (2) to raise ordownward (4) to lower the heightof the support.

To adjust upper back support,if equipped:

1. Toggle the center selectioncontrol (1) to view adjustableseat options on the display.

2. Select upper back support.

3. Press and hold the controlforward (5) to increase orrearward (3) to decrease support.

Heated and VentilatedRear Seats

{ Warning

If temperature change or pain tothe skin cannot be felt, the seatheater may cause burns. See theWarning under Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 69.

Platinum Seat

If equipped, the buttons are on therear passenger doors. To operate, theengine must be running.

PressC or { to ventilate the left orright outboard seat.

Press M or L, if equipped, to heat theleft or right outboard seatcushion only.

PressI or+, if equipped, to heatthe left or right outboardseatback only.

Press J or z, if equipped, to heat theleft or right outboard seat cushion andseatback.

On vehicles without rear climatecontrols, an indicator light on thebutton will turn on when the heatedor ventilated seat is on. On vehicleswith rear climate controls, anindicator on the climate controldisplay appears when this featureis on.

On vehicles without rear climatecontrols, press the button again toturn this feature off. The light on thebutton will turn off. On vehicles withrear climate controls, this featureturns on the heated seat at thehighest setting. With each press of thebutton, the heated seat changes to thenext lower setting, and then the offsetting. Three lights indicate thehighest setting, and one lightindicates the lowest. If the heatedseats are on high, the level mayautomatically be lowered afterapproximately 30 minutes.



Rear SeatPass-Through Door

Some vehicles have a rear seatpass-through door in the center of therear seatback. Fold down the centerarmrest and pull the latch to open thedoor. See Armrest Storage 0 115.

Seat BeltsThis section describes how to use seatbelts properly, and some things notto do.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where a seatbelt cannot be worn properly. In acrash, if you or your passenger(s)are not wearing seat belts, injuriescan be much worse than if you arewearing seat belts. You can beseriously injured or killed by hittingthings inside the vehicle harder orby being ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ride ina cargo area, inside or outside of avehicle. In a collision, passengersriding in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed. Do

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

not allow passengers to ride in anyarea of the vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seat belts.

Always wear a seat belt, and checkthat all passenger(s) are restrainedproperly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the seat belts. SeeSeat Belt Reminders 0 137.

Why Seat Belts Work



When riding in a vehicle, you travel asfast as the vehicle does. If the vehiclestops suddenly, you keep going untilsomething stops you. It could be thewindshield, the instrument panel,or the seat belts!

When you wear a seat belt, you andthe vehicle slow down together. Thereis more time to stop because you stopover a longer distance and, when wornproperly, your strongest bones takethe forces from the seat belts. That iswhy wearing seat belts makes suchgood sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSeat Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing aseat belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a seat belt or not. Yourchance of being conscious duringand after a crash, so you canunbuckle and get out, is muchgreater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear seat belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systemsonly. They work with seat belts—not instead of them. Whether ornot an airbag is provided, alloccupants still have to buckle upto get the most protection.

Also, in nearly all states and in allCanadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing seat belts.

How to Wear Seat BeltsProperlyFollow these rules for everyone'sprotection.

There are additional things to knowabout seat belts and children,including smaller children and infants.If a child will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children 0 95 or Infants andYoung Children 0 97. Review andfollow the rules for children inaddition to the following rules.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who are wearingseat belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a seat belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front ofyou (if possible).

. Always use the correct buckle foryour seating position.


SEATS AND RESTRAINTS 77. Wear the lap part of the belt low

and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could cause seriousor even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.The shoulder belt locks if there isa sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearing yourseat belt properly.

Never allow the lap or shoulder belt tobecome loose or twisted.

Never wear the shoulder belt underboth arms or behind your back.



Always use the correct buckle for yourseating position.

Never route the lap or shoulder beltover an armrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the frontoutboard seating position mayaffect the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger SensingSystem 0 89.



If the webbing locks in the latchplate before it reaches thebuckle, tilt the latch plate flat tounlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see Seat BeltExtender 0 81.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt should returnto its stowed position.

Always stow the seat belt slowly. If theseat belt webbing returns quickly tothe stowed position, the retractor maylock and cannot be pulled out. If thishappens, pull the seat belt straight outfirmly to unlock the webbing, andthen release it. If the webbing is stilllocked in the retractor, see yourdealer.

Before a door is closed, be sure theseat belt is out of the way. If a door isslammed against a seat belt, damagecan occur to both the seat belt andthe vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder belt heightadjuster for the driver and frontoutboard passenger seating positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but not contacting,the neck. Improper shoulder beltheight adjustment could reduce the

effectiveness of the seat belt in acrash. See How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly 0 76.

Press the release button and move theheight adjuster to the desired position.The adjuster can be moved up bypushing the slide/trim up. After theadjuster is set to the desired position,try to move it down without pushingthe release button to make sure it haslocked into position.

Automatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem

The vehicle may have the AutomaticSeat Belt Tightening System.

The system activates duringemergency braking and/or suddendriving maneuvers and releases whendriving conditions return to normal.

The system will not activate if theTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl system is not functioningproperly. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 219.If there is a problem with theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem, a message displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). If asystem unavailable message displaysrepeatedly or a service messagedisplays, see your dealer. Other seatbelt functions are not affected by theAutomatic Seat Belt TighteningSystem.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has seat beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the seat beltpretensioners cannot be seen, they arepart of the seat belt assembly. Theycan help tighten the seat belts duringthe early stages of a moderate tosevere frontal, near frontal, or rear



crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met. Seatbelt pretensioners can also helptighten the seat belts in a side crashor a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash, thepretensioners and probably otherparts of the vehicle's seat belt systemwill need to be replaced. See ReplacingSeat Belt System Parts after a Crash0 82.

Do not sit on the outboard seat beltwhile entering or exiting the vehicle orat any time while sitting in the seat.Sitting on the seat belt can damagethe webbing and hardware.

Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides

Rear seat belt comfort guides mayprovide added seat belt comfort forolder children who have outgrownbooster seats and for some adults.When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt awayfrom the neck and head.

Comfort guides are available throughyour dealer for the rear outboardseating positions. Instructions areincluded with the guide.

Seat Belt Use DuringPregnancySeat belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely to beseriously injured if they do not wearseat belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lap portionshould be worn as low as possible,below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is toprotect the mother. When a seat beltis worn properly, it is more likely thatthe fetus will not be hurt in a crash.For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making seat belts effectiveis wearing them properly.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's seat belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a seat belt is not long enough,your dealer will order you an extender.When you go in to order it, take theheaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you.To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use itonly for the seat it is made to fit. Theextender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing childrestraints. For more information on



the proper use and fit of seat beltextenders see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

Safety System CheckPeriodically check the seat beltreminder, seat belts, buckles, latchplates, retractors, shoulder belt heightadjusters (if equipped), and seat beltanchorages to make sure they are allin working order. Look for any otherloose or damaged seat belt systemparts that might keep a seat beltsystem from performing properly. Seeyour dealer to have it repaired. Torn,frayed, or twisted seat belts may notprotect you in a crash. Torn or frayedseat belts can rip apart under impactforces. If a belt is torn or frayed, haveit replaced immediately. If a belt istwisted, it may be possible to untwistby reversing the latch plate on thewebbing. If the twist cannot becorrected, ask your dealer to fix it.

Make sure the seat belt reminder lightis working. See Seat Belt Reminders0 137.

Keep seat belts clean and dry. See SeatBelt Care 0 82.

Seat Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

Seat belts should be properly cared forand maintained.

Seat belt hardware should be kept dryand free of dust or debris. Asnecessary, exterior hard surfaces andseat belt webbing may be lightlycleaned with mild soap and water.Ensure there is not excessive dust ordebris in the mechanism. If dust ordebris exists in the system please seethe dealer. Parts may need to bereplaced to ensure properfunctionality of the system.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat belt

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

webbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Replacing Seat BeltSystem Parts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the seat beltsystem in the vehicle. A damagedseat belt system may not properlyprotect the person using it,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help make surethe seat belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.



After a minor crash, replacement ofseat belts may not be necessary. Butthe seat belt assemblies that wereused during any crash may have beenstressed or damaged. See your dealerto have the seat belt assembliesinspected or replaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the seat belt systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Have the seat belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicle orwhile you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 137.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the following airbags:

. A frontal airbag for the driver

. A frontal airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A knee airbag for the driver

. A knee airbag for the frontoutboard passenger

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the driver

. A seat-mounted side impact airbagfor the front outboard passenger

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seated directlybehind the driver

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directly behindthe front outboard passenger

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a label nearthe deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the center of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrumentpanel for the front outboardpassenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG ison the lower part of the instrumentpanel.

For seat-mounted side impact airbags,the word AIRBAG is on the side of theseatback closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by seat belts.Even though today's airbags are alsodesigned to help reduce the risk ofinjury from the force of an inflatingbag, all airbags must inflate veryquickly to do their job.



Here are the most important things toknow about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your seat belt, even withairbags. Airbags are designed towork with seat belts, not replacethem. Also, airbags are not designedto inflate in every crash. In somecrashes seat belts are the onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 86.

Wearing your seat belt during acrash helps reduce your chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to theseat belts. Everyone in the vehicleshould wear a seat belt properly,whether or not there is an airbagfor that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink of aneye, anyone who is up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to any airbag, as you would beif sitting on the edge of the seat orleaning forward. Seat belts helpkeep you in position before andduring a crash. Always wear a seatbelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle. The seat belts and thefront outboard passenger airbagsare most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in theseat with both feet on the floor.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children 0 95 orInfants and Young Children 0 97.

There is an airbag readiness light onthe instrument cluster, which showsthe airbag symbol. The system checksthe airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you ifthere is an electrical problem. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 137.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passenger frontalairbag is in the passenger sideinstrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.



Driver Side Shown, Passenger SideSimilar

The seat-mounted side impact airbagsfor the driver and front outboardpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, the airbagmight not inflate properly or itmight force the object into thatperson causing severe injury oreven death. The path of an inflating

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

airbag must be kept clear. Do notput anything between an occupantand an airbag, and do not attach orput anything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any other airbagcovering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roof ofa vehicle with roof-rail airbags byrouting a rope or tie‐down throughany door or window opening. If youdo, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped with airbags.See Airbag System 0 83. Airbags aredesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds the specific airbag system'sdeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict how

severe a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants. The vehiclehas electronic sensors that help theairbag system determine the severityof the impact. Deployment thresholdscan vary with specific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal crashes to help reduce thepotential for severe injuries, mainly tothe driver's or front outboardpassenger's head and chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed or moving,rigid or deformable, narrow or wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, in rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.



In addition, the vehicle has advancedtechnology frontal airbags. Advancedtechnology frontal airbags adjust therestraint according to either crashseverity or occupant interaction.

Knee airbags are designed to inflate inmoderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal impacts. Knee airbags are notdesigned to inflate during vehiclerollovers, in rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate tosevere side crashes depending on thelocation of the impact. Seat-mountedside impact airbags are not designedto inflate in frontal impacts, nearfrontal impacts, rollovers, or rearimpacts. A seat-mounted side impactairbag is designed to inflate on theside of the vehicle that is struck.

Roof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the location ofthe impact. In addition, these roof-railairbags are designed to inflate duringa rollover or in a severe frontalimpact. Roof-rail airbags are notdesigned to inflate in rear impacts.

Both roof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,if the sensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of the vehicledamage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break out ofthe cover. The inflator, the airbag, andrelated hardware are all part of theairbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Are theAirbags? 0 85.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal or nearfrontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contact theinside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by seat belts by distributingthe force of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help contain the head andchest of occupants in the outboardseating positions in the first andsecond rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to helpreduce the risk of full or partialejection in rollover events, althoughno system can prevent all suchejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarily becausethe occupant's motion is not towardthose airbags. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? 0 86.



Airbags should never be regarded asanything more than a supplement toseat belts.

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates?After frontal, knee, and seat-mountedside impact airbags inflate, theyquickly deflate, so quickly that somepeople may not even realize theairbags inflated. Roof-rail airbags maystill be at least partially inflated forsome time after they inflate. Somecomponents of the airbag module maybe hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbags, see Where Arethe Airbags? 0 85.

The parts of the airbag that come intocontact with you may be warm, butnot too hot to touch. There may besome smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags.Airbag inflation does not prevent thedriver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer thevehicle, nor does it prevent peoplefrom leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, there maybe dust in the air. This dust couldcause breathing problems forpeople with a history of asthma orother breathing trouble. To avoidthis, everyone in the vehicle shouldget out as soon as it is safe to doso. If you have breathing problemsbut cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then getfresh air by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off the fuelsystem after the airbags inflate. Thefeature may also activate, withoutairbag inflation, after an event thatexceeds a predetermined threshold.After turning the ignition off and thenon again, the fuel system will return

to normal operation; the doors can belocked, the interior lamps can beturned off, and the hazard warningflashers can be turned off using thecontrols for those features. If any ofthese systems are damaged in thecrash they may not operate as normal.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflate theairbags may have also damagedimportant functions in the vehicle,such as the fuel system, brake andsteering systems, etc. Even if thevehicle appears to be drivable aftera moderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that could makeit difficult to safely operate thevehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.



Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.

. Airbags are designed to inflateonly once. After an airbag inflates,you will need some new parts forthe airbag system. If you do notget them, the airbag system willnot be there to help protect you inanother crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules andpossibly other parts. The servicemanual for the vehicle covers theneed to replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after a crash.See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy 0 408 and Event DataRecorders 0 409.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger Sensing SystemThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the front outboardpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will light onthe overhead console when the vehicleis started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either the

word ON or OFF, or the symbol for onor off, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator 0 138.

The passenger sensing system turnsoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag undercertain conditions. No other airbag isaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing system workswith sensors that are part of the frontoutboard passenger seat and seat belt.The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag should be allowed toinflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.



Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag inflates.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the passenger frontal airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If securing aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure childrestraints in the rear seat. Considerusing another vehicle to transportthe child when a rear seat is notavailable.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag if:

. The front outboard passenger seatis unoccupied.

. The system determines that aninfant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat for aperiod of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or the passengersensing system.

When the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag, the OFF indicator will light andstay lit as a reminder that the airbagsare off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator 0 138.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed theairbag(s) to be enabled, the ONindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbag(s) are active.

For some children, including childrenin child restraints, and for very smalladults, the passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle who has



outgrown child restraints should weara seat belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 137 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag if the system determinesthat an infant is present in a childrestraint. If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the ON indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 108or Securing Child Restraints (Withthe Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 110.

Make sure the seat belt retractoris locked by pulling the shoulderbelt all the way out of theretractor when installing thechild restraint, even if the childrestraint is equipped with a seatbelt lock-off. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the ON indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seat

cushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraints0 62.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system may ormay not turn off the airbags for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rearseat. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat, even if theON indicator is not lit.



If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat, butthe OFF indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag:


2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of thebelt is pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking featurewill be engaged. This mayunintentionally cause thepassenger sensing system to turnthe airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this positionfor two to three minutes afterthe ON indicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbag willnot be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboard passengerseat, if the passenger airbag OFFindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Seat belts help keep the passenger inposition on the seat during vehiclemaneuvers and braking, which helpsthe passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status.See “Seat Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.



A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing system operates.We recommend that you not use seatcovers or other aftermarket equipmentexcept when approved by GM for yourspecific vehicle. See Adding Equipmentto the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 93 formore information about modificationsthat can affect how the systemoperates.

The ON indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or other electronicdevice is put on an unoccupied seat.If this is not desired remove the objectfrom the seat.

{ Warning

Stowing articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicle shouldbe serviced. There are parts of theairbag system in several places aroundthe vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout servicing the vehicle and theairbag system. To purchase a servicemanual, see Publication OrderingInformation 0 406.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and the 12‐voltbattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of the airbagsystem. Be sure to follow properservice procedures, and make surethe person performing work for youis qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheet metalmay keep the airbag system fromworking properly.

The operation of the airbag systemcan also be affected by changing,including improperly repairing orreplacing, any parts of the following:

. Airbag system, including airbagmodules, front or side impactsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule, or airbag wiring

. Front seats, including stitching,seams or zippers

. Seat belts

. Steering wheel, instrument panel,overhead console, ceiling trim,or pillar garnish trim

. Inner door seals, includingspeakers



Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the location ofthe airbag modules and sensors,sensing and diagnostic module, andairbag wiring along with the properreplacement procedures.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position, whichincludes sensors that are part of thepassenger seat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properly ifthe original seat trim is replaced withnon-GM covers, upholstery, or trim; orwith GM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on top ofthe seat fabric, could also interferewith the operation of the passengersensing system. This could eitherprevent proper deployment of thepassenger airbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system fromproperly turning off the passengerairbag(s). See Passenger SensingSystem 0 89.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tires andWheels 0 353 for additional importantinformation.

If the vehicle must be modifiedbecause you have a disability and havequestions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicle ismodified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. See CustomerAssistance Offices 0 399.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. See AirbagReadiness Light 0 137.

Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag maynot work properly. Do not open orbreak the airbag coverings. If thereare any opened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbag coveringand/or airbag module replaced. Forthe location of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? 0 85. Seeyour dealer for service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle. A damagedairbag system may not properlyprotect you and your passenger(s)in a crash, resulting in seriousinjury or even death. To help makesure the airbag systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. See yourdealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light 0 137.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear the vehicle’sseat belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:

. Sit all the way back on the seat.Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Doesthe shoulder belt rest on theshoulder? If yes, continue. If no,try using the rear seat beltcomfort guide, if available. See“Rear Seat Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 78. If acomfort guide is not available, or ifthe shoulder belt still does not reston the shoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low and snugon the hips, touching the thighs?If yes, continue. If no, return tothe booster seat.

. Can proper seat belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no, returnto the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way to wearseat belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulder belt



can provide. The shoulder beltshould not cross the face or neck.The lap belt should fit snuglybelow the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. This applies beltforce to the child's pelvic bones ina crash. It should never be wornover the abdomen, which couldcause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Seat Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt 0 78.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can be thrownout of the vehicle. Older children needto use seat belts properly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one child towear the same seat belt. The seatbelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, they can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A seat belt must be used byonly one person at a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear the seatbelt with the shoulder belt behindtheir back. A child can be seriouslyinjured by not wearing thelap-shoulder belt properly. In a

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt. Thechild could move too far forwardincreasing the chance of head andneck injury. The child might alsoslide under the lap belt. The beltforce would then be applied righton the abdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.



Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither the distancetraveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, foreveryone, to use safety restraints. Infact, the law in every state in theUnited States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some agemust be restrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, butit cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

tightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Never leave children unattended ina vehicle and never allow childrento play with the seat belts.

Every time infants and young childrenride in vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints. Neither the vehicle'sseat belt system nor its airbag systemis designed for them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant or child should besecured in an appropriate restraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injured orkilled. Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat.Secure a rear-facing child restraintin a rear seat. It is also better tosecure a forward-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. If you mustsecure a forward-facing childrestraint in the front outboard seat,always move the front passengerseat as far back as it will go.

Child restraints are devices used torestrain, seat, or position children inthe vehicle and are sometimes calledchild seats or car seats.

There are three basic types of childrestraints:

. Forward-facing child restraints

. Rear-facing child restraints

. Belt-positioning booster seats

The proper child restraint for yourchild depends on their size, weight,and age, and also on whether thechild restraint is compatible with thevehicle in which it will be used.

For each type of child restraint, thereare many different models available.When purchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used in amotor vehicle. If it is, the restraint willhave a label saying that it meetsfederal motor vehicle safety standards.The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and heightlimitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are manykinds of restraints available forchildren with special needs.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck and headinjury in a crash, infants andtoddlers should be secured in arear-facing child restraint until agetwo, or until they reach themaximum height and weight limitsof their child restraint.



{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularseat belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should. Instead,it may settle up around the child'sabdomen. In a crash, the belt wouldapply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure.This alone could cause serious orfatal injuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children should alwaysbe secured in appropriate childrestraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Restraint

A rear-facing child restraint providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keepthe infant positioned in the restraint.

Forward-Facing Child Restraint

A forward-facing child restraintprovides restraint for the child's bodywith the harness.



Booster Seats

A belt-positioning booster seat is usedfor children who have outgrown theirforward-facing child restraint.Boosters are designed to improve thefit of the vehicle's seat belt systemuntil the child is large enough for thevehicle seat belts to fit properlywithout a booster seat. See the seatbelt fit test in Older Children 0 95.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s seat belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. Child restraints must besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. SeeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) 0 102 for moreinformation. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in thevehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructions thatcome with the restraint which may beon the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The childrestraint instructions are important,so if they are not available, obtain areplacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified Child PassengerSafety Technicians (CPSTs) areavailable to inspect and demonstratehow to correctly use and install childrestraints. In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.



Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the child properlyfollowing the instructions thatcame with that child restraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in an appropriatechild restraint secured in a rearseating position.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured in arear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child restraintin the front. This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great ifthe airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates. This is because the back ofthe rear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat is ina forward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontpassenger frontal airbag, no systemis fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deploy undersome unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag isoff. If you secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the front seat,always move the front passenger

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seat as far back as it will go. It isbetter to secure the child restraintin a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 89for additional information.

When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seats varyconsiderably in size, and some may fitin certain seating positions betterthan others.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be able toaccess adjacent seat belts or LATCHanchors for additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of theseat belt.



Wherever a child restraint is installed,be sure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andsecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured childrestraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in the vehicle.The LATCH system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installed usingeither the LATCH anchors or thevehicle’s seat belts. Do not use boththe seat belts and the LATCHanchorage system to secure arear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’s seatbelts to secure the child in the boosterseat. If the manufacturer recommendsthat the booster seat be secured withthe LATCH system, this can be doneas long as the booster seat can bepositioned properly and there is nointerference with the properpositioning of the lap-shoulder belt onthe child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also use eitherthe lower anchors or the seat belts toproperly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never beinstalled using only the top tether andanchor.

The LATCH anchorage system can beused until the combined weight of thechild plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the seat belt aloneinstead of the LATCH anchoragesystem once the combined weight ismore than 29.5 kg (65 lbs).

See Securing Child Restraints (With theSeat Belt in the Rear Seat) 0 108 orSecuring Child Restraints (With the SeatBelt in the Front Seat) 0 110.

Child restraints built after March 2014will be labeled with the specific childweight up to which the LATCH systemcan be used to install the restraint.

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.



Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tether anchorsand attachments. In this case, the seatbelt must be used (with top tetherwhere available) to secure the childrestraint. See Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the Rear Seat)0 108 or Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in the Front Seat)0 110.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal bars builtinto the vehicle. There are two loweranchors for each LATCH seating

position that will accommodate achild restraint with lowerattachments (2).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) is used to securethe top of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment hook (2) on the childrestraint connects to the top tether

anchor in the vehicle in order toreduce the forward movement androtation of the child restraint duringdriving or in a crash.

The child restraint may have a singletether (3) or a dual tether (4). Eitherwill have a single attachment hook (2)to secure the top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethersare designed for use with or withoutthe top tether being attached. Othersrequire the top tether always to beattached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraintshave a top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I : Seating positions with top tetheranchors.

H : Seating positions with two loweranchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each seating position withlower anchors has two labels, near thecrease between the seatback and theseat cushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchor symbolis on the cover.

The outboard lower anchors arebehind the vertical openings in theseat trim.

The top tether anchors are behind therear seat, on the filler panel. Open thecovers to access the anchors. Be sureto use an anchor on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the



instructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child restraintsystem or infant restraint systemsecured in a rear seating position. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 101 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCH System

{ Warning

A child could be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly attached tothe vehicle using either the LATCHanchors or the vehicle seat belt.Follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint and theinstructions in this manual.

{ Warning

To reduce the risk of serious orfatal injuries during a crash, do notattach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during acrash. A child or others could beinjured.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck. Theshoulder belt can tighten butcannot be loosened if it is locked.The shoulder belt locks when it ispulled all the way out of theretractor. It unlocks when theshoulder belt is allowed to go allthe way back into the retractor, but

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

it cannot do this if it is wrappedaround a child’s neck. If theshoulder belt is locked andtightened around a child’s neck, theonly way to loosen the belt is tocut it.

Buckle any unused seat beltsbehind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out ofthe retractor to set the lock, andtighten the belt behind the childrestraint after the child restrainthas been installed.

{ Warning




Caution


Caution

Do not let the LATCH attachmentsrub against the vehicle’s seat belts.This may damage these parts.If necessary, move buckled seatbelts to avoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 101.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lower attachmentsor the desired seating positiondoes not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint withthe top tether and the seat belts.Refer to the child restraintmanufacturer instructions andthe instructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraintmanufacturer recommends thatthe top tether be attached, attachand tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor, if equipped.

Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Open the top tether anchorcover to expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.



If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether around theinboard side of the headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, fully raise the headrestraint and route thetethers around the outboard side of the HeadRestraint posts.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,

grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint, resultingin serious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure theLATCH system is working properlyafter a crash, see your dealer tohave the system inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.



If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during a crash,new LATCH system parts may beneeded.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of thecrash.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theRear Seat)When securing a child restraint withthe seat belts in a rear seat position,study the instructions that came withthe child restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 102 forhow and where to install the childrestraint using LATCH. If a childrestraint is secured in the vehicleusing a seat belt and it uses a toptether, see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) 0 102 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint or vehicle seatposition does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the seat beltto secure the child restraint. Be sureto follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint.

If more than one child restraint needsto be installed in the rear seat, be sureto read Where to Put the Restraint0 101.

{ Warning


Caution


If the rear seat is adjustable, makesure the rear seat is positioned fullyrearward before installing a childrestraint.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.



2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's seat belt through oraround the child restraint. Thechild restraint instructions willshow you how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.



6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) 0 102.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theseat belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position. If thetop tether is attached to a top tetheranchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(With the Seat Belt in theFront Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat isa safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint 0 101.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag under certain conditions.See Passenger Sensing System 0 89 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator 0 138for more information, includingimportant safety information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboard

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

passenger frontal airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.A child in a forward-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbag(s)are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint in thefront outboard passenger seat,

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

always move the seat as far back asit will go. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

See Passenger Sensing System 0 89for additional information.

If the child restraint uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) 0 102 for toptether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchor ifa national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored, or if theinstructions that come with the childrestraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have atop tether, and that the tether beattached.

When using the lap-shoulder belt tosecure the child restraint in thisposition, follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and thefollowing instructions:

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.Move the seat upward or theseatback to an upright position,if needed, to get a tightinstallation of the child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag, the OFFindicator on the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light andstay lit when you start thevehicle. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator 0 138.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's seat belt through oraround the child restraint. Thechild restraint instructions willshow you how.

Tilt the latch plate to adjust thebelt if needed.




Position the release button onthe buckle, away from the childrestraint, so that the seat beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of thebelt, and feed the shoulder beltback into the retractor. Wheninstalling a forward-facing childrestraint, it may be helpful to useyour knee to push down on thechild restraint as you tightenthe belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.



7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theseat belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the OFFindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on and stayon when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the ON indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem 0 89.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle seat belt and letit return to the stowed position.


114 STORAGE

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . 114Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . 114Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 116

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Storage Compartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharp objectsin storage compartments. In acrash, these objects may cause thecover to open and could result ininjury.

Instrument Panel Storage

Press to release the cover.

Glove Box

To open, touch the GLOVE BOXbutton. Close the glove box manually.


STORAGE 115

Cupholders

From the rearseat armrest, press thebutton to extend the cupholders.

Push the cupholders in to close.

Armrest Storage

Press the button and pull down thearmrest.

Press the latch and pull up to accessthe storage area in the rear armrest.

If equipped, there are seat controls onboth sides of the armrest. See RearSeats 0 72.

Rear Storage

If equipped, press the lid to access thestorage compartment in the reardoors.


116 STORAGE

Rear Seat Pass-Through Door

When the rear armrest is down, thereis access to the trunk.

Press the latch and pull the accessdoor down.

Center Console Storage

Press the button and lift to access thestorage area. There are two USB portsinside. See the infotainment manual.

There are cupholders in the centerconsole. Push and release on thepassenger side of the cover to accessthe cupholders.


STORAGE 117

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

The cargo tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads and theconvenience net. See Convenience Net0 117, if equipped.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a conveniencenet in the trunk. The net is attachedto the cargo tie-downs. Put smallloads behind the net. It can also bepositioned into an envelope to holdsmaller items inside. Do not use thenet for heavy loads.


118 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . 119Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . 119Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . 119Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . 120Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Instrument Cluster (BaseLevel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) . . . . 130Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge (BaseLevel Cluster Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Voltmeter Gauge (Base LevelCluster Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . 137Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . 139Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light) . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Brake System Warning Light(3.0L Twin Turbo and 3.6LV6 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Brake System Warning Light(2.0L L4 Turbo and 4.2L TwinTurbo V8 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . 142Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Gear Shifting Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH)Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Light . . . 144Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . 144Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 144

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . 146Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . 147Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 147Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . . . 152

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Engine Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . 156Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . 156

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . . . . . 157


INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 119

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . . . . . . 162Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Controls

Steering Wheel AdjustmentPower Tilt and Telescoping SteeringWheel

Press the control to move the tilt andtelescoping steering wheel up anddown or forward and rearward.

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steering wheelcontrols. See “Steering WheelControls” in the infotainment manual.

Heated Steering Wheel

( : If equipped with a heated steeringwheel, press to turn on or off. Anindicator next to the button is litwhen the feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.



Automatic Heated Steering Wheel

If equipped with remote start, theheated steering wheel will turn onautomatically during a remote startalong with the heated seats when it iscold outside. The heated steeringwheel indicator light may notcome on.

If equipped with auto heated seats,the heated steering wheel will turn onwhen the auto heated seat isactivated. The heated steering wheelindicator will display the state of thesteering wheel heat.

See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 69 and Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

With the ignition on or in ACC/ACCESSORY, move the lever up ordown to select the wiper speed.

HI : Use for fast wipes.

LO : Use for slow wipes.

AUTO : Use this setting forintermittent wipes when Rainsense isdisabled, or for Rainsense wipes whenit is enabled. For intermittent wipes,move the lever up to AUTO, then turnthe band on the wiper lever up formore frequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes. If Rainsense isenabled, see “Rainsense” later in thissection.

If the windshield wipers are in usewhile driving, the exterior lamps comeon automatically if the exterior lampcontrol is in AUTO. The transitiontime for the lamps coming on variesbased on wiper speed. See “Lights Onwith Wipers” under AutomaticHeadlamp System 0 169.

OFF : Use to turn the wipers off.

1X : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

f : Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When the



windshield wiper lever is released,additional wipes may occur dependingon how long the windshield washerhad been activated. See Washer Fluid0 311 for information on filling thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not use thewasher until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washer fluidcan form ice on the windshield,blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades and windshield before usingthem. If frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged blades should be replaced.See Wiper Blade Replacement 0 317.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are on LO, HI, or AUTO withRainsense disabled, they willimmediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driver door isopened or within 10 minutes after theignition is off, the wipers will restartand move to the base of thewindshield.

If the ignition is turned off while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing or Rainsense, thewipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.

Rainsense

With Rainsense, a sensor near the topcenter of the windshield detects theamount of water on the windshieldand controls the sensitivity of thewindshield wiper.

Keep this area of the windshield clearof debris to allow for best systemperformance.

AUTO : If Rainsense is enabled, movethe windshield wiper lever to AUTO.Turn the band on the wiper lever toadjust the sensitivity.

. Turn the band up for moresensitivity to moisture.

. Turn the band down for lesssensitivity to moisture.

. Move the windshield wiper leverout of the AUTO position todeactivate Rainsense.

To enable or disable this feature, see“Rain Sense Wipers” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Wiper Arm Assembly Protection

When using an automatic car wash,move the windshield wiper lever toOFF. This disables the automaticRainsense windshield wipers.



With Rainsense, if the transmission isin N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed isvery slow, the wipers willautomatically stop at the base of thewindshield.

The wiper operations return to normalwhen the transmission is no longer inN (Neutral) or the vehicle speed hasincreased.

Rear Camera Washer

If equipped, push the windshieldwiper lever forward to spray washerfluid on the rear camera lens. Thelever returns to its starting positionwhen released. See Rear Camera Mirror0 53.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receives itsheading and other information fromthe Global Positioning System (GPS)antenna, StabiliTrak/ElectronicStability Control (ESC), and vehiclespeed information.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number of milesor degrees of turn before needing asignal from the GPS satellites. Whenthe compass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive a GPSsignal. The compass system willautomatically determine when a GPSsignal is restored and provide aheading again.

ClockThe time and date for the clock can beset using the infotainment system. See“Time/Date” in “System“ under“Settings” in the infotainment manual.

Power OutletsPower Outlet 12-Volt Direct Current

The 12-volt accessory power outletcan be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

The vehicle has an accessory poweroutlet on the rear seat trim panel.

Lift the cover to access the accessorypower outlet.



Certain accessory power plugs maynot be compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle or adapter fuses. If a problemis experienced, see your dealer.

When adding electrical equipment, besure to follow the proper installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 285.

Caution

Hanging heavy equipment from thepower outlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, such ascell phone charge cords.

Always unplug electrical equipmentwhen not in use and do not plug inequipment that exceeds the maximum20 amp rating.

Wireless ChargingThe system operates at 145 kHz andwirelessly charges one Qi compatiblesmartphone. The power output of thesystem is capable of charging at a rateup to 1 amp (5W), as requested by thecompatible smartphone. See RadioFrequency Statement 0 407.

{ Warning

Wireless charging can affect theoperation of an implantedpacemaker or other medical devices.If you have one, it is recommendedto consult with your doctor beforeusing the wireless charging system.

The vehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) must be active. Thewireless charging feature may notcorrectly indicate charging when thevehicle is in RAP. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) 0 205.

The operating temperature is −20 °C(−4 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F) for thecharging system and 0 °C (32 °F) to35 °C (95 °F) for the smartphone.

{ Warning

Remove all objects from thecharging pad before charging yourcompatible smartphone. Objects,such as coins, keys, rings, paperclips, or cards, between thesmartphone and charging pad willbecome very hot. On the rareoccasion that the charging systemdoes not detect an object, and theobject gets wedged between thesmartphone and charger, removethe smartphone and allow theobject to cool before removing itfrom the charging pad, to preventburns.



To charge a compatible smartphone:

1. Remove all objects from thecharging pad. The system maynot charge if there are anyobjects between the smartphoneand charging pad.

2. Place the smartphone face up onthe@ symbol on the chargingpad and align it to the left wallof the charging bin.

To maximize the charge rate,ensure the smartphone is fullyseated and centered in the binwith nothing under it. A thicksmartphone case may preventthe wireless charger from

working, or may reduce thecharging performance. See yourdealer for additional information.

3. A green} next toV willappear on the infotainmentdisplay. This indicates that thesmartphone is properlypositioned and charging. If}turns yellow, ensure that thecharging pad is clear of anyobjects and that the smartphoneis capable of wireless chargingbefore repositioning it. If}does not illuminate, thesmartphone may need to berepositioned.

Software Acknowledgements

Certain Wireless Charging Moduleproduct from LG Electronics, Inc.("LGE") contains the open sourcesoftware detailed below. Refer to theindicated open source licenses (as areincluded following this notice) for theterms and conditions of their use.

OSS Notice Information

To obtain the source code that iscontained in this product, please visithttp://opensource.lge.com. In additionto the source code, all referred licenseterms, warranty disclaimers andcopyright notices are available fordownload. LG Electronics will alsoprovide open source code to you onCD-ROM for a charge covering thecost of performing such distribution(such as the cost of media, shipping,and handling) upon email request [email protected]. This offer isvalid for three (3) years from the dateon which you purchased the product.

Freescale-WCT library

Copyright (c) 2012-2014 FreescaleSemiconductor, Inc.. All rightsreserved.

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, this list of conditions andthe following disclaimer.



2. Redistributions in binary formmust reproduce the abovecopyright notice, this list ofconditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentationand/or other materials providedwith the distribution.

3. Neither the name of thecopyright holder nor the namesof its contributors may be usedto endorse or promote productsderived from this softwarewithout specific prior writtenpermission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BYTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS ANDCONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANYEXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AREDISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANYDIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTEGOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESSINTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSEDAND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THEUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IFADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH DAMAGE.

Cigarette LighterIf equipped, there is a cigarette lighterinside the center console storage area.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it inall the way, and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Caution

Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighterback away from the heatingelement when it is hot. Damagefrom overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fusecould be blown. Do not hold acigarette lighter in while it isheating.



AshtraysIf equipped, there are front and rearashtrays.

Caution

If papers, pins, or other flammableitems are put in the ashtray, hotcigarettes or other smokingmaterials could ignite them andpossibly damage the vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

Warning Lights, Gauges,and IndicatorsWarning lights and gauges can signalthat something is wrong before itbecomes serious enough to cause anexpensive repair or replacement.Paying attention to the warning lightsand gauges could prevent injury.

Some warning lights come on brieflywhen the engine is started to indicatethey are working. When one of thewarning lights comes on and stays onwhile driving, or when one of thegauges shows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Waiting to do repairs can becostly and even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster (Base Level)

English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display area inthe center of the instrument cluster.

Use the right steering wheel control toopen and scroll through the differentitems and displays.

Press S to access the cluster

applications. Usey orz to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver Information Center(DIC) displays can be viewed. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)0 149.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Options

Audio

Press SEL to select the Audio app,then press T to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Use y orz to change the station or go to thenext or previous track.

Phone

Press SEL to select the Phone app,then press T to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recent calls,or scroll through contacts. If there isan active call, mute the phone orswitch to handset operation.

Navigation

Press SEL to select the Navigationapp, then press T to enter theNavigation menu. If there is no activeroute, you can resume the last routeand turn the voice prompts on/off.If there is an active route, press SELto cancel or resume route guidance orturn the voice prompts on or off.

Options

Press SEL to select the Options app,then press T to enter the Options

menu. Usey orz to scroll throughthe items.

Units : Press T while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose US or Metric by pressing SELwhile the desired item is highlighted.A checkmark will be displayed next tothe selected item.

Display Themes : There are twoinstrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from:Standard and Technology.

Info Pages : Press T while Info Pagesis displayed to enter the Info Pagesmenu and select the items to bedisplayed in the Info app. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 149.



Speed Warning : The Speed Warningdisplay allows the driver to set aspeed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press T when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Press SEL when Enabled ishighlighted. To set the speed, press Twhen Set Speed is highlighted. Pressy orz to adjust the value. PressSEL to set the speed. Once the speedis set, this feature can be turned offby pressing SEL while viewing thispage. If the selected speed limit isexceeded, a pop-up warning isdisplayed with a chime.

Software Information : Displays opensource software information.



Instrument Cluster (Uplevel)

English Balanced Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



Reconfigurable InstrumentCluster

The cluster display layout can bechanged.

Balanced Configuration

The Balanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones: one in thecenter of each of the gauges.

Enhanced Configuration

The Enhanced configuration has threeinteractive display zones.

Performance Configuration (CT6V-Series Only)

The Performance configuration hastwo interactive display zones.

Use the five-way control on the rightside of the steering wheel to movebetween the different display zonesand scroll through the differentdisplays.

To change the cluster configuration:

1. Find the Options page in one ofthe interactive display zones onthe cluster.

2. Press SEL to enter theOptions menu.

3. Scroll down to highlight DisplayLayout. Then press SEL toselect it.

4. Each layout in the menu isrepresented by a small previewimage of the display layout.Scroll up or down and highlightthe selection. Press SEL to selectthe desired cluster configuration.

5. Exit the Display Layout menu bypressing S.

Cluster Application Displays

The cluster can display informationregarding Navigation, Audio, andPhone.

Navigation

If there is no active route, a compasswill be displayed. If there is an activeroute, press SEL to end route guidanceor turn the voice prompts on or off.

Audio

While the Audio application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter theAudio menu. In the Audio menu,search for music, select from favorites,or change the audio source



Phone

While the Phone application page isdisplayed, press SEL to enter thePhone menu. In the Phone menu,if there is no active phone call, viewrecent calls, select from favorites,or scroll through contacts. If there isan active call, mute the phone orswitch to handset operation.

Cluster Options Menu

To enter the cluster Options menu:

1. Use the five-way control on theright side of the steering wheelto find the Options page in oneof the interactive display zoneson the cluster.

2. Press SEL on the center of thefive-way control to enter theOptions menu.

Units : Press SEL while Units ishighlighted to enter the Units menu.Choose U.S. or metric units bypressing SEL while the desired item ishighlighted. A checkmark will bedisplayed next to the selected item.

Info Pages : Press SEL while InfoPages is highlighted to select theitems to be displayed in the DIC infodisplays. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 149.

Display Layout : Press SEL whileDisplay Layout is highlighted tochange the configuration of thecluster. See “ReconfigurableInstrument Cluster” earlier in thissection.

Speed Warning : Allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SEL when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Pressy orz to adjust thevalue. This feature can be turned offby pressing and holding SEL whileviewing this page. If the selectedspeed limit is exceeded, a pop-upwarning is displayed and a chime maysound.

Head-up Display (HUD) Rotation :This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image. Press SEL onthe steering wheel controls whileHead-up Display Rotation ishighlighted to enter Adjust Mode.

Pressy orz to adjust the angle of

the HUD display. Press S or T tohighlight OK, then press SEL to savethe setting. Cancel can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

Open Source Software : Press SELwhile Open Source Software ishighlighted to display open sourcesoftware information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle'sspeed in either kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven since the tripodometer was last reset.



The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions per minute (rpm).

For vehicles with the Stop/Startsystem, when the ignition is on, thetachometer indicates the vehiclestatus. When pointing to AUTO STOP,the engine is off but the vehicle is onand can move. The engine could autostart at any time. When the indicatorpoints to OFF, the vehicle is off.

When the engine is on, thetachometer will indicate the engine’srevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetachometer may vary by severalhundred rpm’s, during Auto Stopmode, when the engine is shutting offand restarting.

Caution

If the engine is operated with therpm’s in the warning area at thehigh end of the tachometer, thevehicle could be damaged, and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the rpm’s in thewarning area.

Fuel Gauge

Base Level Standard Theme

Uplevel Balanced Configuration

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how much fuelis left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuel gaugepointing to the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicle shouldbe refueled soon.



Here are four things that some ownersask about. None of these show aproblem with the fuel gauge:

. At the service station, the fuelpump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuel tofill up than the gauge indicated.For example, the gauge may haveindicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more orless than half the tank's capacityto fill the tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few seconds tostabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine Oil Pressure Gauge(Base Level Cluster Only)

Metric, Standard Theme Shown

English, Standard Theme Shown

The engine oil pressure gauge showsthe engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity.

On some models, the oil pump willvary engine oil pressure according toengine needs. Oil pressure may changequickly as the engine speed or loadvaries. This is normal.



If the oil pressure warning light orDriver Information Center (DIC)message indicates oil pressure outsidethe normal operating range, check thevehicle's oil as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil 0 297.

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Check theoil level as soon as possible. Add oilif required, but if the oil level iswithin the operating range and theoil pressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Base Level Metric Standard Theme

Base Level English Standard Theme

Uplevel Metric BalancedConfiguration



Uplevel English BalancedConfiguration

This gauge measures the temperatureof the vehicle's engine coolant.

While driving under normal operatingconditions, if the needle moves intothe red area, the engine is too hot.Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Voltmeter Gauge (BaseLevel Cluster Only)

Standard Theme

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light 0 139.

Readings outside the normal operatingrange can also occur when a largenumber of electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and theengine is left idling for an extendedperiod. This condition is normal sincethe charging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio and airconditioner, and unplug all chargersand accessories.

Readings outside the normal operatingrange indicate a possible problem inthe electrical system. Have the vehicleserviced as soon as possible.



Seat Belt Reminders

Driver Seat Belt Reminder Light

There is a driver seat belt reminderlight on the instrument cluster.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind the driver to fasten their seatbelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclemay continue several times if thedriver remains or becomes unbuckledwhile the vehicle is moving.

If the driver seat belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Seat Belt ReminderLight

There is a passenger seat beltreminder light near the passengerairbag status indicator. See PassengerSensing System 0 89.

When the vehicle is started, this lightflashes and a chime may come on toremind passengers to fasten their seatbelt. Then the light stays on soliduntil the belt is buckled. This cyclecontinues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle is moving.

If the passenger seat belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the lightcomes on.

The front passenger seat belt reminderlight and chime may turn on if anobject is put on the seat such as abriefcase, handbag, grocery bag,

laptop, or other electronic device. Toturn off the reminder light and/orchime, remove the object from theseat or buckle the seat belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), the passengersensing system, the pretensioners, theairbag modules, the wiring, and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module.For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System 0 83.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when the vehicle isstarted. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed immediately.



{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags in thevehicle might not inflate in a crash,or they could even inflate without acrash. To help avoid injury, havethe vehicle serviced right away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing System0 89. The overhead console has apassenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicator willlight ON and OFF, or the symbol foron and off, for several seconds as asystem check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will lighteither ON or OFF, or either the on oroff symbol, to let you know the statusof the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is liton the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is liton the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag andknee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. See yourdealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrong withthe airbag system. To help avoidinjury to yourself or others, havethe vehicle serviced right away. See

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Airbag Readiness Light 0 137 formore information, includingimportant safety information.

Charging System Light

On some vehicles the charging systemlight comes on briefly when theignition is turned on, but the engine isnot running, as a check to show thelight is working. It should go out whenthe engine is started. For vehicles witha reconfigurable cluster, this light maynot come on when the ignition isturned on.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be a problemwith the electrical charging system.

Have it checked by your dealer.Driving while this light is on coulddrain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays a message.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp(Check Engine Light)This light is part of the vehicle’semission control on-board diagnosticsystem. If this light is on while theengine is running, a malfunction hasbeen detected and the vehicle mayrequire service. The light should comeon to show that it is working whenthe ignition is in Service Mode. SeeIgnition Positions 0 200.

Malfunctions are often indicated bythe system before any problem isnoticeable. Being aware of the lightand seeking service promptly when itcomes on may prevent damage.

Caution

If the vehicle is driven continuallywith this light on, the emissioncontrol system may not work aswell, the fuel economy may belower, and the vehicle may not runsmoothly. This could lead to costlyrepairs that might not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.



Caution

Modifications to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system, or the use ofreplacement tires that do not meetthe original tire specifications, cancause this light to come on. Thiscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also affect the vehicle’sability to pass an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications 0 288.

If the light is flashing : Amalfunction has been detected thatcould damage the emission controlsystem and increase vehicleemissions. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

To help prevent damage, reducevehicle speed and avoid hardaccelerations and uphill grades.If towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon aspossible.

If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to park. Turn the vehicle offand wait at least 10 seconds beforerestarting the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previousguidelines and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

If the light is on steady : Amalfunction has been detected.Diagnosis and service may berequired.

Check the following:

. If fuel has been added to thevehicle using the capless fuelfunnel adapter, make sure that ithas been removed. See “Filling theTank with a Portable Gas Can”under Filling the Tank 0 276. Thediagnostic system can detect if theadapter has been left installed inthe vehicle, allowing fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with theadapter removed may turn off thelight.

. Poor fuel quality can causeinefficient engine operation andpoor driveability, which may goaway once the engine is warmedup. If this occurs, change the fuelbrand. It may require at least onefull tank of the proper fuel to turnthe light off. See RecommendedFuel (2.0L L4 Turbo Engine) 0 274or Recommended Fuel (3.0L TwinTurbo V6 and 4.2L Twin TurboV8 Engines) 0 275 or RecommendedFuel (3.6L V6 Engine) 0 275.

If the light remains on, see yourdealer.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

If the vehicle requires an EmissionsInspection/Maintenance test, the testequipment will likely connect to thevehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steering wheel.Connecting devices that are not usedto perform an Emissions Inspection/Maintenance test or to service thevehicle may affect vehicle operation.See Add-On Electrical Equipment 0 285.See your dealer if assistance is needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:

. The light is on when the engine isrunning.

. The light does not come on whenthe ignition is in Service Mode.

. Critical emission control systemshave not been completelydiagnosed. If this happens, thevehicle would not be ready forinspection and might requireseveral days of routine drivingbefore the system is ready forinspection. This can happen if the12-volt battery has recently beenreplaced or run down, or if thevehicle has been recently serviced.

See your dealer if the vehicle will notpass or cannot be made ready forthe test.

Brake System WarningLight (3.0L Twin Turbo and3.6L V6 Engines)The vehicle brake system consists oftwo hydraulic circuits. If one circuit isnot working, the remaining circuit canstill work to stop the vehicle. Fornormal braking performance, bothcircuits need to be working.

If the warning light comes on, there isa brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

If the light comes on and stays on,there is a brake problem.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the light isstill on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towed forservice.

Brake System WarningLight (2.0L L4 Turbo and4.2L Twin TurboV8 Engines)The vehicle brake system consists ofelectronically controlled hydraulicbrake circuits. If a fault is detected,valves are adjusted to allow the brakepedal to push brake fluid directly intothe hydraulic brake circuits. When afault occurs, the brake system warninglight comes on, and DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagesmay display. Vehicle speed may alsobe limited and the amount of brake



pedal force applied may need toincrease. Have the vehicle brakesystem serviced as soon as possible.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn if there is aproblem.

The brake system warning light mayalso come on when the parking brakeis set, if the vehicle has low brakefluid, or if the brakes are severelyfaded. See Brake Fluid 0 313. If thebrakes are overheated, DIC messagesmay display, and the vehicle speedmay be limited. If the brake fluid isnot low, if the brakes are notoverheated, and if the parking brake isfully released, then the vehicle has abrake problem. Have the vehicle brakesystem serviced as soon as possible.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal may go closer to thefloor. It could take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have the vehicletowed for service. See Towing theVehicle 0 367.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on. Drivingwith the brake system warning lighton can lead to a crash. If the light isstill on after the vehicle has beenpulled off the road and carefullystopped, have the vehicle towed forservice.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

Metric English

This light comes on when the parkingbrake is applied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the Electric ParkingBrake system. A message may alsodisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.



Service Electric ParkingBrake Light

On some vehicles the service electricparking brake light should come onbriefly when the vehicle is started.If it does not come on, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn if there is aproblem. For vehicles with thereconfigurable cluster, this light maynot come on when the vehicle isstarted.

If this light stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to a dealer as soon aspossible. See Electric Parking Brake0 216. A message may also display inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset the system.If the ABS light stays on, or comes onagain while driving, the vehicle needsservice. A chime may also sound whenthe light comes on steady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, but theantilock brakes are not functioning.

If both the ABS and the brake systemwarning light are on, the vehicle'santilock brakes are not functioningand there is a problem with theregular brakes. See your dealer forservice.

See Brake System Warning Light (3.0LTwin Turbo and 3.6L V6 Engines) 0 141or Brake System Warning Light (2.0L L4Turbo and 4.2L Twin Turbo V8 Engines)0 141.

Gear Shifting Light

If equipped, this light will displaywhen Performance Algorithm Liftfoot(PAL) or Performance Algorithm Shift(PAS) is activated. See Driver ModeControl 0 221.



Automatic Vehicle Hold(AVH) Light

This light comes on when AVH isturned on. See Automatic Vehicle Hold(AVH) 0 218.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)Light

For some vehicles, this light comes onbriefly while starting the vehicle. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced.

For vehicles with the uplevel cluster,this light may not come on whenstarting the vehicle.

This light is green if LKA is availableto assist.

LKA may assist by gently turning thesteering wheel if the vehicleapproaches a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thatdirection. The LKA light will turnamber.

This light is amber and flashes as aLane Departure Warning (LDW) alert,to indicate that the lane marking hasbeen crossed.

See Lane Keep Assist (LKA) 0 270.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will displaygreen when a vehicle is detectedahead and amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 260.

Pedestrian Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this indicator will displayamber when a nearby pedestrian isdetected directly in front of thevehicle.

See Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System 0 263.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off. For vehicles with areconfigurable cluster, this light is inthe display area and it may not comeon when the ignition is turned on.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS) hasbeen turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak/ESCbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak/ESC OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.


StabiliTrak OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system is turned off.If StabiliTrak/ESC is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If StabiliTrak/ESC and TCS are off, thesystem does not assist in controllingthe vehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak/ESC systems, and thewarning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS and potentially the StabiliTrak/ESC system have been disabled.A Driver Information Center (DIC)message may display. Check the DICmessages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioning andwhether the vehicle requires service.

If the light is on and flashing, the TCSand/or the StabiliTrak/ESC system isactively working.




Engine CoolantTemperature Warning Light

On some vehicles this light comes onbriefly while starting the vehicle. If itdoes not, have the vehicle serviced bythe dealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light goes off.For vehicles with the reconfigurablecluster, this light may not come onwhen starting the vehicle.

Caution

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light indicates that thevehicle has overheated. Driving withthis light on can damage the engine

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

and it may not be covered by thevehicle warranty. See EngineOverheating 0 310.

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on when theengine has overheated.

If this happens pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating 0 310.

Driver Mode Control Light

This light comes on when Sport Modeis selected.

This light comes on when Snow/IceMode is selected.

This light comes on when Track Modeis selected.

See Driver Mode Control 0 221.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides information abouttire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more of thetires are significantly underinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC) tirepressure message may also display.Stop as soon as possible, and inflatethe tires to the pressure value shownon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure 0 343.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If the

problem is not corrected, the light willcome on at every ignition cycle. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation 0 346.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engine oillow can also damage the engine.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Check theoil level as soon as possible. Add oilif required, but if the oil level iswithin the operating range and theoil pressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always follow themaintenance schedule for changingengine oil.

This light should come on briefly asthe engine is started. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehicle couldbe low on oil and might have someother system problem. See your dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking. For vehicles with areconfigurable cluster, this light is inthe display area and may not come onwhen the ignition is turned on.

It also comes on when the fuel tank islow on fuel. The light turns off whenfuel is added. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced.



Security Light

On some vehicles the immobilizerlight should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light turns off.For vehicles with the reconfigurablecluster, this light may not come onwhen the engine is started.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation0 50.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer0 168.

IntelliBeam Light

This light comes on when theIntelliBeam system, if equipped, isenabled. See Exterior Lamp Controls0 166.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when the exteriorlamps are in use. See Exterior LampControls 0 166.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is white whenthe cruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise control isset and active.

See Cruise Control 0 225.



Adaptive Cruise Control Light

This light is white when the AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC, if equipped) is onand ready, and turns green when theACC is set and active. See AdaptiveCruise Control 0 227.

Super Cruise Light

This light comes on to show thestatus of super cruise. See Super Cruise0 235.

Door Ajar Light

For vehicles equipped with this light,it comes on when a door is open ornot securely latched. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC is displayed in theinstrument cluster. It shows the statusof many vehicle systems.

y orz : Press to go to the previousor next selection.

S or T : Press to move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster. Press S to go back to theprevious menu.



SEL : Press to open a menu or select amenu item. Press and hold to resetvalues on certain screens.

DIC Information Display Options

The info displays on the DIC can beturned on or off through theOptions menu.

1. Press SEL while viewing theOptions page in one of theinteractive display zones on thecluster.

2. Scroll to Info Pages andpress SEL.

3. Pressy orz to move throughthe list of possible info displays.

4. Press SEL while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark will appearnext to it.

DIC Information Displays

The following is the list of all possibleDIC information displays. Some of theinformation displays may not beavailable for your particular vehicle.

Speed (Base Cluster) : Shows thevehicle speed in either kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed (BaseCluster) / Trip 1 or Trip 2 andAverage Fuel Economy (UplevelCluster) : The Trip display shows thecurrent distance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe trip odometer was last reset. Thetrip odometer can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate average litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). This numberis calculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.This number reflects only theapproximate average fuel economythat the vehicle has right now, andwill change as driving conditionschange. The Average Fuel Economycan be reset along with the tripodometer by pressing and holding SELwhile this display is active.

Fuel Range : Shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. LOW will bedisplayed when the vehicle is low onfuel. The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank.

Average Fuel Economy (BaseCluster) : Shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).This number is calculated based onthe number of L/100 km (mpg)recorded since the last time this menuitem was reset. This number reflectsonly the approximate average fueleconomy that the vehicle has rightnow, and will change as drivingconditions change. The Average FuelEconomy can be reset by pressing andholding SEL while this display isactive.

Average Speed : Shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometers perhour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated based onthe various vehicle speeds recorded



since the last reset of this value. Theaverage speed can be reset by pressingand holding SEL while this display isactive.

Timer : This display can be used as atimer. To start the timer, press SELwhile this display is active. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset. To stop the timer, press SELbriefly while this display is active andthe timer is running. To reset thetimer to zero, press and hold SELwhile this display is active.

Compass (Uplevel Cluster) : Showsthe direction the vehicle is driving.

Speed Limit : Shows the currentspeed limit. The information for thispage comes from a roadway database.

Speed Warning : Allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press SEL when Speed Warning isdisplayed. Pressy orz to adjust thevalue. This feature can be turned offby pressing and holding SEL whileviewing this page. If the selected

speed limit is exceeded, a pop-upwarning is displayed and a chime maysound.

Cruise Set Speed : Shows the speedthe cruise control or Adaptive CruiseControl is set to.

Follow Distance : If equipped, thecurrent follow time to the vehicleahead is displayed as a time value onthis page.

Driver Assistance (UplevelCluster) : May show information forLane Keep Assist (LKA), LaneDeparture Warning (LDW), AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), and ForwardCollision Alert (FCA). The displayshows if there is a vehicle detectedahead, and the current FCA timingsetting. In addition, when ACC is notengaged, the current follow time tothe vehicle ahead is displayed as atime value on this page.

Battery Voltage : Shows the currentbattery voltage.

Oil Life : Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low, theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagewill appear on the display. The oilshould be changed as soon aspossible. See Engine Oil 0 297. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will not resetitself. Do not reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately until thenext oil change. To reset the engineoil life system, press and hold SEL forseveral seconds while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine Oil LifeSystem 0 300.



Engine Air Filter Life : Shows anestimate of the engine air filter’sremaining useful life and the state ofthe system. Engine Air Filter Life 95%means 95% of the current air filter liferemains. Messages will display basedon the engine air filter life and thestate of the system. When theREPLACE AT NEXT OIL CHANGEmessage displays, the engine air filtershould be replaced at the time of thenext oil change. When the REPLACEENGINE AIR FILTER NOW messagedisplays, the engine air filter shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

The Engine Air Filter Life displaymust be reset after the engine airfilter replacement. To reset, see EngineAir Filter Life System 0 302.

Brake Pad Life : This displays anestimate of the remaining life of thefront and rear brake pads. Messageswill display based on brake pad wearand the state of the system. Reset theBrake Pad Life display after replacingthe brake pads. See Brake Pad LifeSystem 0 312.

Tire Pressure : Shows theapproximate pressures of all four tires.Tire pressure is displayed in eitherkilopascal (kPa) or in pounds persquare inch (psi). If the pressure islow, the value for that tire is shown inamber. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem 0 345 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation 0 346.

Vehicle Odometer (Base Cluster) :Shows the odometer.

Blank Page : Allows for noinformation to be displayed in thecluster info display areas.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ Warning

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

If equipped with HUD, someinformation concerning the operationof the vehicle is projected onto thewindshield. The information isprojected through the HUD lens ontop of the instrument panel. Theinformation appears as an imagefocused out toward the front of thevehicle.

Caution

If you try to use the HUD image asa parking aid, you may misjudgethe distance and damage yourvehicle. Do not use the HUD imageas a parking aid.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in various languages insome vehicles. The speedometerreading and other numerical valuescan be displayed in either English ormetric units.



The language selection is changedthrough the radio, and the units ofmeasurement is changed through theinstrument cluster. See “Settings” inthe infotainment manual and"Options" under Instrument Cluster(Uplevel) 0 130 or Instrument Cluster(Base Level) 0 127.

HUD Display on the Windshield

The HUD may display some of thefollowing information:

. Speed

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Performance

. Safety Indicators

. Vehicle Messages

Some vehicle messages or alertsdisplayed in the HUD may be clearedby using the steering wheel controls.See Vehicle Messages 0 156.

The HUD control is to the left of thesteering wheel.

To adjust the HUD image:

1. Adjust the driver seat.

2. Start the engine.

3. Use the following settings toadjust the HUD.

$ : Press or lift to center the HUDimage. The HUD image can only beadjusted up and down, not sideto side.

! : Press to select the display view.Each press will change thedisplay view.

D : Lift and hold to brighten thedisplay. Press and hold to dim thedisplay. Continue to hold to turn thedisplay off.

The HUD image will automaticallydim and brighten to compensate foroutside lighting. The HUD brightnesscontrol can also be adjusted asneeded.

The HUD image can temporarily lightup depending on the angle andposition of sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal.

Polarized sunglasses could make theHUD image harder to see.



HUD Rotation Option

This feature allows for adjusting theangle of the HUD image.

Press SEL on the steering wheelcontrols while Head-up DisplayRotation is highlighted to enter AdjustMode. Pressy orz to adjust the

angle of the HUD display. Press S orT to highlight OK, then press SEL tosave the setting. CANCEL can also beselected to cancel the setting. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).See Instrument Cluster (Uplevel) 0 130or Instrument Cluster (Base Level)0 127.

HUD Views

There may be four views in the HUD.Some vehicle information and vehiclemessages or alerts may be displayedin any view.

Metric

English

Speed View : This displays digitalspeed in English or metric units,speed limit, vehicle ahead indicator,pedestrian indicator, Lane DepartureWarning/Lane Keep Assist/SuperCruise, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),and ACC set speed. Some informationonly appears on vehicles that havethese features, and when they areactive.

Metric

English

Audio/Phone View : This displaysdigital speed, indicators from speedview, along with audio/phoneinformation. The current radio station,media type, and incoming calls will bedisplayed.

All HUD views may briefly displayaudio information when the steeringwheel controls are used to adjust theaudio information appearing in theinstrument cluster.



Metric

English

Navigation View : This displayincludes digital speed, indicators fromspeed view, along with Turn-by-TurnNavigation information in somevehicles. The compass heading isdisplayed when navigation routing isnot active.

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Alertsshown in the instrument cluster mayalso be displayed in any HUD view.

Metric

English

Performance View : This displayincludes the information in the speedview, along with rpm reading,transmission positions, and gear shiftindicator, if equipped.

The shift timing lights at the top ofthe display will appear with increasesin engine rpm. The rows of lights getcloser together as the shift point getscloser. Shift the transmission beforethe lights come together in thedisplay. Shift immediately if the lightsare flashing. See Manual Mode 0 214.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshield toremove any dirt or film that couldreduce the sharpness or clarity of theHUD image.

Clean the HUD lens with a soft clothsprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe thelens gently, then dry it.

HUD Troubleshooting

If the HUD image cannot be seenwhen the ignition is on, check that:

. Nothing is covering the HUD lens.

. The HUD brightness setting is nottoo dim or too bright.

. The HUD is adjusted to the properheight.

. Polarized sunglasses are not worn.

. The windshield and HUD lens areclean.

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield needsreplacing, see Windshield Replacement0 317.



Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiple messagesmay appear one after another.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared by pressingSEL. The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously; clearing the message doesnot correct the problem.

If a SERVICE message appears, seeyour dealer.

Follow the instructions given in themessages. The system displaysmessages regarding the followingtopics:

. Service Messages

. Fluid Levels

. Vehicle Security

. Brakes

. Steering

. Ride Control Systems

. Driver Assistance Systems

. Cruise Control

. Lighting and Bulb Replacement

. Wiper/Washer Systems

. Doors and Windows

. Seat Belts

. Airbag Systems

. Engine and Transmission

. Tire Pressure

. Battery

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's propulsion power is reduced.A reduction in propulsion power canaffect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on, butthere is no observed reduction in

performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance may bereduced the next time the vehicle isdriven. The vehicle may be drivenwhile this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speed maybe reduced. Anytime this messagestays on, or displays repeatedly, thevehicle should be taken to your dealerfor service as soon as possible.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX KM/H (MPH)

This message shows that the vehiclespeed has been limited to the speeddisplayed. The limited speed is aprotection for various propulsion andvehicle systems, such as lubrication,thermal, suspension, Teen Driver ifequipped, or tires.



Vehicle PersonalizationThe following are all possible vehiclepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

For System, Apps, and Personalfeatures and functions, see “Settings”in the infotainment manual.

To access the vehiclepersonalization menu:

1. Touch the Settings icon on theHome Page of the infotainmentdisplay.

2. Touch Vehicle to display a list ofavailable options.

3. Touch to select the desiredfeature setting.

4. Touch9 or R to turn a featureoff or on.

5. Touch z to go to the top level ofthe Settings menu.

The menu may contain the following:

Rear Seat Reminder

This allows for a chime and a messagewhen the rear door has been openedbefore or during operation of thevehicle.

Touch Off or On.

Driving Mode

These settings will overwrite the mainVehicle Mode selections made withthe MODE switch on the console.

Touch and the following may display:

. Engine Sound Management

. Steering

. Suspension

Engine Sound Management

This allows the Engine SoundManagement setting to be changed.

Touch Auto (follows the MODEswitch), Tour, Sport, or Track(V-Series only).

Steering

This allows the Steering setting to bechanged.


Suspension

This allows the Suspension setting tobe changed.


Climate and Air Quality


. Auto Fan Speed

. Air Quality Sensor

. Auto Cooled Seats

. Auto Heated Seats

. Auto Defog

. Auto Rear Defog

. Ionizer

Auto Fan Speed

This setting specifies the amount ofairflow when the climate control fansetting is Auto Fan.

Touch Low, Medium, or High.



Air Quality Sensor

This setting switches the system intoRecirculation Mode based on thequality of the outside air.

Touch Off, Low Sensitivity, or HighSensitivity.

Auto Cooled Seats

When enabled, this feature willautomatically activate the ventilatedseats at the level required by theinterior temperature. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 69.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Heated Seats

This setting automatically turns onand regulates the heated seats whenthe cabin temperature is cool. Theauto heated seats can be turned off byusing the heated seat buttons on thecenter stack. See Heated and VentilatedFront Seats 0 69.

If equipped with Auto Heated SteeringWheel, this feature will turn on whenthe Auto Heated Seats turn on.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Defog

This setting automatically turns thefront defogger on when the engine isstarted.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Rear Defog

This setting automatically turns therear defogger on when the engine isstarted.

Touch Off or On.

Ionizer

If equipped and on, this featurepurifies the air in the interior of thevehicle. See Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Dual Zone) 0 175 or AutomaticClimate Control System (Quad Zone)0 180.

Touch Off or On.

Collision / Detection Systems


. Alert Type

. Forward Collision System

. Front Pedestrian Detection

. Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

. Lane Change Alert

. Rear Pedestrian Detection

. Rear Cross Traffic Alert

Alert Type

This setting specifies the type ofvehicle feedback provided, either abeep or seat vibration, when you arein danger of colliding with an object.

Touch Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Forward Collision System

This setting controls the vehicleresponse when detecting a vehicleahead of you. The Off setting disablesall FCA and FAB functions. With theAlert and Brake setting, both FCA andFAB are available. The Alert settingdisables FAB. See Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) 0 262.

Touch Off, Alert, or Alert and Brake.

Front Pedestrian Detection

This feature will turn on or off theFront Pedestrian Braking (FPB) systemalerts and automatic braking. The Offsetting disables all FPB functions.With the Alert & Brake setting, system



alerts and automatic braking are bothavailable. The Alert setting disablesautomatic braking. See FrontPedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 263.

Touch Off, Alert, or Alert & Brake.

Adaptive Cruise Go Notifier

This setting determines if an alert willappear when Adaptive Cruise Controlbrings the vehicle to a complete stopand the vehicle ahead of you startsmoving again. See Adaptive CruiseControl 0 227.

Touch Off or On.

Lane Change Alert

This setting specifies if an alert willdisplay on the outside mirror to helpyou avoid crashing into a vehicle inyour blind spot, or rapidlyapproaching your blind spot, during alane change maneuver. See LaneChange Alert (LCA) 0 268.

When Lane Change Alert is disabled,Side Blind Zone Alert is also disabled.

Touch Off or On.

Rear Pedestrian Detection

This setting specifies if there is analert when the system detectspedestrians behind the vehicle whenin R (Reverse).

Touch Off or Alert.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

This setting specifies if an alert willdisplay when the vehicle detectsapproaching rear cross traffic when inR (Reverse). See Assistance Systems forParking or Backing 0 251.

Touch Off or On.

Comfort and Convenience


. Chime Volume

. Reverse Tilt Mirror

. Remote Mirror Folding

. Rain Sense Wipers

. Hands Free Trunk Control

Chime Volume

This setting determines the chimevolume level.

Touch the controls on theinfotainment display to adjust thevolume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger, driver, or passenger outsidemirrors will tilt downward when thevehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) toimprove visibility of the ground nearthe rear wheels. They will return totheir previous driving position whenthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse) or the engine is turned off.

Touch Off, On - Driver and Passenger,On - Driver, or On - Passenger.

Remote Mirror Folding

When on, the outside mirrors willautomatically fold or unfold when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter Q or K is pressed andheld on.

Touch Off or On.



Rain Sense Wipers

This setting automatically turns onthe wipers when moisture is detectedand the wiper switch is inintermittent mode.

Touch Disabled or Enabled.

Hands Free Trunk Control

The power trunk may be operatedwith a kicking motion under the rearbumper at the location of theprojected logo. See Trunk 0 42.

Select Off, On-Open and Close,or On-Open Only.

Lighting


. Vehicle Locator Lights

. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This setting flashes the vehicle’sheadlamps when K is pressed on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Touch Off or On.

Exit Lighting

This setting specifies how long theheadlamps stay on after the vehicle isturned off and exited.

Touch Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds,or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks


. Open Door Anti Lock Out

. Auto Door Unlock

. Delayed Door Lock

Open Door Anti Lock Out

This setting prevents the driver doorfrom locking when the door is open.If this setting is on, the Delayed DoorLock menu will not be available.

Touch Off or On.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Touch Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

Delayed Door Lock

This setting delays the locking of thevehicle’s doors.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start


. Remote Unlock Light Feedback

. Remote Lock Feedback

. Remote Door Unlock

. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

. Remote Window Operation

. Passive Door Unlock

. Passive Door Lock

. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

This setting flashes the exterior lampswhen the vehicle is unlocked with theRKE transmitter.

Touch Off or Flash Lights.



Remote Lock Feedback

This setting specifies how the vehicleresponds when the vehicle is lockedwith the RKE transmitter.

Touch Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This setting specifies whether alldoors, or just the driver door, unlockwhen pressing K on the RKEtransmitter.

Touch All Doors or Driver Door.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the ventilated seatson when using remote start onwarm days.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

This setting automatically turns onthe heated seats when using theremote start function on cold days.See Heated and Ventilated Front Seats0 69 and Remote Vehicle Start 0 36.

If equipped with Auto Heated SteeringWheel, this feature will turn on whenthe Remote Start Auto Heated Seatsturn on.

Touch Off or On.

Remote Window Operation

If equipped, this feature enablesremote operation of the windows withthe RKE transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

Touch Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This setting specifies which doorsunlock when using the button on thedriver door handle to unlock thevehicle.

Touch All Doors or Driver Door Only.

Passive Door Lock

This setting specifies if the vehicle willautomatically lock, or lock andprovide an alert after all the doors areclosed, and you walk away from thevehicle with the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

Touch Off, On with Horn Chirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert when theRKE transmitter is left in the vehicle.This menu also enables Remote NoLonger in Vehicle Alert.

Touch Off or On.

Seating Position


. Seat Entry Memory

. Seat Exit Memory

Seat Entry Memory

This feature automatically recalls thepreviously stored 1 or 2 buttonpositions when the ignition is changedfrom off to on or ACC/ACCESSORY.See Memory Seats 0 66.

Touch On or Off.

Seat Exit Memory

This feature automatically recalls thepreviously stored exit button positionwhen exiting the vehicle. See MemorySeats 0 66.

Touch Off or On.



Teen Driver

See “Teen Driver” under “Settings” inthe infotainment manual.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainment systemand steering wheel controls. It mayalso limit access to vehicle storagelocations, if equipped.

To enable valet mode:

1. Enter a four-digit code on thekeypad.

2. Touch Enter to go to theconfirmation screen.

3. Re-enter the four-digit code.

Touch Lock or Unlock to lock orunlock the system. Touch Back to goback to the previous menu.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement 0 407.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, and homeautomation devices. These

instructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.

Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read these instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming when vehicleownership is terminated. See “ErasingUniversal Remote System Buttons”later in this section.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door opener receiver.Clear all people and objects near thegarage door.



Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515.

Programming involves time-sensitiveactions, and may time out causing theprocedure to be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press and holdboth the hand-held transmitterbutton and one of the threeUniversal Remote systembuttons to be used to operate thegarage door. Do not release either

button until the indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidflash. Then release both buttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicatorlight and garage door activation.

. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when the buttonis pressed, then programmingis complete. There is no needto complete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light does notcome on or the garage doordoes not move, a secondbutton press may berequired. For a second time,press and hold the newlyprogrammed button for

five seconds. If the light stayson or the garage door moves,programming is complete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds, thenchanges to a solid light andthe garage door does notmove, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.



6. Inside the vehicle, press and holdthe newly programmed UniversalRemote system button fortwo seconds and then release it.If the garage door does not moveor the lamp on the garage dooropener receiver does not flash,press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds,then release it. Again, if the doordoes not move or the garagedoor lamp does not flash, pressand hold the same button a thirdtime for two seconds, thenrelease it.

The Universal Remote system shouldnow activate the garage door.

Repeat the process for programmingthe two remaining buttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,see www.homelink.com/gm or call1-800-355-3515.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds of transmission.This may not be long enough for theUniversal Remote system to pick upthe signal during programming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the Universal Remotesystem button while pressing andreleasing the hand-held transmitterbutton every two seconds until thesignal has been successfully acceptedby the Universal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button for atleast one-half second. The indicatorlight will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.



Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”


166 LIGHTING

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . 166Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 168Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Automatic Headlamp System . . . 169Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . 169Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Battery Load Management . . . . . . 173Battery Power Protection . . . . . . . . 173Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal lever.

Turn the control to the followingpositions:

O : Turns the exterior lamps off anddeactivates the AUTO mode. Turn toO again to reactivate the AUTO mode.

In Canada, the headlamps willautomatically reactivate when thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).

AUTO : Automatically turns theexterior lamps on and off, dependingon outside lighting.


LIGHTING 167

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

2 : Turns on the headlamps togetherwith the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

IntelliBeam System

If equipped, this system turns thevehicle's high-beam headlamps on andoff according to surrounding trafficconditions.

The system turns the high-beamheadlamps on when it is dark enoughand there is no other traffic present.

This lightb comes on in theinstrument cluster when theIntelliBeam system is enabled.

Turning On and Enabling IntelliBeam

To enable the IntelliBeam system,press the button on the end of theturn signal lever when the exteriorlamp control is in the AUTO or2position. The blue high-beam on lightappears on the instrument clusterwhen the high beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

The system only activates the highbeams when driving over 40 km/h(25 mph).

There is a sensor near the top centerof the windshield that automaticallycontrols the system. Keep this area ofthe windshield clear of debris to allowfor best system performance.

The high-beam headlamps remain on,under the automatic control, until oneof the following situations occurs:

. The system detects anapproaching vehicle's headlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is bright enoughthat high-beam headlamps are notrequired.

. The vehicle's speed drops below20 km/h (12 mph).

. The IntelliBeam system is disabledby the button on the turn signallever. If this happens, press thebutton on the end of the turnsignal lever when the exteriorlamp control is in the AUTO or2position. The instrument clusterlight will come on to indicate theIntelliBeam is reactivated.


168 LIGHTING

The high beams may not turn offautomatically if the system cannotdetect another vehicle's lamps becauseof any of the following:

. The other vehicle's lamps aremissing, damaged, obstructed fromview, or otherwise undetected.

. The other vehicle's lamps arecovered with dirt, snow, and/orroad spray.

. The other vehicle's lamps cannotbe detected due to dense exhaust,smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist,or other airborne obstructions.

. The vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked, or obstructed bysomething that blocks the view ofthe light sensor.

. The vehicle is loaded such that thefront end points upward, causingthe light sensor to aim high andnot detect headlamps andtaillamps.

. The vehicle is being driven onwinding or hilly roads.

The automatic high-beam headlampsmay need to be disabled if any of theabove conditions exist.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA warning chime sounds if the driverdoor is opened while the ignition is offand the exterior lamps are on.

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger3 : Push the turn signal lever awayfrom you and release, to turn the highbeams on. To return to low beams,push the lever again or pull it towardyou and release.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull the turnsignal lever toward you, and release.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of your vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

If equipped, the DRL will come onwhen all of the following conditionsare met:

. The ignition is on.

. The exterior lamp control isin AUTO.

. The light sensor determines it isdaytime.

. The parking brake is released orthe vehicle is not in P (Park).

When the DRL are on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, and other lampswill not be on.


LIGHTING 169

The DRL turn off when the headlampsare turned to O or the ignition is off.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL can only be turned off when thevehicle is parked.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control is setto AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem comes on immediately. If it islight outside when the vehicle leavesthe garage, there is a slight delaybefore the automatic headlampsystem changes to the DRL. Duringthat delay, the instrument cluster maynot be as bright as usual. Make surethe instrument panel brightnesscontrol is in the full bright position.See Instrument Panel IlluminationControl 0 170.

When it is bright enough outside, theheadlamps will turn off or may changeto Daytime Running Lamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp system turnsoff when the exterior lamp control isturned to O or the ignition is off.

For vehicles sold in Canada, thiscontrol only works when thetransmission is in P (Park).

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers are activatedin daylight with the engine on, andthe exterior lamp control is in AUTO,the headlamps, parking lamps, andother exterior lamps come on. Thetransition time for the lamps comingon varies based on wiper speed. Whenthe wipers are not operating, theselamps turn off. Move the exteriorlamp control to O or; to disablethis feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| : Touch this button to make thefront and rear turn signal lamps flashon and off. Touch again to turn theflashers off.


170 LIGHTING

The hazard warning flashers turn onautomatically if the airbags deploy.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

Move the lever all the way up or downto signal a turn.

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, the turnsignal flashes three times.

The turn and lane-change signal canbe turned off manually by moving thelever back to its original position.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange, the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal functionmay be inoperative. This vehicle isequipped with LED lighting. Forreplacement of any LED lightingcontact your dealer.

Cornering LampsIf equipped with cornering lamps, theyautomatically come on when all of thefollowing occur:

. The low-beam headlamps are on.

. The turn signals are activated orthe steering wheel is at acalibrated angle.

. The vehicle speed is below thecalibrated speed.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

The brightness of the instrumentpanel lighting and steering wheelcontrols can be adjusted.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown to brighten or dim the lights.


LIGHTING 171

The brightness of the displaysautomatically adjusts based onoutdoor lighting. The instrumentpanel illumination control will set thelowest level to which the displays willbe automatically adjusted.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come on whenany door is opened unless the domelamp override is activated. Todeactivate the dome lamp override,press( OFF and the indicator lighton the button will turn off.

Dome LampsThe dome lamp is in the overheadconsole.

To change the dome lamp settings,press:

( OFF : Turns the lamp off, evenwhen a door is open.

+ ON/OFF : Turns the lamp onor off.

Reading LampsThere are front and rear readinglamps on the overhead console andover the rear passenger doors. Theselamps come on automatically whenany door is opened.

To manually turn the reading lampson or off:

Pressm orn next to each overheadconsole reading lamp.

Press the lamp lenses over the rearpassenger doors.


172 LIGHTING

Lighting Features

Entry LightingSome exterior lamps and most of theinterior lights turn on briefly at night,or in areas of limited lighting when Kis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29. When the driver door is opened,all control lights, Driver InformationCenter (DIC) lights, and door pocketlights turn on. After about 30 secondsthe exterior lamps turn off, then theremaining interior lights dim to off.Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignition outof the OFF position, or by pressing Qon the RKE transmitter.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Entry Lighting with ApproachDetection

If equipped with approach detection,the entry lighting feature willautomatically turn on when the RKEtransmitter is detected withinapproximately 2 m (6 ft) of the vehicle.

If the vehicle has remained parked foran extended period of time with noRKE transmitter use or Keyless Accessoperation, approach detection will bedisabled. To reactivate, press anybutton on the RKE transmitter oropen and close all vehicle doors tore-enable the entry lighting feature onapproach.

Approach detection will not work if:

. The vehicle battery is low.

. The ignition is on or in ACC/ACCESSORY.

. Entry lighting is set to Off. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Approach detection will not work witha single RKE transmitter if:

. The RKE transmitter is left withina 5 m (16 ft) range of the vehiclefor several minutes

. The RKE transmitter is left insidethe vehicle and all the doors areclosed

To help maximize transmitter batterylife, do not store the transmitterwithin 5 m (16 ft) of the vehicle.

Exit LightingSome exterior lamps and interiorlights come on at night, or in areaswith limited lighting, when the driverdoor is opened after the ignition isturned off. The dome lamp comes onafter the ignition is turned off. Theexterior lamps and dome lamp remainon for a set amount of time, thenautomatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamp control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization 0 157.


LIGHTING 173

Battery Load ManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimates thebattery's temperature and state ofcharge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life ofthe battery.

When the battery's state of charge islow, the voltage is raised slightly toquickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to preventovercharging. If the vehicle has avoltmeter gauge or a voltage displayon the Driver Information Center(DIC), you may see the voltage moveup or down. This is normal. If there isa problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idleif the electrical loads are very high.This is true for all vehicles. This isbecause the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough atidle to produce all of the powerneeded for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, rear

window defogger, climate control fanat high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loadsplugged into accessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reduce thepower demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in stepsor levels, without being noticeable. Inrare cases at the highest levels ofcorrective action, this action may benoticeable to the driver. If so, a DICmessage might be displayed and it isrecommended that the driver reducethe electrical loads as much aspossible.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature is designedto protect the vehicle's battery.

If some interior lamps are left on andthe ignition is turned off, the batteryrundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.

Exterior Lighting BatterySaverThe exterior lamps turn off about10 minutes after the ignition is turnedoff, if the parking lamps or headlampshave been manually left on. Thisprotects against draining the battery.To restart the 10-minute timer, turnthe exterior lamp control to the offposition and then back to the parkinglamp or headlamp position.

To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be on orin ACC/ACCESSORY.


174 INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

Infotainment System

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system, andvoice or speech recognition. It alsoincludes information on settings.

Active Noise Cancellation (ANC)

If equipped, ANC reduces engine noisein the vehicle’s interior. ANC requiresthe factory-installed audio system,radio, speakers, amplifier (ifequipped), induction system, andexhaust system to work properly.Deactivation is required by your dealerif related aftermarket equipment isinstalled.


CLIMATE CONTROLS 175

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsAutomatic Climate ControlSystem (Dual Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Automatic Climate ControlSystem (Quad Zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Climate Control Systems

Automatic Climate Control System (Dual Zone)The climate control buttons on the center stack and on the climate controldisplay are used to adjust the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

Center Stack Climate Controls


2. Fan Control



5. Defrost

6. OFF (Fan)

7. Recirculation



176 CLIMATE CONTROLS



2. Fan Control



5. Recirculation


7. Auto (Automatic Operation)


9. On/Off

The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and Sync settings canbe controlled by touching CLIMATEon the infotainment Home Page or theclimate button in the climate controldisplay application tray. A selectioncan then be made on the front climatecontrol page displayed. See theinfotainment manual.

Climate Control Status Display

The climate control status displayappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the center stackare adjusted.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controls thefan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle to thedesired temperature.

When the indicator light is on orAUTO is displayed on the climatecontrol display, the system is in fullautomatic operation. If the air deliverymode or fan setting is manuallyadjusted, the Auto indicator turns offand the display will show the selectedsettings. Auto operation can be turnedoff individually for climate settings.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded.



To improve fuel efficiency and to coolthe vehicle faster, recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light willnot come on in AUTO mode. Press@ to select recirculation; press itagain to select outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the instrumentcluster. See “Cluster Options Menu”under Instrument Cluster (Uplevel)0 130 or Instrument Cluster (BaseLevel) 0 127.

OFF : Press to turn the fan on or off.The temperature control and airdelivery mode can still be adjusted.

Q / R : The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driver andthe passenger. Press up or down toincrease or decrease the temperature.Press and hold up or down to rapidlyincrease or decrease the temperature.

The driver and passengertemperatures can also be adjusted bytouching the controls on the climatecontrol display.

Sync : Touch Sync on the climatecontrol display to link all climate zonesettings to the driver settings. Whenall climate zone settings are linked,the Sync indicator will be lit. Adjustthe driver side temperature control tochange the linked temperature. Whenthe front or rear passenger settingsare adjusted, the Sync indicator willturn off.

Manual Operation

Q9 R : Press or touch the fanbuttons on the center stack or climatecontrol display to increase or decreasethe fan speed. Press and hold thebuttons to adjust speed more quickly.The fan speed setting displays.Pressing either button cancelsautomatic fan control and the fan canbe controlled manually. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.

Driver and Passenger Air DeliveryMode Controls : When the climateinformation is displayed, touch thedesired air delivery mode on theclimate control display to change thedirection of the airflow. The selectedair delivery mode button is lit.Touching any of the air delivery

buttons cancels automatic air deliverycontrol and the direction of theairflow can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel outlets and the flooroutlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets.

N : Clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 : Clears the windshield of fog orfrost more quickly. Air is directed tothe windshield. Press0 to turn on oroff. Changing the air delivery modealso turns the defrost off.

A/C : Touch A/C on the climatecontrol display to turn the automaticair conditioning on or off. If the fan is



turned off or the outside temperaturefalls below freezing, the airconditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditioner runsas needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation : Whenthe AUTO indicator light is on, the airis automatically recirculated asneeded to help quickly cool the insideof the vehicle.

The climate control system may havea sensor to detect air pollution. Whenusing automatic air recirculation, theair quality control system mayoperate. To adjust the sensitivity ofthe air quality sensor, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

@ : Press to alternate betweenrecirculating air inside the vehicle orpulling in outside air. The indicatorlight on the button is lit whenrecirculation mode is active. Thishelps to quickly cool the air inside thevehicle or reduce the outside air andodors that might enter.

Pressing this button cancels automaticrecirculation. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation; recirculationruns automatically as needed.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem has a sensor to automaticallydetect high humidity inside thevehicle. When high humidity isdetected, the climate control systemmay adjust to outside air supply andturn on the air conditioner. If theclimate control system does notdetect possible window fogging, itreturns to normal operation. To turnAuto Defog off or on, see “Climate andAir Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Ionizer : If equipped with an ionizer,this feature helps to clean the airinside the vehicle and removecontaminants such as pollen, odors,and dust. If the climate controlsystem is on and the ionizer isenabled, the ionizer status indicatorwill be lit on the climate control

display. To turn the ionizer on or off,see “Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Rear Window Defogger

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger only works when the engineis running.

The rear window defogger can be setto automatic operation. See “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157. When Auto RearDefog is selected, the rear windowdefogger turns on automatically whenthe interior temperature is cold andthe outside temperature is about 4 °C(40 °F) and below.

The upper grid lines on the rearwindow are antenna lines and are notintended to heat when the defogger isactivated.

The heated outside mirrors turn onwhen the rear window defoggerbutton is on and help to clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirrors.



Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anything elsethat is sharp. This may damage therear window defogger grid andaffect the radio's ability to pick upstations clearly. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andVentilated Seats (If Equipped) :PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.


PressC or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 69.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. The systemuses the driver’s previous settings toheat or cool the inside of the vehicle.The rear defog may come on duringremote start based on cold ambientconditions. The rear defog indicatorlight does not come on during aremote start.

If equipped, the heated seats will turnon if it is cold outside or theventilated seats will turn on if it is hotoutside. The heated and ventilatedseat indicator lights may not come onduring a remote start. If equipped, theheated steering wheel will come on ina remote start if it is cold outside. Theheated steering wheel indicator lightmay not come on. See Remote VehicleStart 0 36 and Heated and VentilatedFront Seats 0 69.

Sensor

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near the windshield,monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed, recirculation,and air delivery mode for bestcomfort.

If the sensor is covered, the automaticclimate control system may not workproperly.



Automatic Climate Control System (Quad Zone)The climate control buttons on the center stack and on the climate controldisplay are used to adjust the heating, cooling, and ventilation.

Center Stack Climate Controls


2. Fan Control



5. Defrost

6. OFF (Fan)

7. Recirculation




2. Fan Control



5. Recirculation


7. Auto (Automatic Operation)




9. On/Off

The fan, air delivery mode, airconditioning, driver and passengertemperatures, and Sync settings canbe controlled by touching CLIMATEon the infotainment Home Page or theclimate button in the climate controldisplay application tray. A selectioncan then be made on the front climatecontrol page displayed. See theinfotainment manual.

Climate Control Status Display

The climate control status displayappears briefly when the climatecontrol buttons on the center stackare adjusted.

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controls thefan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle to thedesired temperature.

When the indicator light is on orAUTO is displayed on the climatecontrol display, the system is in fullautomatic operation. If the air deliverymode or fan setting is manuallyadjusted, the Auto indicator turns offand the display will show the selectedsettings. Auto operation can be turnedoff individually for climate settings.

For automatic operation:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded.

To improve fuel efficiency and to coolthe vehicle faster, recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation light willnot come on in AUTO mode. Press@ to select recirculation; press itagain to select outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the instrumentcluster. See “Cluster Options Menu” or“Cluster Menu” under InstrumentCluster (Uplevel) 0 130 or InstrumentCluster (Base Level) 0 127.

OFF : Press to turn the fan on or off.The temperature control and airdelivery mode can still be adjusted.

Q / R : The temperature can beadjusted separately for the driver andthe passenger. Press to increase ordecrease the temperature. Press andhold to rapidly increase or decreasethe temperature.

The driver and passengertemperatures can also be adjusted bytouching the controls on the climatecontrol display.



Sync : Touch Sync on the climatecontrol display to link all climate zonesettings to the driver settings. Whenall climate zone settings are linked,the Sync indicator will be lit. Adjustthe driver side temperature control tochange the linked temperature. Whenthe front or rear passenger settingsare adjusted, the Sync indicator willturn off.

Manual Operation

Q9 R : Press or touch the fanbuttons on the center stack or climatecontrol display to increase or decreasethe fan speed. Press and hold thebuttons to adjust speed more quickly.The fan speed setting displays.Pressing either button cancelsautomatic fan control and the fan canbe controlled manually. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.

Driver and Passenger Air DeliveryMode Controls : When the climateinformation is displayed, touch thedesired air delivery mode on theclimate control display to change thedirection of the airflow. The selectedair delivery mode button is lit.Touching any of the air delivery

buttons cancels automatic air deliverycontrol and the direction of theairflow can be controlled manually.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y : Air is directed to the instrumentpanel outlets.

\ : Air is divided between theinstrument panel outlets and the flooroutlets.

[ : Air is directed to the flooroutlets. Some air Is directed to thewindshield.

N : Clears the windows of fog ormoisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 : Clears the windshield of fog orfrost more quickly. Air is directed tothe windshield. Press0 to turn on oroff. Changing the air delivery modealso turns the defrost off.

A/C : Touch A/C on the climatecontrol display to turn the automaticair conditioning on or off. If the fan is

turned off or the outside temperaturefalls below freezing, the airconditioner will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditioner runsas needed.

Automatic Air Recirculation : Whenthe AUTO indicator light is on, the airis automatically recirculated asneeded to help quickly cool the insideof the vehicle.

The climate control system may havea sensor to detect air pollution. Whenusing automatic air recirculation, theair quality control system mayoperate. To adjust the sensitivity ofthe air quality sensor, see “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

@ : Press to alternate betweenrecirculating air inside the vehicle orpulling in outside air. The indicatorlight on the button is lit whenrecirculation mode is active. Thishelps to quickly cool the air inside thevehicle or reduce the outside air andodors that might enter.



Pressing this button cancels automaticrecirculation. Press AUTO to return toautomatic operation; recirculationruns automatically as needed.

Manual recirculation mode is notavailable when in Defrost or Defogmodes.

Auto Defog : The climate controlsystem has a sensor to automaticallydetect high humidity inside thevehicle. When high humidity isdetected, the climate control systemmay adjust to outside air supply andturn on the air conditioner. If theclimate control system does notdetect possible window fogging, itreturns to normal operation. To turnAuto Defog off or on, see “Climate andAir Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Ionizer : If equipped with an ionizer,this feature helps to clean the airinside the vehicle and removecontaminants such as pollen, odors,and dust. If the climate controlsystem is on and the ionizer isenabled, the ionizer status indicatorwill be lit on the climate control

display. To turn the ionizer on or off,see “Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Rear Window Defogger

K : Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger can be setto automatic operation. See “Climateand Air Quality” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157. When Auto RearDefog is selected, the rear windowdefogger turns on automatically whenthe interior temperature is cold andthe outside temperature is about 4 °C(40 °F) and below.

The upper grid lines on the rearwindow are antenna lines and are notintended to heat when the defogger isactivated.

The heated outside mirrors turn onwhen the rear window defoggerbutton is on and help to clear fog orfrost from the surface of the mirrors.

Caution

Do not try to clear frost or othermaterial from the inside of thefront windshield and rear windowwith a razor blade or anything elsethat is sharp. This may damage therear window defogger grid andaffect the radio's ability to pick upstations clearly. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Driver and Passenger Heated andVentilated Seats (If Equipped) :PressI or+ to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.


PressC or { to ventilate the driveror passenger seat. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats 0 69.



Remote Start Climate ControlOperation : If equipped with theremote start feature, the climatecontrol system may run when thevehicle is started remotely. The systemuses the driver’s previous settings toheat or cool the inside of the vehicle.The rear window defogger may comeon during remote start based on coldambient conditions. The rear windowdefogger indicator light does not comeon during a remote start.

If equipped, the heated seats will turnon if it is cold outside or theventilated seats will turn on if it is hotoutside. The heated and ventilatedseat indicator lights may not come onduring a remote start. If equipped, theheated steering wheel will come on ina remote start if it is cold outside. Theheated steering wheel indicator lightmay not come on.

See Remote Vehicle Start 0 36 andHeated and Ventilated Front Seats 0 69.

Sensor

The solar sensor, on top of theinstrument panel near the windshield,monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed, recirculation,and air delivery mode for bestcomfort.

If the sensor is covered, the automaticclimate control system may not workproperly.



Rear Climate Control SystemThe rear climate control system is on the rear of the center console. The settingscan be adjusted with the rear climate control buttons and the rear climatecontrol display.

Rear Climate Control Buttons

1. Rear Driver Side and PassengerSide Temperature Controls

2. O (On/Off)

3. Air Delivery Mode Control


5. Fan Control

Rear Climate Control Display

1. Rear Driver Side and PassengerSide Temperature Display

2. Rear Fan Control

3. Rear Driver Side and PassengerSide Temperature Controls

4. Sync (SynchronizedTemperatures)

5. Rear Control Lockout

6. Air Delivery Mode Control

7. Rear Auto (Automatic Operation)

8. On/Off



Rear : Touch Rear on the Home Pageof the infotainment display to openthe rear climate control display. Therear climate control settings can nowbe adjusted from the frontpassenger area.

O : Press O or touch On/Off on therear climate control display to turnthe rear climate control on or off.

Sync : Touch Sync on the rear climatecontrol display to match the rearclimate control temperature to thefront climate control drivertemperature. The Sync button willbe lit.

Rear Control Lockout : Touch to lockor unlock control of the rear climatecontrol system from the rear seatpassengers. When locked, the rearclimate control can only be adjustedfrom the front seat.

Automatic Operation

AUTO : Press to turn on or off. Theair delivery is controlledautomatically. The Auto indicatorappears on the display. If the airdelivery mode is manually adjusted,this cancels full automatic operation.

Manual Operation

9 : Press or press and hold the rearfan button up or down to increase ordecrease the rear climate airflow. Therear climate airflow can also beadjusted by touching the fan controlson the front climate control display.

Temperature Controls : Press orpress and hold the rear temperaturecontrol buttons up or down to adjustthe rear passenger temperatures. Therear passenger temperatures can alsobe adjusted by touching Q for warmer

air or R for cooler air on the frontclimate control display.

Air Delivery Mode Control : Press orpress and hold the button up or downto select the desired air delivery mode.Touch the desired air delivery modeon the rear climate control display tochange the direction of the airflow inthe rear seating area.

Air Vents

Adjustable air vents are in the centerand on the sides of the instrumentpanel, on the rear of the centerconsole storage, and in the headlinerover the rear seats, if equipped.

Move the slider knobs to change thedirection of or to close off the airflow.

Operation Tips

. Clear away any ice, snow, or leavesfrom air inlets at the base of thewindshield that could block theflow of air into the vehicle.


CLIMATE CONTROLS 187. Clear snow off the hood to

improve visibility and helpdecrease moisture drawn into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affect theperformance of the system. Checkwith your dealer before addingequipment to the outside of thevehicle.

. Do not attach any devices to theair vent slats. This restricts airflowand may cause damage to the airvents.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter reduces dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle. Thefilter should be replaced as part ofroutine scheduled maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

See your dealer regarding replacementof the filter.

ServiceAll vehicles have a label underhoodthat identifies the refrigerant used inthe vehicle. The refrigerant systemshould only be serviced by trained andcertified technicians. The airconditioning evaporator should neverbe repaired or replaced by one from asalvage vehicle. It should only bereplaced by a new evaporator toensure proper and safe operation.

During service, all refrigerants shouldbe reclaimed with proper equipment.Venting refrigerants directly to theatmosphere is harmful to theenvironment and may also createunsafe conditions based on inhalation,combustion, frostbite, or otherhealth-based concerns.

The air conditioning system requiresperiodic maintenance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.


188 DRIVING AND OPERATING

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Track Events and CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . 192Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 193Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . 195Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . 207Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 209Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

BrakesAntilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . 215Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . 218Automatic VehicleHold (AVH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . 227Super Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . 250Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Night Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . 268Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . 268Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . 270Surround Vision Recorder . . . . . . . 272

FuelTop Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274Recommended Fuel (2.0L L4Turbo Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274


DRIVING AND OPERATING 189

Recommended Fuel (3.0L TwinTurbo V6 and 4.2L Twin TurboV8 Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Recommended Fuel (3.6LV6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . 275Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Trailer TowingGeneral Towing Information . . . . 278Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On Electrical Equipment . . . 285

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many forms andcan take your focus from the task ofdriving. Exercise good judgment anddo not let other activities divert yourattention away from the road. Manylocal governments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, keep youreyes on the road, keep your hands onthe steering wheel, and focus yourattention on driving.

. Do not use a phone in demandingdriving situations. Use ahands-free method to place orreceive necessary phone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read, takenotes, or look up information onphones or other electronic devices.

. Designate a front seat passengerto handle potential distractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings. Programall trip information into anynavigation device prior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parked toretrieve items that have fallen tothe floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tend tochildren.

. Keep pets in an appropriate carrieror restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.



Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The first stepin driving defensively is to wear theseat belt. See Seat Belts 0 75.

. Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by even asmall amount of alcohol. You canhave a serious — or even fatal —collision if you drive after drinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and accelerating areimportant factors in helping to controla vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time is aboutthree-quarters of a second. In thattime, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h(60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), whichcould be a lot of distance in anemergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:

. Keep enough distance betweenyou and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops or a brakefault occurs, the brakes may losepower assist. More effort will berequired to stop the vehicle. It maytake longer to stop.

Steering

Variable Effort Steering

The vehicle has a steering system thatvaries the amount of effort required tosteer the vehicle in relation to thespeed of the vehicle.



The amount of steering effort requiredis less at slower speeds to make thevehicle more maneuverable and easierto park. At faster speeds, the steeringeffort increases to provide a sport-likefeel to the steering. This providesmaximum control and stability.

Electric Power Steering

The vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenance isnot required.

If power steering assist is lost due to asystem malfunction, the vehicle canbe steered, but may require increasedeffort. See your dealer if there is aproblem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel and isheld against that position for anextended period of time, powersteering assist may be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time while thevehicle is not moving, power assistmay be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when the systemcools down.

See your dealer if there is a problem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable speed.

. Reduce speed before entering acurve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out of thecurve before accelerating gentlyinto the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem may bemore effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of the steeringwheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can drop offthe edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile driving. Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way,steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.



Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:

. Braking Skid — wheels are notrolling.

. Steering or Cornering Skid — toomuch speed or steering in a curvecauses tires to slip and losecornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the driving wheelsto spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids bytaking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:

. Ease your foot off the acceleratorpedal and steer the way you wantthe vehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust your drivingaccording to weather conditions.Stopping distance can be longerand vehicle control can be affectedwhen traction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or other materialon the road. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enoughwater, ice, or packed snow on theroad to make a mirrored surface— and slow down when you haveany doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, includingreducing vehicle speed by shiftingto a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires toslide.

Remember: Antilock brakes help avoidonly the braking skid.

Track Events andCompetitive Driving

Caution

This vehicle is neither designed norintended for track events or othercompetitive driving. This type ofdriving may damage the vehicle,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reduce vehicletraction and affect your ability to stopand accelerate. Always drive slower inthese types of driving conditions andavoid driving through large puddlesand deep-standing or flowing water.



{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes. Theymight not work as well in a quickstop and could cause pulling to oneside. You could lose control of thevehicle.

After driving through a large puddleof water or a car/vehicle wash,lightly apply the brake pedal untilthe brakes work normally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and be verycautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water canbuild up under the vehicle's tires sothey actually ride on the water. Thiscan happen if the road is wet enough

and you are going fast enough. Whenthe vehicle is hydroplaning, it haslittle or no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:

. Allow extra following distance.

. Pass with caution.

. Keep windshield wiping equipmentin good shape.

. Keep the windshield washer fluidreservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper treaddepth. See Tires 0 335.

. Turn off cruise control.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than driving onflat or rolling terrain. Tips include:

. Keep the vehicle serviced and ingood shape.

. Check all fluid levels and brakes,tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow the vehicleon a long downhill slope can causebrake overheating, can reduce brakeperformance, and could result in aloss of braking. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear to letthe engine assist the brakes on asteep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) orwith the ignition off is dangerous.This can cause overheating of thebrakes and loss of steering assist.Always have the engine runningand the vehicle in gear.


194 DRIVING AND OPERATING. Drive at speeds that keep the

vehicle in its own lane. Do notswing wide or cross thecenter line.

. Be alert on top of hills; somethingcould be in your lane (e.g., stalledcar, crash).

. Pay attention to special road signs(e.g., falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Snow or ice between the tires and theroad creates less traction or grip, sodrive carefully. Wet ice can occur atabout 0 °C (32 °F) when freezing rainbegins to fall. Avoid driving on wet iceor in freezing rain until roads can betreated.

For slippery road driving:

. Accelerate gently. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick.

. Turn on Traction Control. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 219.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops, but the brakes shouldbe applied sooner than when ondry pavement. See Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) 0 215.

See Driver Mode Control 0 221.

. Allow greater following distanceand watch for slippery spots. Icypatches can occur on otherwiseclear roads in shaded areas. Thesurface of a curve or an overpasscan remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. Avoidsudden steering maneuvers andbraking while on ice.

. Turn off cruise control.

Blizzard Conditions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place andsignal for help. Stay with the vehicleunless there is help nearby. If possible,use Roadside Service. See RoadsideService 0 401. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:


. Tie a red cloth to an outsidemirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This may causeexhaust gases to get inside. Engineexhaust contains carbon monoxide(CO), which cannot be seen orsmelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle is stuck in snow:

. Clear snow from the base ofthe vehicle, especially anyblocking the exhaust pipe.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the vehicle side thatis away from the wind, tobring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to circulate the airinside the vehicle and set thefan speed to the highestsetting. See “Climate ControlSystems.”

For more information about CO, seeEngine Exhaust 0 208.

To save fuel, run the engine for shortperiods to warm the vehicle and thenshut the engine off and partially closethe window. Moving about to keepwarm also helps.

If it takes time for help to arrive,when running the engine, push theaccelerator pedal slightly so theengine runs faster than the idle speed.

This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do this aslittle as possible, to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin the wheelsto free the vehicle when stuck in sand,mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 219.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. The vehiclecan overheat, causing an enginecompartment fire or other damage.Spin the wheels as little as possibleand avoid going above 56 km/h(35 mph).

Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out

Turn the steering wheel left and rightto clear the area around the frontwheels. Turn off any traction system.Shift back and forth betweenR (Reverse) and a low forward gear,spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Releasethe accelerator pedal while shifting,and press lightly on the acceleratorpedal when the transmission is ingear. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle 0 367.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle can carry.This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes theweight of all occupants, cargo, and



all nonfactory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle mayshow how much weight it mayproperly carry: the Tire andLoading Information label and theCertification label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front orrear Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). This can causesystems to break and changethe way the vehicle handles.This could cause loss of controland a crash. Overloading canalso reduce stopping distance,damage the tires, and shortenthe life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). The Tire andLoading Information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel also shows the tire size ofthe original equipment tires (3)and the recommended cold tireinflation pressures (4). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires 0 335 and Tire Pressure0 343.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It may show the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for the front and rearaxle. See “Certification Label” laterin this section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.



2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weightof the driver and passengersfrom XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity. Forexample, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb passengersin your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggageload capacity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine howthis reduces the availablecargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing 0 282 forimportant information on towinga trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

3. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceed thevehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). The labelmay show the gross weightcapacity of the vehicle, called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.



{ Warning

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them as farforward as possible. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavier things,like suitcases, inside thevehicle so that some ofthem are above the tops ofthe seats.

. Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in thevehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-InFollow these recommended guidelinesduring the first 2 400 km (1,500 mi) ofdriving this vehicle. Parts have abreak-in period and performance willbe better in the long run.

For the first 2 400 km (1,500 mi):

. Avoid full throttle starts andabrupt stops.

. Do not exceed 4000 engine rpm.

. Avoid driving at any one constantspeed, fast or slow.

. Avoid downshifting to brake orslow the vehicle when the enginespeed will exceed 4000 rpm.

. Do not let the engine labor. Neverlug the engine in high gear at lowspeeds.

. Do not participate in track events,sport driving schools, or similaractivities during this break-inperiod.

. Check engine oil with everyrefueling and add if necessary. Oiland fuel consumption may behigher than normal during thefirst 2 400 km (1,500 mi).

. To break in new tires, drive atmoderate speeds and avoid hardcornering for the first300 km (200 mi). New tires do nothave maximum traction and maytend to slip.

. New brake linings also need abreak–in period. Avoid makinghard stops during the first300 km (200 mi). This isrecommended every time brakelinings are replaced.



Ignition Positions

The vehicle has an electronic keylessignition with pushbutton start.

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in the vehicle forthe system to operate. If thepushbutton start is not working, thevehicle may be near a strong radioantenna signal causing interference tothe Keyless Access system. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation0 29.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be on and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF (NoIndicator Lights) : When the vehicleis stopped, press ENGINE START/STOP once to turn the engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) 0 205.

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse),D (Drive), or M (Manual Mode), thevehicle will shift to P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RAP willremain active.

If the vehicle is in N (Neutral), theignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and display the messageSHIFT TO PARK in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). When thevehicle is shifted into P (Park), theignition will turn off.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brake andsteering systems and disable theairbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop andshift to P (Park).

4. Set the parking brake. SeeElectric Parking Brake 0 216.Press ENGINE START/STOP toturn the vehicle off.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steering

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

systems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut the vehicleoff in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,press and hold ENGINE START/STOPfor longer than two seconds, or presstwice in five seconds.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber IndicatorLight) : This mode allows you to usesome electrical accessories when theengine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch from ACC/ACCESSORY to off after five minutesto prevent battery rundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight) : This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, and thebrake pedal applied, pressing thebutton once will turn the ignition on.

Once engine cranking begins, releasethe button. Engine cranking willcontinue until the engine starts. SeeStarting the Engine 0 201. The ignitionwill then remain on.

Service Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and to verifythe proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as may berequired for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, and thebrake pedal not applied, pressing andholding ENGINE START/STOP formore than five seconds will place thevehicle in Service Mode. Theinstruments and audio systems willoperate as they do when the ignitionis on, but the vehicle will not be ableto be driven. The engine will not startin Service Mode. Press ENGINE STOP/START again to turn the ignition off.

Starting the EngineShift to P (Park) or N (Neutral). Torestart the engine when the vehicle isalready moving, use N (Neutral) only.

Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could change theway the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty. SeeAdd-On Electrical Equipment 0 285.

Starting Procedure

1. With the Keyless Access system,the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter must be in thevehicle. Press ENGINE START/STOP with the brake pedalapplied. When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button.



The idle speed will go down asthe engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it.

If the RKE transmitter is not inthe vehicle, if there isinterference, or if the RKEbattery is low, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) willdisplay a message. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation 0 29.

Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18 °Cor 0 °F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you press ENGINE START/STOP. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. Thisclears the extra gasoline from theengine. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Stop/Start SystemIf equipped, the Stop/Start system willshut off the engine to help conservefuel. It has components designed forthe increased number of starts.

{ Warning

The automatic engine Stop/Startfeature causes the engine to shutoff while the vehicle is still on. Donot exit the vehicle before shiftingto P (Park). The vehicle may restartand move unexpectedly. Alwaysshift to P (Park), and then turn theignition off before exiting thevehicle.

Auto Engine Stop/Start

When the brakes are applied and thevehicle is at a complete stop, theengine may turn off. When stopped,the tachometer displays AUTO STOP.See Tachometer 0 133. When the brakepedal is released or the acceleratorpedal is pressed, the engine willrestart.

To maintain vehicle performance,other conditions may cause the engineto automatically restart before thebrake pedal is released.



Auto Stops may not occur and/or AutoStarts may occur because:

. The climate control settingsrequire the engine to be runningto cool or heat the vehicle interior.

. The vehicle battery charge is low.

. The vehicle battery has recentlybeen disconnected.

. Minimum vehicle speed has notbeen reached since the lastAuto Stop.

. The accelerator pedal is pressed.

. The engine or transmission is notat the required operatingtemperature.

. The outside temperature is not inthe required operating range.

. The vehicle is in any gear otherthan D (Drive).

. Driver modes have been selected.

. The vehicle is on a steep hill orgrade.

. The driver door has been openedor driver seat belt has beenunbuckled.

. The hood has been opened.

. The Auto Stop has reached themaximum allowed time.

Auto Stop Disable Switch

The automatic engine Stop/Startfunction can be disabled bytouchingh on the center stack. AutoStop is enabled each time you startthe vehicle.

When the light next toh isilluminated, the system is enabled.

Engine HeaterVehicles with the engine heater canuse this option in cold weatherconditions at or below −18 °C (0 °F) foreasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up. Plugin the coolant heater at least fourhours before starting your vehicle. Aninternal thermostat in the plug-end ofthe cord may exist which will preventengine heater operation attemperatures above −18 °C (0 °F).

{ Warning

Do not plug in the engine blockheater while the vehicle is parked ina garage or under a carport.Property damage or personal injurymay result. Always park the vehiclein a clear open area away frombuildings or structures.



To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord isclipped to the diagonal brace onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment.

Check the heater cord fordamage. If it is damaged, do notuse it. See your dealer for areplacement. Inspect the cord fordamage yearly.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Improper use of the heater cord oran extension cord can damage thecord and may result in overheatingand fire.

. Plug the cord into athree-prong electrical utilityreceptacle that is protected bya ground fault detection

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

function. An ungroundedoutlet could cause an electricshock.

. Use a weatherproof,heavy-duty, 15 amp-ratedextension cord if needed.Failure to use therecommended extension cordin good operating condition,or using a damaged heater orextension cord, could make itoverheat and cause a fire,property damage, electricshock, and injury.

. Do not operate the vehiclewith the heater cordpermanently attached to thevehicle. Possible heater cordand thermostat damage couldoccur.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. While in use, do not let theheater cord touch vehicleparts or sharp edges. Neverclose the hood on theheater cord.

. Before starting the vehicle,unplug the cord, reattach thecover to the plug, andsecurely fasten the cord. Keepthe cord away from anymoving parts.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store the cordas it was before to keep it awayfrom moving engine parts. If youdo not, it could be damaged.

Contact your dealer for informationon how long to use the heater in yourparticular area.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)Some vehicle accessories may be usedafter the ignition is turned off.

The power windows and sunroof,if equipped, will continue to work forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

The infotainment system will continueto work for 10 minutes, until thedriver door is opened, or until theignition is turned on or placed inACC/ACCESSORY.

Shifting Into ParkTo shift into P (Park):

1. Bring the vehicle to a stop, andhold the brake pedal down.

2. Press the button on top of theshift lever to shift into P (Park).See Automatic Transmission0 209.

3. The P indicator on the shift leverwill turn red when the vehicle isin P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.It could overheat and catch fire.

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the vehicle is not inP (Park) with the parking brake set.The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andshift to P (Park). See Shifting IntoPark 0 205. If you are towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 278.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and the parkingbrake is set before you leave it.

If you are towing a trailer and parkingon a hill, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips 0 278.

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronically controlled transmission.The shift lock release button isdesigned to prevent inadvertentshifting out of P (Park) unless theignition is on, the brake pedal isapplied, and the shift lock releasebutton is pressed.

The shift lock control is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 364.



To shift out of P (Park):

1. Ensure the engine is running.

2. Apply the brake pedal.

3. Press the shift lock releasebutton.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

5. The P indicator will turn whiteand the gear indicator on theshift lever will turn red when thevehicle is no longer in P (Park).

6. After releasing the shift lever, itwill return to the center position.

If the vehicle cannot shift fromP (Park), a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message will bedisplayed. See your dealer for service.

Manual Park Release

{ Warning

The transmission will be placed inN (Neutral) when the manual parkrelease is pulled. The vehicle can

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

roll and you or others could beinjured. Ensure the vehicle is onlevel ground.

Caution

The manual park release is notintended to be used for towing.Damage may result from using themanual park release in this way.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

The manual park release can be usedto shift the vehicle into N (Neutral)when the engine is not running.

If the manual park release is pulledwhile the vehicle is on or if theignition is turned on while the manualpark release is pulled, the DIC willdisplay a message to service thetransmission.

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)using the manual park release:

1. Ensure the vehicle is on levelground and set the parkingbrake.


3. Use a flat-bladed tool to removethe interior trim panel on thecenter console to the right of theaccelerator pedal.

4. Pull the carpet back to exposethe manual park release lever.

5. Ensure more than one minutehas elapsed since Step 2. Applythe brake pedal.



6. Pull the manual park releaselever 90° to its latching position.

7. With the brake pedal released,place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY. Then apply thebrake pedal and release theparking brake.

To return the vehicle to P (Park) usingthe manual park release:

1. Bring the vehicle to acomplete stop.

2. Rotate the manual park release90° back to its original position.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Confirm that the vehicle is inP (Park) by turning the ignitionon or by placing the vehicle inACC/ACCESSORY, then ensurethat the indicator displays P.

5. Install the interior trim panel.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under the vehicleand ignite. Do not park over papers,leaves, dry grass, or other thingsthat can burn.

Active Fuel ManagementThis vehicle's engine may be equippedwith Active Fuel Management, whichallows the engine to operate on eitherall of its cylinders, or in reducedcylinder operation, depending on thedriving conditions.

When less power is required, such ascruising at a constant vehicle speed,the system will operate in reducedoperation mode, allowing the vehicleto achieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required,such as accelerating from a stop,passing, or merging onto a freeway,the system will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) for moreinformation on using this display.



Extended ParkingIt is best not to park with the vehiclerunning. If the vehicle is left running,be sure it will not move and there isadequate ventilation.

See Shifting Into Park 0 205 and EngineExhaust 0 208.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitteroutside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to half an hour.

If the vehicle is left parked andrunning with the RKE transmitterinside the vehicle, it will continue torun for up to an hour.

The vehicle could turn off sooner if itis parked on a hill, due to lack ofavailable fuel.

The timer will reset if the vehicle istaken out of P (Park) while it isrunning.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO), which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:

. The vehicle idles in areas withpoor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells or soundsstrange or different.

. The exhaust system leaks dueto corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected or ifit is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with thewindows completely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosed areasuch as a garage or a building thathas no fresh air ventilation.



Running the Vehicle WhileParkedIt is better not to park with the enginerunning.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park 0 205 and EngineExhaust 0 208.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 278.

Automatic Transmission

The shift pattern is displayed in thetop of the shift lever. The selectedgear position will illuminate red onthe shift lever, while all others will bedisplayed in white. If the shift is notimmediate, as in very cold conditions,the indicator on the shift lever mayflash until it is fully engaged.

The shift lever always starts from acenter position, represented by an up/down arrow on the shift pattern. Afterreleasing the shift lever, it will returnto the center position.

The transmission does not operatewhen the vehicle is off.

If the vehicle is in ACC/ACCESSORY,the transmission can be shifted intoP (Park).

If the vehicle is turned off while at arelatively high vehicle speed, thetransmission will automatically shiftto N (Neutral). Once the vehicle isstopped, P (Park) is automaticallyselected.

P : This position locks the drivewheels. Use P (Park) when starting theengine because the vehicle cannotmove easily.



{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the transmission is not inP (Park) with the parking brake set.The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If the engine hasbeen left running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure the vehiclewill not move, even when on fairlylevel ground, always set the parkingbrake and place the transmissioninto P (Park). See Shifting Into Park0 205, Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips 0 278 and ElectricParking Brake 0 216.

This vehicle is equipped with anelectronic controlled transmission.The shift lock release button isdesigned to prevent inadvertentshifting out of P (Park) unless theignition is on, the brake pedal isapplied, and the shift lock releasebutton is pressed.

When the vehicle is stopped, pressENGINE START/STOP to turn off thevehicle. The transmission will shift toP (Park) automatically, unless thevehicle is in N (Neutral). See “CarWash Mode” later in this section.

The vehicle will not shift into P (Park)if it is moving too fast. Stop thevehicle and shift into P (Park).

To shift in and out of P (Park), seeShifting Into Park 0 205 and Shiftingout of Park 0 205.

Service Shift Lever Message

If the message SERVICE SHIFTER SEEOWNER’S MANUAL appears in theDriver Information Center (DIC), theshift lever needs service. Have thevehicle serviced as soon as possible.If the vehicle is automatically shiftinginto P (Park), check to see if theP (Park) button on top of the shiftlever is stuck. To operate the vehicle,hold the shift lever in the desired gear,R (Reverse) or D (Drive), until vehiclespeed exceeds 15 km/h (10 mph), thenrelease the shift lever.

R : Use this gear to back up.

If the vehicle is shifted from eitherR (Reverse) to D (Drive), or D (Drive)or M (Manual Mode) to R (Reverse)while the speed is too high, thevehicle will shift to N (Neutral).Reduce the vehicle speed and try theshift again.



To shift into R (Reverse):


2. Press and hold shift lock releasebutton on the side of the shiftlever.

3. From the center position, movethe shift lever forward throughthe first detent to the end oftravel. R is illuminated in red.


To shift out of R (Reverse):


2. Shift to the desired gear.


At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) canbe used to rock the vehicle back andforth to get out of snow, ice, or sandwithout damaging the transmission.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck 0 195.

N : In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. Torestart the engine when the vehicle isalready moving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift intoa drive gear while the engine isrunning at high speed.

Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the engine runningat high speed may damage thetransmission. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehicle warranty.Be sure the engine is not running athigh speed when shifting thevehicle.

The vehicle is not designed to stay inN (Neutral) for more thanfive minutes. It may automaticallyshift into P (Park). N (Neutral) is notintended for towing. If the vehicleneeds to be towed, see Towing theVehicle 0 367.

To shift into N (Neutral):

1. Move the shift lever forward tothe first detent from the centerposition.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), applythe brake pedal and press theshift lock release button whilemoving the shift lever forward. Nwill illuminate in red.


To shift out of N (Neutral):


2. Shift to the desired gear.If shifting from N (Neutral) toR (Reverse) the shift lock releasebutton will need to be pressed.




Car Wash Mode

This vehicle includes a Car WashMode that allows the vehicle toremain in N (Neutral) for use inautomatic car washes.

Car Wash Mode (Engine Off – Driverin Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine off and the vehicleoccupied:

1. Drive to the entrance of thecar wash.


3. Shift to N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and releasethe brake pedal.

5. The indicator should continue toshow N. If it does not, repeatSteps 2–4.

6. The vehicle is now ready for thecar wash.

Car Wash Mode (Engine Off – Driverout of Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine off and the vehicleunoccupied:



3. Open the door.


5. Turn off the engine and releasethe brake pedal.


7. Exit the vehicle and close thedoor. The vehicle is now readyfor the car wash.

8. The vehicle may automaticallyshift to P (Park) upon re-entry.

Car Wash Mode (Engine On – Driverin Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine on and the vehicleoccupied:




4. Release the brake pedal. Thevehicle is now ready for thecar wash.

Car Wash Mode (Engine On – Driverout of Vehicle)

To place the vehicle in N (Neutral)with the engine on and the vehicleunoccupied:



3. Open the door.

4. Shift to N (Neutral), then releasethe brake pedal.




6. Exit the vehicle and close thedoor. The vehicle is now readyfor the car wash.

7. The vehicle may automaticallyshift to P (Park) upon re-entry.

Caution

A transmission hot message maydisplay if the automatictransmission fluid is too hot.Driving under this condition candamage the vehicle. Stop and idlethe engine to cool the automatictransmission fluid. This messageclears when the transmission fluidhas cooled sufficiently.

D : This position is for normal driving.If more power is needed for passing,press the accelerator pedal down. Aclicking noise or a detent may be feltwhen pressing the accelerator pedalall the way to the end of travel. This isnormal.

To shift into D (Drive):


2. From the center position, movethe shift lever back.

. If the vehicle is in P (Park)press the shift lock releasebutton while pulling the shiftlever back.

. D will illuminate in red.

. After releasing the shift lever,it will return to the centerposition.

To shift out of D (Drive):


2. Shift to the desired gear.


Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” under Lossof Control 0 192.

M : This mode can be entered fromD (Drive) by pulling back on the shiftlever. The M in the shift pattern willilluminate red, and the D will switchto white. After releasing the shiftlever, it will return to the centerposition. M (Manual Mode) allowsgears appropriate for current drivingconditions to be selected.

To exit M (Manual Mode) and returnto D (Drive), pull back on the shiftlever. The D in the shift pattern willilluminate in red, and the M willswitch to white. See Manual Mode0 214.

Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill usingonly the accelerator pedal maydamage the transmission. Therepair will not be covered by thevehicle warranty. If the vehicle isstuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes tohold the vehicle in place.



Manual Mode

Tap Shift

Caution

Driving with the engine at a highrpm without upshifting while usingTap Shift, could damage the vehicle.Always upshift when necessarywhile using Tap Shift.

Vehicles with Tap Shift have controlson the back of the steering wheel tomanually shift the automatictransmission.

Permanent Tap Shift Mode

To enter Permanent Tap Shift Mode:

1. With the vehicle in D (Drive),pull back on the shift lever toactivate M (Manual Mode). TheM in the shift pattern willilluminate in red, and the D willswitch to white.


3. Press the controls on the back ofthe steering wheel to shift. Usethe left steering wheel control todownshift, and the right controlto upshift. To shift to the lowestavailable gear, press and hold theleft control.

To exit Permanent Tap Shift Mode:

1. To exit M (Manual Mode) andreturn to D (Drive), pull back onthe shift lever. The D in the shiftpattern will illuminate in red,and the M will switch to white.


M (Manual Mode) can be exited toreturn to D (Drive) at any speed bypulling the lever rearward from thecenter position. It is not necessary tostop the vehicle or shift to N (Neutral)or P (Park) before shifting back toD (Drive).

Temporary Tap Manual Shift Mode

To enter Temporary Tap Shift Mode:

1. With the transmission inD (Drive) and not in PermanentTap Shift Mode, the Tap Shiftcontrols will activate atemporary tap manual shiftmode, allowing the transmissionto be manually shifted.

2. To shift to the lowest availablegear, press and hold the leftcontrol.

3. To deactivate, hold the rightcontrol briefly. Automatic shiftsreturn after no manual shiftshave been done for seven to10 seconds.



While using Tap Shift, the vehicle willhave firmer, quicker shifting. This canbe used for sport driving or whenclimbing or descending hills, to stay ingear longer, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allowshifting into gears appropriate for thevehicle speed and engine revolutionsper minute (rpm). If shifting isprevented for any reason, a SHIFTDENIED message will be displayed inthe instrument cluster. Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next higher gear if theengine rpm is too high. It will onlyautomatically shift to the next lowergear if the engine rpm is muchtoo low.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature always sendengine power to all four wheels. It isfully automatic, and adjusts itself asneeded for road conditions.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has an Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronicbraking system that helps prevent abraking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise may be heardwhile this test is going on, and it mayeven be noticed that the brake pedalmoves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Light0 143.



If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking to avoida sudden obstacle, a computer sensesthe wheels are slowing down. If one ofthe wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure toeach wheel, as required, faster thanany driver could. This can help yousteer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updates onwheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not change thetime needed to get a foot up to thebrake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get too closeto the vehicle in front of you, therewill not be enough time to apply thebrakes if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold thebrake pedal down firmly and let ABSwork. You may hear the ABS pump ormotor operating and feel the brakepedal pulsate. This is normal.

When ABS is active, it may be anindication that road surfaces areslippery. Braking sooner may berequired for driving conditions.

If equipped with electric brake boost,the TCS/StabiliTrak/ESC light willflash when ABS is active.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brake atthe same time. In many emergencies,steering can help more than even thevery best braking.

Electric Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The EPB can always beactivated, even if the ignition is off. Toprevent draining the battery, avoidrepeated cycles of the EPB systemwhen the engine is not running.

The system has aY or PARK

Electric Parking Brake light, and a 8Service Parking Brake light. SeeElectric Parking Brake Light 0 142 andService Electric Parking Brake Light0 143.



Before leaving the vehicle, check fortheY or PARK light to ensure thatthe parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

To apply the EPB:

1. Be sure the vehicle is at acomplete stop.

2. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

TheY or PARK light will flash andthen stay on once the EPB is fullyapplied. If theY or PARK lightflashes continuously, then the EPB isonly partially applied or there is aproblem with the EPB. A DIC messagewill display. Release the EPB and tryto apply it again. If the light does notcome on, or keeps flashing, have thevehicle serviced. Do not drive thevehicle if theY or PARK light isflashing. See your dealer. See ElectricParking Brake Light 0 142.

If the 8 light is on, press the EPBswitch and hold it. Continue to holdthe switch until theY or PARK light

remains on. If the 8 light remains on,see your dealer.

If the EPB is applied while the vehicleis moving, the vehicle will decelerateas long as the switch is pressed. If theswitch is pressed until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB will remainapplied.

The vehicle may automatically applythe EPB in some situations when thevehicle is not moving. This is normal,and is done to periodically check thecorrect operation of the EPB system.

If the EPB fails to apply, block the rearwheels to prevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB:


2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Press the EPB switchmomentarily.

The EPB is released when theY orPARK light is off.

If the 8 light is on, release the EPB bypressing and holding the EPB switch.Continue to hold the switch untiltheY or PARK light is off. If eitherlight stays on after release isattempted, see your dealer.

Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system andcause premature wear or damage tobrake system parts. Make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made to driveaway. Avoid rapid acceleration whenthe EPB is applied, to preserve parkingbrake lining life.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assist featuredesigned to assist the driver instopping or decreasing vehicle speedin emergency driving conditions. Thisfeature uses the stability systemhydraulic brake control module tosupplement the power brake systemunder conditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of the vehicleuntil the ABS activates. Minor brakepedal pulsation or pedal movementduring this time is normal and thedriver should continue to apply thebrake pedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brake pedalpressure is quickly decreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

{ Warning

Do not rely on the HSA feature.HSA does not replace the need topay attention and drive safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by this system.Failure to use proper care whendriving may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. See DefensiveDriving 0 190.

Hill Start Assist (HSA) mayautomatically activate when thevehicle is stopped on a hill andAutomatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) is notenabled. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicledrive off. During the transition fromreleasing the brake pedal toaccelerating to drive off on a hill, HSAholds the braking pressure to preventrolling. HSA will not activate if the

vehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Automatic VehicleHold (AVH)

Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH),if equipped, can be turned on bypressing AUTO HOLD with the driverseat belt fastened, the driver doorclosed, and the engine running. TheAVH indicator will come on.



This feature will activate when thevehicle is stopped to prevent it frommoving. After the brake pedal hasbeen released and before theaccelerator pedal has been pressed,AVH uses braking pressure to hold thevehicle stationary. In addition, theABS pump motor may activate tobuild brake pressure to maintain thevehicle at a standstill if necessary.

If AVH is holding the vehicle, the AVHindicator will change to green. OnceAVH is active it will hold the vehiclefor a defined time period then engagethe parking brake. While AVH isholding the vehicle, the parking brakewill engage if the driver door isopened or the driver seat belt isunfastened. See Automatic Vehicle Hold(AVH) Light 0 144.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC).These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that any ofthe drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes to thespinning wheels and reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak/ESC activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak/ESC selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of thevehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak/ESCbegins to limit wheel spin, cruisecontrol will disengage. Cruise controlmay be turned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started and beginsto move. The systems may be heard orfelt while they are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. This isnormal and does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessary toturn TCS off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 195 and “Turningthe Systems Off and On” later in thissection.



The indicator light for both systems isin the instrument cluster. Thislight will:

. Flash when TCS is limitingwheel spin.

. Flash when StabiliTrak/ESC isactivated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on to indicatethat the system is inactive and is notassisting the driver in maintainingcontrol. The vehicle is safe to drive,but driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

4. Drive the vehicle.

If d comes on and stays on, thevehicle may need more time todiagnose the problem. If the conditionpersists, see your dealer.

Turning the Systems Off and On

Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS is off.The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andreleaseY. The Traction Off light idisplays in the instrument cluster andthe appropriate DIC message displays.

To turn TCS on again, press andreleaseY. The Traction Off light idisplayed in the instrument clusterwill turn off.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC, press and holdY until the

Traction Off light i and StabiliTrak/

ESC OFF light g come on and stay onin the instrument cluster. Theappropriate DIC message displays.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak/ESC onagain, press and releaseY. The

Traction Off light i and StabiliTrak/

ESC OFF light g in the instrumentcluster turn off.

Adding accessories can affect vehicleperformance. See Accessories andModifications 0 288.



Driver Mode ControlDriver Mode Control attempts to adda sportier feel, provide a morecomfortable ride, or assists in differentweather conditions or terrain. Thissystem simultaneously changes thesoftware settings of varioussub-systems to optimize drivingperformance. Depending on the optionpackage, available features, and modeselection; the Exhaust, Suspension,Steering, Brakes, and Powertrain willchange settings to achieve the desiredmode characteristics. If the vehicle isequipped with Magnetic Ride Control,selecting the various Driver Modesadjusts the ride of the vehicle toenhance the ride performance for theroad conditions and theselected mode.

The Driver Mode Control has multiplemodes: Tour, Sport, Snow/Ice, andTrack. The Track Mode is available forV-Series models only. All modes havepreset vehicle settings for use indifferent driving conditions. Forfurther detail see “Mode Description”.

To activate a mode, pressy orz onthe MODE switch to make a modeselection in the instrument cluster.Every press will scroll to the nextavailable mode. When a mode isselected, a unique and persistentindicator will display in the DiverInformation Center (DIC).

Mode Description

The following describes the modesthat can be selected in further detail.

Tour Mode

Use for normal city and highwaydriving to provide a smooth, soft ride.This setting provides a balancedsetting between comfort and handling.This is the standard mode. For furtherdetails on Tour Mode, see “DriverMode Selector Attributes Affected”.

Sport Mode

Use where road conditions or personalpreference demand a more controlledresponse.

When selected, the Sport Modeindicator light will display in theinstrument cluster.

In this mode, the vehicle monitorsdriving behaviors and automaticallyenables Performance Shift Featureswhen spirited driving is detected.These features maintain lowertransmission gears to increaseavailable engine braking and improveacceleration response. The vehicle will



exit these features and return tonormal operation after a short periodwhen no spirited driving is detected.The steering including Active RearSteer (if equipped), will change toprovide more precise control. If thevehicle has Magnetic Ride Control, thesuspension will change to providebetter cornering performance. If thevehicle is equipped with AWD, SportMode sends more torque to the rearwheels.

For further details on Sport Mode, see“Driver Mode Selector AttributesAffected”.

Snow/Ice Mode

Snow/Ice Mode is used for slipperysurfaces to help control wheel speed.This can compromise the accelerationon dry asphalt. Use when maximumvehicle handling is desired. Snow/IceMode will use a different acceleratorpedal map to optimize traction on aslippery surface. The accelerator pedalwill reduce engine torque at smallpedal inputs.

When selected, the Snow/Ice Modeindicator light will display in theinstrument cluster.

This feature is not intended for usewhen the vehicle is stuck in sand,mud, ice, snow, or gravel. If thevehicle becomes stuck, see If theVehicle Is Stuck 0 195.

If the vehicle is equipped with AWD,Snow/Ice Mode will provide moretorque to the front wheels.

For further details on Snow/Ice Mode,see “Driver Mode Selector AttributesAffected”.

Track Mode (V-Series Only)

Use when maximum vehicle handlingis desired.

When selected, the Track Modeindicator will display in theinstrument cluster.

When in Track Mode, the automatictransmission and the accelerator pedalis adjusted to give maximum controlduring the highest level of spiriteddriving. The Magnetic Ride Controland steering will be set to theoptimum level for vehicleresponsiveness.



Driver Mode Selector Attributes Affected

The different modes features are shown below. Not all vehicles have all features, depending on the vehicle options.

Modes: TOURDefault

SPORT TRACK SNOW/ICE

Throttle Progression Tour Tour Track Snow/Ice

Transmission Shift Mode Tour Sport Track Tour

Engine Sound Tour Sport Track Tour

Steering Tour Sport Track Tour

Suspension (if equipped with Magnetic Ride) Tour Sport Track Tour

Traction and Stability Control Tour Tour Track Tour

Throttle Progression

Adjusts throttle sensitivity byselecting how quick or slow thethrottle reacts to input.

. Snow/Ice - The accelerator pedalwill reduce engine torque at smallpedal inputs. This allows betterwheel control on slippery surfaces.

. Track - The accelerator pedal isadjusted to give maximum controlduring the highest level of spiriteddriving.

Transmission Shift Mode

Sport or Track – Performance ShiftFeatures are enabled in Sport andTrack. Performance Shift Featuresinclude Performance AlgorithmLiftfoot and Performance AlgorithmShift. Performance Algorithm Liftfoot(PAL) allows the transmission to holdthe current gear after a quick releaseof a heavily applied accelerator pedal.This provides greater engine brakingand enhanced vehicle control withoutusing the paddles. Performance

Algorithm Shift (PAS) recognizesaggressive cornering, heavy braking,and high acceleration to select andhold lower gears when not usingpaddles.

When PAL/PAS is activated, there isan additional green gear symbol whichappears in the instrument clusterdisplay. See Gear Shifting Light 0 143.



Engine Sound

Adjusts the volume of engine noise.Adjusts the volume of engine noisefrom quietest in Tour mode to mostrobust in Track mode.

Steering

Adjusts from a lighter steering feel inTour Mode to reduced assist in Sportand Track Mode for moresteering feel.

Suspension (if equipped withMagnetic Ride)

Adjusts the shock dampeningfirmness from a comfort tune in TourMode to an optimized responsivenesstune in Sport and Track.

Traction and Stability Control

StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) can be turned off by pressingand holding the button forfive seconds.

Driver Mode Customization

The Engine Sound Management,steering, and suspension drive modescan be set to the driver’s preference.See “Driving Mode” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

When in the Track main vehicle mode,you cannot overwrite the Steering orSuspension settings. These settingsare designed to interact with theadvanced functions in the Track Modeand cannot be overwritten.

The selections made in the DrivingMode menu overwrite the mainvehicle mode selection via the buttonsor switch on the center console. Inorder to customize and overwrite,select one of the three settings bytouching the infotainment display.

When in the customization screen foreach system, select one of theavailable options:

• Auto (Follows the MODE switch)

• Tour

• Sport

• Track (V-Series only)

The default will be to follow thevehicle MODE switch settings, but themain vehicle mode selection for thecurrently selected system can beoverwritten using this menu. Thesettings selected in this menu will setthe vehicle behavior in all selectedvehicle modes, and will be retainedover each ignition cycle. They do nothave to be reset each time the vehicleis started.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a limited-slip rear axlecan give more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. When traction islow, this feature allows the drivewheel with the most traction to movethe vehicle. The limited-slip rear axlealso gives the driver enhanced controlwhen cornering hard or completing amaneuver, such as a lane change. Forvehicles with limited-slip rear axle, therear axle fluid should be changed. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.



Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely at asteady speed. Do not use cruisecontrol on winding roads or inheavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you couldlose control. Do not use cruisecontrol on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping your footon the accelerator. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below about40 km/h (25 mph).

If the Traction Control/StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system begins to limit wheel spinwhile using cruise control, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl 0 219. If a collision alertoccurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control is disengaged.See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System 0 260. When road conditionsallow cruise control to be safely used,it can be turned back on.

Cruise control will disengage if eitherTCS or StabiliTrak/ESC is turned off.

If the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol disengages.

J : Press to turn the system on andoff. A white indicator appears in theinstrument cluster when cruise isturned on.

RES+ : If there is a set speed inmemory, press briefly to resume tothat speed or press and hold toaccelerate. If the cruise control isalready active, use to increase vehiclespeed. To increase speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent.To increase speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press RES+ to the second detent.



SET− : Press briefly to set the speedand activate cruise control. If thecruise control is already active, use todecrease vehicle speed. To decreasespeed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET−to the first detent. To decrease speedto the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark onthe speedometer, press SET− to thesecond detent.

* : Press to disengage cruise controlwithout erasing the set speed frommemory.

Setting Cruise Control

IfJ is on when not in use, SET− orRES+ could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. KeepJ offwhen cruise is not being used.

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−. Thedesired set speed briefly appearsin the instrument cluster.

4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

When the cruise control has been setto the desired speed, a green cruisecontrol indicator appears on theinstrument cluster and a cruise setspeed message appears on theHead-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then the brakes are appliedor* is pressed, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press RES+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold RES+ until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed in smallincrements, briefly press RES+ tothe first detent. For each press, thevehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph)faster.

. To increase vehicle speed in largerincrements, briefly press RES+ tothe second detent. For each press,the vehicle speed increases to thenext 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.

The speedometer reading can bedisplayed in either English or metricunits. See Instrument Cluster (Uplevel)0 130 or Instrument Cluster (BaseLevel) 0 127. The increment value useddepends on the units displayed.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControl

If the cruise control system is alreadyactivated:

. Press and hold SET− until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 227. To decrease the vehicle speed in

small increments, briefly pressSET− to the first detent. For eachpress, the vehicle goes about1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

. To decrease the vehicle speed inlarger increments, briefly pressSET− to the second detent. Foreach press, the vehicle speeddecreases to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer.

The cruise control system mayautomatically brake to slow thevehicle down.


Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increasethe vehicle speed. When you take yourfoot off the pedal, the vehicle will slowdown to the previous set cruise speed.

While pressing the accelerator pedalor shortly following the release tooverride cruise, briefly applying SET−will result in cruise set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness of thehills. When going up steep hills, youmight have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain your speed. Whengoing downhill, the cruise controlsystem may automatically brake toslow the vehicle down. Also, you mayhave to brake or shift to a lower gearto keep your speed down. If the brakepedal is applied, cruise controldisengages.

Ending Cruise Control

There are four ways to end cruisecontrol:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is erasedfrom memory ifJ is pressed or ifthe ignition is turned off.

Adaptive Cruise ControlIf equipped with Adaptive CruiseControl (ACC), it allows for selectingthe cruise control set speed andfollowing gap. Read this entire sectionbefore using this system. ACC uses acamera and radar sensors to detectother vehicles. See Radio FrequencyStatement 0 407. The following gap isthe following time (or distance)between your vehicle and a vehicledetected directly ahead in your path,moving in the same direction. If novehicle is detected in your path, ACCworks like regular cruise control.

If a vehicle is detected in your path,ACC can speed up the vehicle or applylimited, moderate braking to maintainthe selected following gap. Todisengage ACC, apply the brake. If theTraction Control System (TCS) or



StabiliTrak/Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system activates while ACC isengaged, ACC may automaticallydisengage. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control 0 219. Whenroad conditions allow ACC to be safelyused, ACC can be turned back on. ACCwill not engage if the TCS orStabiliTrak/ESC is disabled.

{ Warning

ACC has limited braking ability andmay not have time to slow thevehicle down enough to avoid acollision with another vehicle youare following. This can occur whenvehicles suddenly slow or stopahead, or enter your lane. Also see“Alerting the Driver” in this section.Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 190.

{ Warning

ACC will not detect or brake forchildren, pedestrians, animals,or other objects.

Do not use ACC when:

. On winding and hilly roads orwhen the sensors are blockedby snow, ice, or dirt. Thesystem may not detect avehicle ahead. Keep the entirefront of the vehicle clean.

. Visibility is low, such as infog, rain, or snow conditions.ACC performance is limitedunder these conditions.

. On slippery roads where fastchanges in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip.

J : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator turns white on theinstrument cluster when ACC isturned on.

RES+ : Press briefly to resume theprevious set speed or to increasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyengaged. To increase speed by 1 km/h(1 mph), press RES+ to the first detent.To increase speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press RES+ to the second detent.

SET– : Press briefly to set the speedand activate ACC or to decreasevehicle speed if ACC is alreadyengaged. To decrease speed by 1 km/h



(1 mph), press SET− to the first detent.To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h(5 mph) mark on the speedometer,press SET− to the second detent.

* : Press to disengage ACC withouterasing the selected set speed.

[ : Press to select a following gaptime (or distance) setting for ACC ofFar, Medium, or Near.


Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control

To switch between ACC and regularcruise control, press and hold*.A Driver Information Display (DIC)message displays.

ACC Indicator Regular CruiseControl Indicator

When ACC is engaged, a green\indicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster. When the regular cruisecontrol is engaged, a greenJindicator will be lit on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is turned on, thecruise control mode will be set to thelast mode used before the vehicle wasturned off.

{ Warning

Always check the cruise controlindicator on the instrument clusterto determine which mode cruisecontrol is in before using thefeature. If ACC is not active, the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle will not automatically brakefor other vehicles, which couldcause an accident if the brakes arenot applied manually. You andothers could be seriously injured orkilled.

Setting Adaptive Cruise Control

IfJ is on when not in use, it couldget pressed and go into ACC when notdesired. KeepJ off when cruise isnot being used.

Select the set speed desired for ACC.This is the vehicle speed when novehicle is detected in its path.

While the vehicle is moving, ACC willnot set at a speed less than 25 km/h(15 mph), although it can be resumedwhen driving at lower speeds.

To set ACC while moving:

1. PressJ.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release SET−.



4. Remove your foot from theaccelerator.

After ACC is set, it may immediatelyapply the brakes if a vehicle ahead isdetected closer than the selectedfollowing gap.

ACC can also be set while the vehicleis stopped if ACC is on and the brakepedal is applied.

The ACC indicator displays on theinstrument cluster and Head-UpDisplay (HUD), if equipped. When ACCis turned on, the indicator will be litwhite. When ACC is engaged, theindicator will turn green.

Be mindful of speed limits,surrounding traffic speeds, andweather conditions when selecting theset speed.

Resuming a Set Speed

If ACC is set at a desired speed andthen the brakes are applied, ACC isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

To begin using ACC again, press RES+up briefly.

. If the vehicle is moving, it returnsto the previous set speed.

. If the vehicle is stopped with thebrake pedal applied, press RES+and release the brake pedal. ACCwill hold the vehicle until RES+ orthe accelerator pedal is pressed.

A green ACC indicator and the setspeed display on the instrumentcluster. The vehicle ahead indicatormay be flashing if a vehicle ahead waspresent and moved. See “Approachingand Following a Vehicle” later in thissection.

Once ACC has resumed, if there is novehicle ahead, if the vehicle ahead isbeyond the selected following gap,or if the vehicle has exited a sharpcurve, then the vehicle speed willincrease to the set speed.

Increasing Speed While ACC Is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the accelerator to get to thehigher speed. Press SET− andrelease the accelerator pedal. Thevehicle will now cruise at thehigher speed.

When the accelerator pedal ispressed, ACC will not brakebecause it is overridden. The ACCindicator will turn blue on theinstrument panel and heads updisplay, if equipped

. Press and hold RES+ until thedesired set speed is displayed,then release it.

. To increase speed in smallerincrements, press RES+ to the firstdetent. For each press, the vehiclegoes 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.

. To increase speed in largerincrements, press RES+ to thesecond detent. For each press, thevehicle speed increases to the next5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.



The set speed can also be increasedwhile the vehicle is stopped.

. If stopped with the brake applied,press RES+ until the desired setspeed is displayed.

. If ACC is holding the vehicle at astop and there is another vehicledirectly ahead, pressing RES+ willincrease the set speed. PressingRES+ when there is no longer avehicle ahead will cause ACC toresume.

Reducing Speed While ACC Is at aSet Speed

Do one of the following:

. Use the brake to get to the desiredlower speed. Release the brake andpress SET−. The vehicle will nowcruise at the lower speed.

. Press and hold SET− until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To decrease speed in smallerincrements, press SET− to the firstdetent. For each press, the vehiclegoes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.

. To decrease speed in largerincrements, press SET− to thesecond detent. For each press, thevehicle speed decreases to thenext 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on thespeedometer.

. To decrease speed while thevehicle is stopped, press SET−until the desired set speed isdisplayed.

Selecting the Follow Distance Gap

When a slower moving vehicle isdetected ahead within the selectedfollowing gap, ACC will adjust thevehicle's speed and attempt tomaintain the follow distance gapselected.

Press[ on the steering wheel toadjust the following gap. Each presscycles the gap button through threesettings: Far, Medium, or Near.

When pressed, the current gap settingdisplays briefly on the instrumentcluster and HUD. The gap setting willbe maintained until it is changed.

Since each gap setting corresponds toa following time (Far, Medium,or Near), the following distance willvary based on vehicle speed. Thefaster the vehicle speed, the furtherback your vehicle will follow a vehicledetected ahead. Consider traffic andweather conditions when selecting thefollowing gap. The range of selectablegaps may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Changing the gap settingautomatically changes the alert timingsensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) forthe Forward Collision Alert (FCA)feature. See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System 0 260.

Alerting the Driver



If ACC is engaged, driver action maybe required when ACC cannot applysufficient braking because ofapproaching a vehicle too rapidly.

When this condition occurs, thecollision alert symbol on the HUD willflash on the windshield. Either eightbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse five times. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

See Defensive Driving 0 190.

Approaching and Following aVehicle

The vehicle ahead indicator is on theinstrument cluster and HUD display.This indicator only displays when avehicle is detected in your vehicle’spath moving in the same direction.

If this indicator is not displaying, ACCwill not respond to or brake forvehicles ahead.

ACC automatically slows the vehicledown and adjusts vehicle speed tofollow the vehicle in front at theselected follow gap. The vehicle speedincreases or decreases to follow thevehicle in front of you, but will notexceed the set speed. It may applylimited braking, if necessary. Whenbraking is active, the brake lamps willcome on. The automatic braking mayfeel or sound different than if thebrakes were applied manually. This isnormal.

Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

ACC may not detect and react tostopped or slow-moving vehiclesahead of you. For example, thesystem may not brake for a vehicleit has never detected moving. Thiscan occur in stop-and-go traffic or

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

when a vehicle suddenly appearsdue to a vehicle ahead changinglanes. Your vehicle may not stopand could cause a crash. Usecaution when using ACC. Yourcomplete attention is alwaysrequired while driving and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes.

ACC Automatically Disengages

ACC may automatically disengage andyou will need to manually apply thebrakes to slow the vehicle if:

. The sensors are blocked.

. The Traction Control System (TCS)or StabiliTrak/ESC system hasactivated or been disabled.

. There is a fault in the system.

. The radar falsely reports blockagewhen driving in a desert or remotearea with no other vehicles or



roadside objects. A DIC messagemay display to indicate that ACCis temporarily unavailable.

The ACC indicator will turn whitewhen ACC is no longer active.

In some cases, when ACC will notactivate, regular cruise control may beused. See “Switching Between ACC andRegular Cruise Control” previously inthis section. Always consider drivingconditions before using either cruisecontrol system.

Notification to Resume ACC

ACC will maintain a follow gap behinda detected vehicle and slow yourvehicle to a stop behind that vehicle.

If the stopped vehicle ahead hasdriven away and ACC has notresumed, the vehicle ahead indicatorwill flash as a reminder to checktraffic ahead before proceeding. Inaddition, the left and right sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse threetimes, or three beeps will sound. See“Alert Type” and “Adaptive Cruise GoNotifier” in “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 157.

When the vehicle ahead drives away,ACC resumes automatically if the stopwas brief. If necessary, press RES+ orthe accelerator pedal to resume ACC.If stopped for more than two minutesor if the driver door is opened and thedriver seat belt is unbuckled, the ACCautomatically applies the ElectricParking Brake (EPB) to hold thevehicle. The EPB status light will turnon. See Electric Parking Brake 0 216.To release the EPB, press theaccelerator pedal.

A DIC warning message may displayindicating to shift to P (Park) beforeexiting the vehicle.

{ Warning

If ACC has stopped the vehicle, andif ACC is disengaged, turned off,or canceled, the vehicle will nolonger be held at a stop. The vehiclecan move. When ACC is holding thevehicle at a stop, always beprepared to manually apply thebrakes.

{ Warning

Leaving the vehicle without placingit in P (Park) can be dangerous. Donot leave the vehicle while it isbeing held at a stop by ACC. Alwaysplace the vehicle in P (Park) andturn off the ignition before leavingthe vehicle.

ACC Override

If using the accelerator pedal whileACC is active, the ACC indicator turnsblue on the instrument cluster and inthe HUD, if equipped, to indicate thatautomatic braking will not occur. ACCwill resume operation when theaccelerator pedal is not being pressed.

{ Warning

The ACC will not automaticallyapply the brakes if your foot isresting on the accelerator pedal.You could crash into a vehicleahead of you.



Curves in the Road

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may not detect avehicle ahead in your lane. Youcould be startled if the vehicleaccelerates up to the set speed,especially when following a vehicleexiting or entering exit ramps. Youcould lose control of the vehicle orcrash. Do not use ACC while drivingon an entrance or exit ramp. Alwaysbe ready to use the brakes ifnecessary.

{ Warning

On curves, ACC may respond to avehicle in another lane, or may nothave time to react to a vehicle inyour lane. You could crash into avehicle ahead of you, or lose controlof your vehicle. Give extra attentionin curves and be ready to use the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

brakes if necessary. Select anappropriate speed while driving incurves.

ACC may operate differently in asharp curve. It may reduce the vehiclespeed if the curve is too sharp.

When following a vehicle and enteringa curve, ACC may not detect thevehicle ahead and accelerate to the setspeed. When this happens, the vehicleahead indicator will not appear.

ACC may detect a vehicle that is notin your lane and apply the brakes.

ACC may occasionally provide an alertand/or braking that is consideredunnecessary. It could respond tovehicles in different lanes, signs,guardrails, and other stationaryobjects when entering or exiting acurve. This is normal operation. Thevehicle does not need service.



Other Vehicle Lane Changes

ACC will not detect a vehicle aheaduntil it is completely in the lane. Thebrakes may need to be manuallyapplied.

Do Not Use ACC on Hills and WhenTowing a Trailer

Do not use ACC when driving on steephills or when towing a trailer. Fortowing capability, see Trailer Towing0 282. ACC will not detect a vehicle inthe lane while driving on steep hills.The driver will often need to take overacceleration and braking on steephills, especially when towing a trailer.If the brakes are applied, the ACCdisengages.

Disengaging ACC

There are three ways todisengage ACC:

. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press*.

. PressJ.

Erasing Speed Memory

The ACC set speed is erased frommemory ifJ is pressed or if theignition is turned off.

Cleaning the Sensing System

The camera sensor on the windshieldbehind the rearview mirror and theradar sensors on the front of thevehicle can become blocked by snow,

ice, dirt, or mud. These areas need tobe cleaned for ACC to operateproperly.

If ACC will not operate, regular cruisecontrol may be available. See“Switching Between ACC and RegularCruise Control” previously in thissection. Always consider drivingconditions before using either cruisecontrol system.

For cleaning instructions, see“Washing the Vehicle” under ExteriorCare 0 369.

System operation may also be limitedunder snow, heavy rain, or road sprayconditions.

Super CruiseIf equipped, Super Cruise can steer tomaintain lane position under certainconditions on limited access freewaysthat are separated from opposingtraffic.



{ Warning

Super Cruise can only assist tomaintain lane position when drivingon limited access freeways. Youmust supervise the driving task andmonitor the freeway conditions.You may need to respond to trafficevents by steering, braking,or accelerating. See DefensiveDriving 0 190.

Super Cruise is:

. Not a self-driving system.

. Not a crash avoidance orwarning system.

. Not a substitute for propersupervision of thedriving task.

Super Cruise uses the following todetect the current lane position andlane markings ahead on limited accessfreeways under certain conditions:

. Cameras

. Global Positioning System (GPS)sensing

. A high-precision map

. GPS-enhancement datadownloaded through OnStar

Super Cruise works with AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), which controlsacceleration and braking while SuperCruise is enabled and operating.Review and understand both thissection and the ACC section beforeusing Super Cruise. See AdaptiveCruise Control 0 227.

An active OnStar or connected serviceplan that includes Emergency Servicesis required to use Super Cruise.

{ Warning

Super Cruise does not perform allaspects of driving, nor does it doeverything a driver can do. SuperCruise only steers to maintain laneposition. Super Cruise can only beused with Adaptive Cruise Control.

Super Cruise does:

. Not prevent crashes or warnof possible crashes.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Not steer to avoid stopped orslow-moving vehicles,construction barriers orcones, motorcycles, children,pedestrians, animals, or otherobjects on the freeway.

. Not steer in response tovehicles or objects next toyour vehicle, includingvehicles attempting to enteryour lane.

. Not change lanes.

. Not steer to merge onto or toexit freeways.

. Not detect, steer to avoid,or steer through constructionzones.

. Not function on surfacestreets.

. Not respond to crossing oroncoming traffic.

. Not function in city drivingconditions.



{ Warning

Some state and local laws mayrequire hands to be kept on thesteering wheel at all times. Onlyremove your hands from thesteering wheel if Super Cruise isengaged, it is safe to do so, and it ispermitted by state and local laws.Failure to do so may result in acrash involving serious injury ordeath.

{ Warning

Failure to supervise the driving taskand to respond appropriately, evenwhile Super Cruise is operating, cancause a crash. Super Cruise may notrespond as you would to all drivingsituations and may not maintainlane position under all conditions.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

It is extremely important to payattention to the operation of thevehicle, even while using SuperCruise. Do not use a hand-helddevice while driving, even withSuper Cruise engaged.

To prevent serious injury or death:

. Always remain properlyseated in the driver seat withyour seat belt fastened.

. Never remove your handsfrom the steering wheel whenSuper Cruise is not operating.

. Always make sure trafficconditions are safe beforeusing Super Cruise.

. Always keep the entire frontof the vehicle and the sensorsclean.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Always observe posted speedlimits. Only use Super Cruiseat or below the posted speedlimit.

Super Cruise should not be used incomplex or uncertain drivingconditions, including:

. Not in construction zones.

. Not when approaching orexiting toll plazas.

. Not when lane markings arenot present or cannot bedetected. For example there istoo much glare, weatherconditions are poor, or lanesare poorly marked.

. Not on slippery or icyfreeways.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Not in adverse weatherconditions, including rain,sleet, fog, ice, or snow.

. Not on winding or hilly roads.

. Not for city driving.

. Not during heavy oremergency braking.

. Not on surface streets.

. Not on a road shoulder,service drive, or under anelevated freeway.

. Not in tunnels.

. Not when towing a trailer.

. Not in a freeway exit lane.

When Super Cruise is Available

Super Cruise Indicator

Super Cruise is designed to operateonly when:

. ACC is on. See Adaptive CruiseControl 0 227.

. Forward Automatic Braking is on.See Forward Automatic Braking(FAB) 0 262.

. Teen Driver is not active.

. The GPS detects the vehicle is ona limited access freeway.

. Both the camera and the radarsensors are functioning and notcovered, obstructed, or damaged.

. The Driver Attention System(DAS) detects the driver's headand eyes are directed toward thefreeway.

. The lane markings are clearlyvisible and able to be detected bythe system.

Poor Conditions

Poor Conditions



Using Super Cruise

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death:

. Always check that SuperCruise is available^ before

pressing].

. Only remove your hands fromthe steering wheel if thesteering wheel light bar,^,

and\ are green. SuperCruise may not begin steeringimmediately, even whenSuper Cruise is availableand] has been pressed.

To engage:

1. PressJ to turn on ACC. Make

sure the white\ indicatordisplays in the instrumentcluster. See Adaptive CruiseControl 0 227.

2. Center the vehicle in the lane.

3. When Super Cruise is available,the white^ will display in theinstrument cluster.

4. Press] to engage both SuperCruise and ACC.

ACC will set the speed at thecurrent vehicle speed. If ACC hasa previously set speed, it mayresume at that speed.

5. When engaged, the steeringwheel light bar,^, and\will display green.

When Super Cruise is engaged, whentraffic and other conditions and lawspermit, and when it is safe to do so,your hands can be taken off thesteering wheel.

Always pay attention to the road andthe operation of the vehicle. Alwaysmonitor and be attentive ofsurrounding traffic.

Super Cruise steering can beoverridden with manual steering atany time. When Super Cruise isengaged, always be prepared to takeimmediate action — includingsteering, accelerating, and brakingquickly, if necessary.



Steering Manually and ChangingLanes

The vehicle can always be manuallysteered, even with Super Cruiseengaged; for example, when changinglanes.

When the steering wheel is movedmanually, the steering wheel light barpulses blue and^ on the instrumentcluster turns blue to indicate SuperCruise is not steering the vehicle.

When ready to allow Super Cruise toresume steering again, position thevehicle in the center of the lane, holdthe steering wheel until the steeringwheel light bar turns green, and thenrelease the steering wheel when it issafe to do so.

Super Cruise does not respond tovehicles in other lanes near yourvehicle.

{ Warning

To help prevent crashes beforemaking a lane change:

. Always check mirrors.

. Glance over your shoulder.

. Use the turn signals.

Take Over Alert

{ Warning

Super Cruise will not maintain thevehicle’s speed while the steeringwheel light bar is flashing red.If the steering wheel light barflashes red, immediately resumemanual steering to prevent seriousinjury or death. If you do notresume manual steering, the vehiclewill begin to slow in the same laneand eventually come to a completestop on the freeway.

Any time the steering wheel light barflashes red, resume manual steeringimmediately. The instrument clusterlight^, will also turn red and amessage will display in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). In addition,beeps will sound, or the Safety AlertSeat will vibrate. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157. After you beginsteering manually, then Super Cruisewill disengage.

The red flashing steering wheel lightbar could occur under any of thefollowing conditions:

. Lane markings are poor,or visibility is limited.

. The Driver Attention System(DAS) does not detect that thedriver's head and eyes are directedtoward the freeway.

. ACC is canceled.

. The vehicle is on a tight curve,or the lanes are too wide, or thevehicle goes into a curve too fast.

. The freeway ends.


DRIVING AND OPERATING 241. A Super Cruise system fault

occurs.

Attention to the Road

{ Warning

Super Cruise is a driver assistancesystem and cannot accuratelydetect or predict all situations.Super Cruise is not a crashavoidance system. To preventserious injury or death, you mustsupervise the driving task andmonitor the freeway conditions.You may need to respond to trafficevents by steering, braking,or accelerating. See DefensiveDriving 0 190. Super Cruise alsocannot determine whether you areawake, asleep, impaired, or properlyfocused on safe driving. The vehiclecould crash into other vehicles,drive out of the lane, or drive offthe road. Complete attention isalways required while driving, evenwhile using Super Cruise. Beprepared to take over steering orapply the brakes at any time.

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,be alert and pay special attentionwhen passing freeway exits andentrances with Super Cruise, and beready to take control of the vehiclewhen necessary. Changes in lanemarkings around freeway exits andentrances can momentarily causeSuper Cruise to not detect thecorrect lane. If this occurs, SuperCruise may attempt steering inputsto bring the vehicle back into thecorrect lane and, in rarecircumstances, could over-correctand cause the vehicle tomomentarily cross into a lane nextto your vehicle unless you manuallysteer to maintain your laneposition.

The Driver Attention System (DAS) onthe steering column continuallymonitors driver head and eye positionto estimate driver attention to theroad. The camera does not record orshare pictures, audio, or video.

Sunglasses, hats, or other types ofclothing that change the shape of thehead may interfere with cameraperformance. To improve cameraperformance, raise or lower thesteering wheel, or change the seatposition.



Pay close attention to the road ahead to avoid these three increasing alerts:

First Alert

. If the steering wheel light bar flashes green, the system has detected that your head and eyesmay not be directed toward the freeway.

. The flashing will stop when the system detects that your head and eyes appear to be directedtoward the freeway.

Second Alert

. If the steering wheel light bar flashes green for too long, Super Cruise will alert the driver totake control of steering immediately by flashing the light bar red. Also, either beeps will soundor the Safety Alert Seat will vibrate. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

. Take over steering, then Super Cruise will disengage.

. To re-engage Super Cruise, press]. See "Using Super Cruise" previously in this section.

Third Alert

. If the steering wheel light bar flashes red for too long, a voice command will tell you to takecontrol of the vehicle.

. Take control of the steering immediately; ACC and Super Cruise will disengage.

. A DIC message will indicate that Super Cruise is locked out. Super Cruise cannot be re-engageduntil the next ignition cycle.

. Continued failure to take over steering will cause the vehicle to brake to a stop and OnStar willbe called. The brake lamps and hazard warning flashers will come on.

. Take control of the vehicle and continue driving.



Stationary or Very Slow-MovingObjects

{ Warning

Super Cruise is not a crashavoidance system and will not steeror brake to avoid a crash. SuperCruise does not steer to prevent acrash with stopped or slow-movingvehicles. You must supervise thedriving task and may need to steerand brake to prevent a crash,especially in stop-and-go traffic orwhen a vehicle suddenly entersyour lane. Always pay attentionwhen using Super Cruise. Failure todo so could result in a crashinvolving serious injury or death.

Curves in the Road

{ Warning

The vehicle could drift out of yourlane of travel. To prevent crashes,always be ready to manually steer.

Super Cruise may not detect yourlane on curves in the freeway. SuperCruise may not detect the markingsthat show your lane. You may nothave time to react to a vehicle inthe lane next to your vehicle whileon curves in the freeway.

Super Cruise may operate differentlyin sharp curves. It may drift out ofyour lane of travel if the curve is toosharp.

When entering a curve, Super Cruisemay not detect the lane markings andmay not adjust the steering enough tostay in your lane of travel. When thishappens, you will need to steer thevehicle.

Super Cruise may detect other lanemarkings that are not in your laneand may or may not steerappropriately to maintain your lane.



Super Cruise may occasionally providean alert and/or steering that isconsidered unnecessary. It couldrespond to lane markings in differentlanes, signs, guardrails, and otherstationary objects when entering orexiting a curve. This is normaloperation. The vehicle does not needservice.

Other Vehicles Entering Your Lane

Super Cruise may not detect a vehiclethat enters your lane, or may notbrake fast enough to avoid a crash.You must manually brake and steerthe vehicle.

Towing a Trailer

Do not use Super Cruise when towinga trailer. For towing capability, seeTrailer Towing 0 282.

Super Cruise on Hills

Do not use Super Cruise while drivingon steep hills.

Super Cruise Indicator LightSummary

The steering wheel light bar andinstrument cluster light provide thefollowing important information aboutSuper Cruise operation:



Steering Wheel Light Bar Instrument Cluster Light Super Cruise Description

Off OffSuper Cruise is off. There is no automatic steering. Operatethe vehicle manually.

Off White Super Cruise is available and can be engaged.

Solid Green Solid GreenSuper Cruise is steering. Pay attention to the road andvehicle operation.

Pulsing Blue Solid BlueSuper Cruise is not steering. Operate the vehicle manually.See “Steering Manually and Changing Lanes” previously inthis section.

Flashing Green Solid GreenSuper Cruise has detected you are not paying sufficientlyclose attention to the road. Pay attention to the road. See“Attention to the Road” previously in this section.

Flashing Red Solid RedTake over steering immediately. Super Cruise will disengage.See “Take Over Alert” previously in this section.

Disengaging Super Cruise

There are two ways to disengageSuper Cruise:

. Press] while your hands are onthe steering wheel. The SuperCruise steering will disengage.

. Press the brake pedal while yourhands are on the steering wheel.Both Super Cruise steering andAdaptive Cruise Control willdisengage.

Super Cruise Messages

If^ does not appear,] can bepressed to display a DIC message as towhy the system is unavailable.

Immediately after a disengagement,pressing the] within 10 secondswill display a DIC message with thereason for Super Cruisedisengagement.



Super Cruise Message Summary

Unavailable Turn on Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control must be on before Super Cruise canbe enabled.

. Set speed is not required before enabling Super Cruise.

. Adaptive Cruise Control is not required to be engagedbefore enabling Super Cruise.

Unavailable Set Forward Collision Setting to Alert and Brake Super Cruise is disabled unless Alert and Brake is selected.

1. Select the Settings menu, then Vehicle, then Collision/Detection Systems, and then Forward Collision System.

2. Set Forward Collision to Alert and Brake.

Unavailable No Road Information . There is no map information available for that portionof a controlled access road. Recent road reconstructionmay turn off Super Cruise for that section of road untilnew map information is available.

. The vehicle is not on the correct type of road.A controlled access freeway is required for Super Cruise.

. There are lanes entering or exiting on both the left andright side of the freeway.

. The vehicle is approaching a freeway interchange. Themessage will appear for 10 seconds or less.



Super Cruise Message Summary (cont'd)

Unavailable Sensors Can’t Find Lane Lines . Rain or snow is inhibiting the system’s ability to seelane lines.

. Direct sunlight is on the front camera at dawn or dusk.

. There are missing or poor lane line markings onthe road.

. There is sun glare on the road surface.

. There is heavy rain, puddles, or road spray.

Unavailable Sensor Can’t See Face Clearly . Sun is shining into the Driver Attention System (DAS)camera.

. Dawn or dusk sun glare is on the driver’s face.

. Cups, food, hands, or other objects are obscuring theDAS view of the driver’s face.

. The steering column is pointed too high or low for theDAS to see the driver. Adjust the steering column or theseat if the message occurs frequently.

Unavailable Looking Away From Road for Too Long The DAS system detects that the driver is not looking atthe road.

Unavailable Center Vehicle In Lane The Super Cruise system has determined that the vehicle isnot centered in the lane lines. Once the vehicle has beencentered in the lane lines, the white ^ will display in theinstrument cluster indicating that Super Cruise is available.



Super Cruise Message Summary (cont'd)

Unavailable Driving Too Fast The vehicle is traveling faster than 137 km/h (85 mph).The maximum Super Cruise speed in curves will vary basedon how sharp the curve is. The vehicle will automaticallydecrease speed if needed.

Unavailable Driving in Exit Lane The Super Cruise system has detected that the vehicle is inan exit lane.

Unavailable GPS Signal Lost . There is poor reception in isolated areas.

. Reception is being blocked by buildings or other largestructures.

Unavailable You Have Taken Vehicle Control . The brake pedal is being pressed.

. The Adaptive Cruise Control has been canceled orturned off.

Unavailable Sensor Blocked Clear snow, ice, dirt, or other contaminants from the frontand rear areas of the vehicle.

Unavailable Sharp Curve Some curves are too sharp to be navigated by the SuperCruise system. Super Cruise will be available after the curveis traveled.

Super Cruise Unavailable Super Cruise is unavailable for reasons not described inother messages.

Super Cruise Locked Out See Owner’s Manual The driver did not take control of the vehicle whenprompted by the Super Cruise system. The Super Cruisesystem will be disabled until the ignition is turned off andback on.



Map Updates

Super Cruise map information mustbe periodically updated at least onceevery seven months to determinewhether Super Cruise is available oncertain roads. Turn on the vehicle’sbuilt-in Wi-Fi hotspot to receiveautomatic updates via OnStar, or seeyour dealer. See the followingregion-based websites for Super Cruisemap open source compliancedocumentation, including the licenseinformation:

Disabling the vehicle's Wi-Fi orLocation Services will disableautomatic map updates. Super Cruisewill stop functioning after sevenmonths or less, depending on the timeof the last map update.

North America:http://www.oss.gm.com/GMNA/7E2/supercruise

China: http://www.oss.gm.com/china/7E2/supercruise

Data Download

Super Cruise uses the Wi-Fi hotspot inthe vehicle to download map updatesand GPS enhancement data to thevehicle. If a mobile device with itsown Wi-Fi hotspot is brought into thevehicle and its Service Set Identifier(SSID) and password are the same asthe OnStar Wi-Fi hotspot, then thevehicle may connect to the mobiledevice’s Wi-Fi hotspot to downloadthe data. See Connections 0 420.

To prevent usage of a mobile devicedata plan, do one of the following:

. Do not use the same SSID andpassword for the OnStar Wi-Fihotspot and a mobile device.

. Disable the personal mobile deviceWi-Fi hotspot when inside thevehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with OnStarand has an active service plan,additional data may be collectedthrough the OnStar system. Thisincludes information about: thevehicle’s operation; a crash involvingthe vehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features; and, in certain situations,

the location and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Location Services

This setting enables or disablessharing of vehicle location outside thevehicle for certain purposes. Even ifthe Location Services setting isdisabled, vehicle location informationwill continue to be shared foremergency services and Super Cruise,if equipped.

System Care

The camera on the steering columnhas a lens cover that may becomedirty over time and affect cameraperformance. Clean the lens coverwith a soft cloth sprayed with glasscleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dryit. Never use abrasive cloths/cleanersor corrosive chemicals of any kind onthe lens cover.

Super Cruise uses the front radar,front camera, and 360 degree camerasfor its operation. Clean surfaces arerequired for Super Cruise operation.



See Adaptive Cruise Control 0 227,“Surround Vision Camera” underAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking 0 251, and Lane Keep Assist(LKA) 0 270 for care information.

Caution

The Super Cruise system is a highlysophisticated system and shouldonly be serviced by technicianswith the proper training, tools, andsafety instructions, which yourdealer has. Without proper trainingand tools the vehicle may becomedamaged.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashes orreduce crash damage while driving,backing, and parking. Read this entiresection before using these systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. These systemsdo not replace the need for payingattention and driving safely. Youmay not hear or feel alerts orwarnings provided by thesesystems. Failure to use proper carewhen driving may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. SeeDefensive Driving 0 190.

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

. Work if the detection sensoris covered up, such as with asticker, magnet, or metalplate.

. Work if the area surroundingthe detection sensor isdamaged or not properlyrepaired.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.



Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance features alertthe driver of obstacles by beeping. Tochange the volume of the warningchime, see “Comfort and Convenience”under Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat,the driver seat cushion may provide avibrating pulse alert instead ofbeeping. To change this, see“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Cleaning

Depending on vehicle options, keepthese areas of the vehicle clean toensure the best driver assistancefeature performance. DriverInformation Center (DIC) messagesmay display when the systems areunavailable or blocked.

. Front and rear bumpers and thearea below the bumpers

. Front grille and headlamps

. Front camera lens in the frontgrille or near the front emblem

. Front side and rear side panels

. Outside of the windshield in frontof the rearview mirror

. Side camera lens on the bottom ofthe outside mirrors

. Rear side corner bumpers

. Rear Vision Camera above thelicense plate

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingIf equipped, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC), Rear Park Assist (RPA), FrontPark Assist (FPA), Surround Vision,Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) andBacking Warning System, Rear CrossTraffic Alert (RCTA), and AutomaticParking Assist (APA) may help thedriver park or avoid objects. Alwayscheck around the vehicle whenparking or backing.



Rear Vision Camera (RVC)

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the infotainment display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press anybutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or, while in D(Drive), reach a vehicle speed ofapproximately 12 km/h (8 mph).

1. View Displayed by theCamera

1. View Displayed by theCamera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display toshow that RPA has detected an object.This triangle changes from amber tored and increases in size the closerthe object.

Surround Vision

If equipped, Surround Vision shows animage of the area surrounding thevehicle, along with the front or rearcamera views on the infotainment

display. The front camera is in thegrille or near the front emblem, theside cameras are on the bottom of theoutside mirrors, and the rear camerais above the license plate.

The Surround Vision system can beaccessed by selecting CAMERA in theinfotainment display or when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). Toreturn to the previous screen sooner,press any button on the infotainmentsystem, shift into P (Park), or reach avehicle speed of approximately12 km/h (8 mph).

{ Warning

The Surround Vision cameras haveblind spots and will not display allobjects near the corners of thevehicle. Folding outside mirrors thatare out of position may not displaysurround view correctly. Alwayscheck around the vehicle whenparking or backing.



1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

1. Views Displayed by theSurround Vision Cameras

2. Area Not Shown

{ Warning

The camera(s) do not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,crossing traffic, animals, or anyother object outside of the cameras’field of view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Showndistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not drive orpark the vehicle using only thesecamera(s). Always check behind andaround the vehicle before driving.Failure to use proper care mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage.

Camera Views

Touch the camera view buttons alongthe bottom of the infotainmentdisplay.

Front/Rear Standard View : Displaysan image of the area in front orbehind the vehicle. Touch Front/RearStandard View on the infotainmentdisplay when a camera view is active.Touching the button multiple timeswill toggle between front and rearcamera views.

If equipped, the front view cameraalso displays when the Park Assistsystem detects an object within30 cm (12 in).



Front/Rear Junction View : Displaysa front or rear cross traffic view thatshows objects directly to the left andright of the front or back of thevehicle. Touch Junction View on theinfotainment display when a cameraview is active. Touching the buttonmultiple times will toggle betweenfront and rear camera views.

Front/Rear Overhead View : Displaysa front or rear overhead view of thevehicle. Touching the button willtoggle between the two views.

Front/Rear Bowl View : Displays aview of the vehicle from either thefront or the back of the vehicle. TouchBowl View on the infotainmentdisplay when a camera view is active.Touching the button multiple timeswill toggle between forward andrearward views. Rear Pedestrian Alert,Park Assist, and RCTA are notavailable when Bowl view is active.

Side Forward/Rearward View :Displays a view that shows objectsnext to the front or rear sides of thevehicle. Touch Side Forward/RearwardView on the infotainment displaywhen a camera view is active.

Touching the button multiple timeswill toggle between forward andrearward views. Rear Pedestrian Alert,Park Assist, and RCTA are notavailable when Side Forward/Rearwardview is active.

Guidance Lines : Displays availableguidelines.

Top Down View : Displays an imageof the area surrounding the vehicle,along with the rear camera view in theinfotainment display. The rear cameraview will be replaced by the frontcamera view after shifting fromR (Reverse) to a forward gear or whenthe vehicle is moving forward slowerthan 12 km/h (8 mph). This view canalso be accessed by touching the TopDown View button when the CAMERAview is active.

Park Assist

With RPA, and if equipped with FPA,as the vehicle moves at speeds of lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers may detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind and 1.2 m (4 ft) infront of the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the ground and

below bumper level. These detectiondistances may be shorter duringwarmer or humid weather. Blockedsensors will not detect objects andcan also cause false detections. Keepthe sensors clean of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush; and clean sensors aftera car wash in freezing temperatures.

{ Warning

The Park Assist system does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available at speedsgreater than 8 km/h (5 mph). Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with Park Assist,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforemoving forward or backing.



The instrument cluster may have aPark Assist display with bars thatshow “distance to object” and objectlocation information for the ParkAssist system. As the object getscloser, more bars light up and the barschange color from yellow to amberto red.

When an object is first detected in therear, one beep will be heard from therear, or both sides of the Safety AlertSeat will pulse two times. When anobject is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in thevehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in thevehicle front), five beeps will soundfrom the front or rear depending onobject location, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse five times.Beeps for FPA are higher pitched thanfor RPA.

Backing Warning and ReverseAutomatic Braking

Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) have the Backing WarningSystem and Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system. The BackingWarning part of this system can warnof rear objects when backing up atspeeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph).

The Backing Warning System willbeep once from the rear when anobject is first detected, or pulse twiceon both sides of the Safety Alert Seat.When the system detects a potentialcrash, beeps will be heard from therear, or five pulses will be felt on bothsides of the Safety Alert Seat. Theremay also be a brief, sharp applicationof the brakes.

{ Warning

The Backing Warning System onlyoperates at speeds greater than8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detectchildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or objects below the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

bumper or that are too close or toofar from the vehicle. In somesituations, such as at higherbacking speeds, there may not beenough time for the short, sharpapplication of the vehicle brakesystem to occur. To prevent injury,death, or vehicle damage, even withthe Backing Warning System,always check the area around thevehicle and check all mirrors beforebacking.

When the vehicle is in R (Reverse),if the system detects the vehicle isbacking too fast to avoid a crash witha detected object behind your vehiclein your path, it may automaticallybrake hard to a stop to help avoid orreduce the harm caused by a backingcrash.



{ Warning

RAB may not avoid many types ofbacking crashes. Do not wait for theautomatic braking to apply. Thissystem is not designed to replacedriver braking and only works inR (Reverse) when an object isdetected directly behind the vehicle.It may not brake or stop in time toavoid a crash. It will not brake forobjects when the vehicle is movingat very low speeds. It does notdetect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objects belowthe bumper or that are too close ortoo far from the vehicle. To preventinjury, death, or vehicle damage,even with RAB, always check thearea around the vehicle before andwhile backing.

If the brake pedal is not pressed soonafter the stop, the Electric ParkingBrake (EPB) may be set. When it issafe, press the accelerator pedal firmlyat any time to override RAB.

{ Warning

There may be instances whereunexpected or undesired automaticbraking occurs. If this happens,either press the brake pedal orfirmly press the accelerator pedal torelease the brakes from the RABsystem. Before releasing the brakes,check the RVC and check the areaaround the vehicle to make sure itis safe to proceed.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If equipped, RCTA displays a redwarning triangle with a left or rightpointing arrow to warn of trafficcoming from the left or right. Thissystem detects objects coming fromup to 20 m (65 ft) from the left orright side of the vehicle. When anobject is detected, either three beepssound from the left or right or threeSafety Alert Seat pulses occur on theleft or right side, depending on thedirection of the detected vehicle.

Use caution while backing up whentowing a trailer, as the RCTAdetection zones that extend out fromthe back of the vehicle do not movefurther back when a trailer is towed.

See Radio Frequency Statement 0 407.

Turning the Features On or Off

TouchX on the center stack to turnon or off the Front and Rear ParkAssist, Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB), Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA), and the Backing WarningSystem at the same time. Theindicator light next to the buttoncomes on when the features are onand turns off when the features havebeen disabled.

Turn off Park Assist, RCTA, and RABwhen towing a trailer.

To turn the RPA symbols or guidancelines (on some models) on or off, see“Rear Camera Park Assist Symbols”under Vehicle Personalization 0 157.

RCTA can also be turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. See“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.



Automatic Parking Assist (APA)with Braking

If equipped, APA searches for andsteers the vehicle into parallel andperpendicular parking spots. Whenusing APA, you must still shift gears,while the system applies the brakesand accelerator. A display and audiblebeeps help to guide parkingmaneuvers.

Do not use APA when towing a trailer.

{ Warning

APA may not detect objects in theparking space, objects that are softor narrow, objects high off theground such as flatbed trucks,objects below ground level such aslarge potholes, or moving objects(e.g. pedestrians). Always verify thatthe parking space is appropriate forparking a vehicle. APA does notrespond to changes in the parkingspace, such as movement of anadjacent vehicle, or a person orobject entering the parking space.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

APA does not detect or avoid trafficthat is behind or alongside of thevehicle. Always be prepared to stopthe vehicle during the parkingmaneuver.

TouchO on the center stack toenable the system to search for aparking space that is large enough andwithin 1.5 m (5 ft) of the vehicle. Thevehicle speed must be below30 km/h (18 mph). The system cannot:

. Detect whether it is a legal parkingspace.

. Park exactly lined up with thevehicle next to it if the spot isapproached at an angle or if theparking space is angled.

. Park exactly centered in a spotthat is marked too large.

. Always detect short curbs.

When enabled, APA searches forparallel parking spaces to the right ofthe vehicle. To search for a parking

space to the left, turn on the left turnsignal or, if available, change the sideselection in the infotainment display.To switch the parking mode betweenparallel and perpendicular, touch andholdO during the search process or,if available, change the parking modein the infotainment display.

After completely passing a largeenough space, an audible beep occurs.A red stop symbol and a shift toreverse message are displayed.

If the vehicle is in R (Reverse), butdoes not steer into the expectedspace, this may be because the systemis maneuvering the vehicle into apreviously detected space. The APAsystem does not need service.



APA will instruct the vehicle to stoponce a large enough space is found.Follow the displayed instructions.Shift to R (Reverse) to engageautomatic steering. The steering wheelwill vibrate briefly as a reminder toremove hands from the steeringwheel. APA uses idle speed andbraking to park. If idle speed is notsufficient, gently press the accelerator.Check surroundings and be preparedto stop to avoid vehicles, pedestrians,or objects not detected by the system.In case the driver brakes, APA will notdisengage. Manual steering by thedriver automatically disengages APA.Vehicle speed is limited to amaximum of 5 km/h (3 mph) duringthe parking maneuver.

A progress arrow displays the statusof the parking maneuver. Dependingon the space size, additionalmaneuvers may be required, and therewill be additional instructions. Whenchanging gears, allow the automaticsteering to complete before continuingthe parking maneuver. APA will beepand display a PARKING COMPLETEmessage. Apply the brakes and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

APA may automatically disengage if:

. The steering wheel is used by thedriver.

. The maximum allowed speed isexceeded.

. The parking brake is applied or thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

. There is a failure with the APAsystem.

. Electronic stability control orantilock brakes are activated.

. A high priority vehicle message isdisplayed in the DIC.

. The driver opens the door with anunbuckled seat belt.

The brake holds the vehicle until theparking brake or brake is applied,or the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

To cancel APA, touchO again.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork Properly

The APA system may require a shortperiod of driving along curves tocalibrate.

Rear Pedestrian AlertUnder certain conditions, this featurecan provide alerts for a pedestrianwithin the system’s range directlybehind the vehicle. This feature onlyworks in R (Reverse) below 12 km/h(8 mph), and detects pedestrians up to8 m (26 ft) away during daytimedriving. During nighttime driving,feature performance is very limited.



Rear Pedestrian Alert Indicator

When a pedestrian is detected withinthe system’s range directly behind thevehicle, this symbol flashes amber onthe infotainment display, along withtwo beeps from the rear, or ifequipped, two pulses from both sidesof the driver seat. When a pedestrianis detected close to the vehicle, thesymbol flashes red on theinfotainment display, along with sevenbeeps from the rear, or if equipped,seven pulses from both sides of thedriver seat.

{ Warning

Rear Pedestrian Alert does notautomatically brake the vehicle.It also does not provide an alertunless it detects a pedestrian, and itmay not detect all pedestrians if:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. The pedestrian is not directlybehind the vehicle, fullyvisible to the Rear VisionCamera (RVC), or standingupright.

. The pedestrian is part of agroup.

. The pedestrian is a child.

. Visibility is poor, includingnighttime conditions, fog,rain, or snow.

. The RVC is blocked by dirt,snow, or ice.

. The RVC, taillamps,or back-up lamps are notcleaned or in proper workingcondition.

. The vehicle is not inR (Reverse).

To help avoid death or injury,always check for pedestriansaround the vehicle before backingup. Be ready to take action and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

apply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 190. Keep the RVC,taillamps, and back-up lamps cleanand in good repair.

Rear Pedestrian Alert can be set to Offor Alert. See “Rear PedestrianDetection” in “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 157. If equipped, alerts can be set tobeeps or seat pulses. See “Alert Type”in “Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving the vehiclein a forward gear, Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning(LDW), Lane Keep Assist (LKA), SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA), Lane ChangeAlert (LCA), the Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) system, the FrontPedestrian Braking (FPB) system and/or the Night Vision system can help toavoid a crash or reduce crash damage.



Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system may helpto avoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. When approachinga vehicle ahead too quickly, FCAprovides a red flashing alert on thewindshield and rapidly beeps or pulsesthe driver seat. FCA also lights anamber visual alert if following anothervehicle much too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within a distanceof approximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 8 km/h(5 mph). If the vehicle has AdaptiveCruise Control (ACC), it can detectvehicles to distances of approximately110 m (360 ft) and operates at allspeeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control0 227.

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system and doesnot apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. It also may notprovide any warning at all. FCAdoes not warn of pedestrians,animals, signs, guardrails, bridges,construction barrels, or otherobjects. Be ready to take action andapply the brakes. See DefensiveDriving 0 190.

FCA can be disabled with either theFCA steering wheel control or,if equipped, through vehiclepersonalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detected, thevehicle ahead indicator will displaygreen. Vehicles may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills, due to poor visibility; or if avehicle ahead is partially blocked bypedestrians or other objects. FCA willnot detect another vehicle ahead untilit is completely in the driving lane.

{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warning tohelp avoid a crash, unless it detectsa vehicle. FCA may not detect avehicle ahead if the FCA sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a vehicle on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.



Collision Alert

With Head-Up Display

Without Head-Up Display

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,the red FCA display will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times. Whenthis Collision Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can causea brief, mild deceleration. Continue to

apply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Collision Alert occurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you are followinga vehicle ahead much too closely.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press[ to set theFCA timing to Far, Medium, or Near,or on some vehicles, Off. The firstbutton press shows the current settingon the DIC. Additional button presseswill change this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehicle speed.The faster the vehicle speed, thefarther away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttimings may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC),changing the FCA timing settingautomatically changes the followinggap setting (Far, Medium, or Near).

Following Distance Indicator

The following distance to a movingvehicle ahead in your path is indicatedin following time in seconds on the



Driver Information Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) 0 149.The minimum following time is0.5 seconds away. If there is no vehicledetected ahead, or the vehicle ahead isout of sensor range, dashes will bedisplayed.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessary alertsfor turning vehicles, vehicles in otherlanes, objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts are normaloperation and the vehicle does notneed service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, this may correct theissue:

. Clean the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror.

. Clean the entire front of thevehicle.

. Clean the headlamps.

Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB)If the vehicle has Forward CollisionAlert (FCA), it also has FAB, whichincludes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA).When the system detects a vehicleahead in your path that is traveling inthe same direction that you may beabout to crash into, it can provide aboost to braking or automaticallybrake the vehicle. This can help avoidor lessen the severity of crashes whendriving in a forward gear. Dependingon the situation, the vehicle mayautomatically brake moderately orhard. This forward automatic brakingcan only occur if a vehicle is detected.This is shown by the FCA vehicleahead indicator being lit. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System 0 260.

The system works when driving in aforward gear between 8 km/h (5 mph)and 80 km/h (50 mph), or on vehicleswith Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC),above 4 km/h (2 mph). It can detectvehicles up to approximately 60 m(197 ft).

{ Warning

FAB is an emergency crashpreparation feature and is notdesigned to avoid crashes. Do notrely on FAB to brake the vehicle.FAB will not brake outside of itsoperating speed range and onlyresponds to detected vehicles.

FAB may not:

. Detect a vehicle ahead onwinding or hilly roads.

. Detect all vehicles, especiallyvehicles with a trailer,tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.

. Detect a vehicle whenweather limits visibility, suchas in fog, rain, or snow.

. Detect a vehicle ahead if it ispartially blocked bypedestrians or other objects.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take action andapply the brakes and/or steer thevehicle to avoid crashes.



FAB may slow the vehicle to acomplete stop to try to avoid apotential crash. If this happens, FABmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB or firmly press theaccelerator pedal.

{ Warning

FAB may automatically brake thevehicle suddenly in situationswhere it is unexpected andundesired. It could respond to aturning vehicle ahead, guardrails,signs, and other non-movingobjects. To override FAB, firmlypress the accelerator pedal, if it issafe to do so.

Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

IBA may activate when the brakepedal is applied quickly by providing aboost to braking based on the speedof approach and distance to a vehicleahead.

Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedalmovement during this time is normaland the brake pedal should continueto be applied as needed. IBA willautomatically disengage only whenthe brake pedal is released.

{ Warning

IBA may increase vehicle braking insituations when it may not benecessary. You could block the flowof traffic. If this occurs, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and thenapply the brakes as needed.

FAB and IBA can be disabled throughvehicle personalization. See “Collision/Detection Systems” under VehiclePersonalization 0 157.

{ Warning

Using FAB or IBA while towing atrailer could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and crash.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Turn the system to Alert, or if thevehicle has ACC to Off, whentowing a trailer.

A system unavailable message maydisplay if:

. The front of the vehicle orwindshield is not clean.

. Heavy rain or snow is interferingwith object detection.

. There is a problem with theStabiliTrak/Electronic StabilityControl (ESC) system.

The FAB system does not needservice.

Front Pedestrian Braking(FPB) SystemIf equipped, the FPB system may helpavoid or reduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes with nearbypedestrians when driving in aforward gear. FPB displays an amberindicator, ~, when a nearby



pedestrian is detected directly ahead.When approaching a detectedpedestrian too quickly, FPB provides ared flashing alert on the windshieldand rapidly beeps or pulses the driverseat. FPB can provide a boost tobraking or automatically brake thevehicle. This system includesIntelligent Brake Assist (IBA), and theForward Automatic Braking (FAB)System may also respond topedestrians. See Forward AutomaticBraking (FAB) 0 262.

The FPB system can detect and alertto pedestrians in a forward gear atspeeds between 8 km/h (5 mph) and80 km/h (50 mph). During daytimedriving, the system detectspedestrians up to a distance ofapproximately 40 m (131 ft). Duringnighttime driving, system performanceis very limited. If the vehicle isequipped with the Night Visionsystem, during nighttime driving, thevehicle can detect and alert topedestrians whenever in aforward gear.

{ Warning

FPB does not provide an alert orautomatically brake the vehicle,unless it detects a pedestrian. FPBmay not detect pedestrians,including children:

. When the pedestrian is notdirectly ahead, fully visible,or standing upright, or whenpart of a group.

. Due to poor visibility,including nighttimeconditions, fog, rain, or snow.

. If the FPB sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice.

. If the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned orin proper condition.

Be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving 0 190. Keepthe windshield, headlamps, and FPBsensor clean and in good repair.

FPB can be set to Off, Alert, or Alert &Brake through vehicle personalization.See “Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

Detecting the Pedestrian Ahead

FPB alerts and automatic braking willnot occur unless the FPB systemdetects a pedestrian. When a nearbypedestrian is detected directly in frontof the vehicle, the pedestrian aheadindicator will display amber.

Front Pedestrian Alert

With Head-Up Display



Without Head-Up Display

When the vehicle approaches apedestrian ahead too rapidly, the redFPB alert display will flash on thewindshield. Eight rapid high-pitchedbeeps will sound from the front,or both sides of the Safety Alert Seatwill pulse five times. When thisPedestrian Alert occurs, the brakesystem may prepare for driver brakingto occur more rapidly which can causea brief, mild deceleration. Continue toapply the brake pedal as needed.Cruise control may be disengagedwhen the Front Pedestrian Alertoccurs.

Automatic Braking

If FPB detects it is about to crash intoa pedestrian directly ahead, and thebrakes have not been applied, FPBmay automatically brake moderatelyor brake hard. This can help to avoid

some very low speed pedestriancrashes or reduce pedestrian injury.FPB can automatically brake todetected pedestrians between 8 km/h(5 mph) and 80 km/h (50 mph).Automatic braking levels may bereduced under certain conditions,such as higher speeds. If alsoequipped with the Night Visionsystem, pedestrians detected by theNight Vision system will not causeautomatic braking to occur.

If this happens, Automatic Brakingmay engage the Electric Parking Brake(EPB) to hold the vehicle at a stop.Release the EPB. A firm press of theaccelerator pedal will also releaseAutomatic Braking and the EPB.

{ Warning

FPB may alert or automaticallybrake the vehicle suddenly insituations where it is unexpectedand undesired. It could falsely alertor brake for objects similar in shapeor size to pedestrians, including

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

shadows. This is normal operationand the vehicle does not needservice. To override AutomaticBraking, firmly press the acceleratorpedal, if it is safe to do so.

Automatic Braking can be disabledthrough vehicle personalization. See“Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

{ Warning

Using the Front Pedestrian Brakingsystem while towing a trailer couldcause you to lose control of thevehicle and crash. Turn the systemto Alert or Off when towing atrailer.



Cleaning the System

If FPB does not seem to operateproperly, cleaning the outside of thewindshield in front of the rearviewmirror may correct the issue.

Night Vision SystemIf equipped, this system can help thedriver see and alert the driver topedestrians or large animals ahead ofthe vehicle beyond the area lit by theheadlamps. A thermal heat image ofthe view ahead is displayed when it isdark enough outside. If a pedestrianor large animal is detected more than25 m (82 ft) away, an amberpedestrian or animal icon displays anda box appears around the pedestrianor animal. When the system detectsthat the vehicle is approaching apedestrian ahead much too quickly,the box changes to red.

With the Front Pedestrian Brakingsystem turned on, Night Visionprovides a red Head-Up Display (HUD)alert when the system detects that thevehicle is approaching a pedestrianahead much too quickly. In addition,an alert beeps or the Safety Alert Seatpulses, if equipped. See FrontPedestrian Braking (FPB) System 0 263.

{ Warning

The system does not detect allobjects or the vehicle distance fromobjects. The system may notprovide a warning with enough timeto help avoid a crash.

1. Low-Beam Headlamps2. High-Beam Headlamps3. Night Vision System

By selecting a view on the instrumentcluster, the Night Vision image can bedisplayed. See Instrument Cluster(Uplevel) 0 130 or Instrument Cluster(Base Level) 0 127. The Night Visionsystem can operate only if:

. The ignition is on.

. The vehicle is in P (Park) or aforward gear.

. It is dark enough outside.

. The headlamps are on.



Adjust the instrument panelbrightness to make the image nobrighter than necessary. Turn theimage off by selecting another viewon the instrument cluster.

Warm objects, such as pedestrians,animals, and other moving vehicles,should appear whiter on the NightVision display. Cold objects, such asthe sky, signs, and parked vehicles,should appear darker. Night Visiononly shows objects that are warmer orcolder than the surroundings. It doesnot detect brake lamps, turn signals,emergency flashers, traffic lights,or sign information.

Use this system as an aid byoccasionally glancing at the image. Donot stare at the image or use theimage under well-lit conditions.

{ Warning

Do not stare at the image whiledriving as this might causeimportant objects ahead not to beseen. You could crash, and you orothers could be injured.

When a pedestrian or large animal isdetected, an amber box displaysaround the pedestrian or animal onthe Night Vision display and anamber pedestrian icon, ~, oranimal icon,!, displays on theinstrument cluster. This pedestrianicon is also shown on the Head-UpDisplay (HUD). When the systemdetects the vehicle is approaching apedestrian much too quickly, theamber pedestrian icon and box turnsred, and a red flashing icon, ~,displays on the HUD with rapidbeeping or pulsing of the Safety AlertSeat, if equipped.

System pedestrian icons, beeps, and(if equipped) Safety Alert Seat pulsescan be set to Off through vehiclepersonalization by turning off theFront Pedestrian Braking system. See“Front Pedestrian Detection” in“Collision/Detection Systems” underVehicle Personalization 0 157.

{ Warning

The Night Vision system does notautomatically brake the vehicle.It does not provide alerts unless itdetects a pedestrian or largeanimal. The system may not detectpedestrians, including children,or animals:

. If they are less than 25 m(82 ft) away.

. If they are not directly aheadin the sensor coverage area,fully visible, standing upright,or part of a group.

. If the pedestrian or animal ismoving too quickly throughthe field of view, such as abicyclist.

. If the pedestrian is wearingcertain types of clothing.

. If headlamps are off, exceptwhen parked.

. If the outside temperature ishigher than 30 °C (86 °F).

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Due to poor visibility,including in heavy fog, rain,or snow.

. If the sensor is blocked bydirt, snow, rain, or ice.

Be ready to take action and applythe brakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving 0 190. Keepthe Night Vision sensor clean andin good repair.

Pedestrian detection may not beavailable in high outside temperatures.An amber icon,*, displays. Thesystem does not need service.

In rain, snow, or fog the image maynot be clear and the direction of theroad ahead may not be seen. In moresevere weather conditions, the imagemay be unclear and unusable. Thesystem does not need service.

Keep the system sensor clean byactivating the windshield washer up tofive times when it is dark enough forthe system to operate. If the Night

Vision image still looks blurry, use asoft wet cloth to gently clean thesensor camera lens and drythoroughly. The sensor is behind thefront grille to the inside of the driverside headlamp.

The camera must also be aligned towork correctly. If the camera needsadjustment, see your dealer. Do notattempt to adjust the camera yourself.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If equipped, the SBZA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding crashes that occur withmoving vehicles in the side blind zone(or spot) areas. When the vehicle is ina forward gear, the left or right sidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in that blind zone.If the turn signal is activated and avehicle is also detected on the sameside, the display will flash as an extrawarning not to change lanes. Sincethis system is part of the Lane ChangeAlert (LCA) system, read the entireLCA section before using this feature.

Lane Change Alert (LCA)If equipped, the LCA system is alane-changing aid that assists driverswith avoiding lane change crashesthat occur with moving vehicles in theside blind zone (or spot) areas or withvehicles rapidly approaching theseareas from behind. The LCA warningdisplay will light up in thecorresponding outside mirror and willflash if the turn signal is on.

{ Warning

LCA does not alert the driver tovehicles outside of the systemdetection zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. It may notprovide alerts when changing lanesunder all driving conditions. Failureto use proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Before making alane change, always check mirrors,glance over your shoulder, and usethe turn signals.



LCA Detection Zones

1. SBZA Detection Zone2. LCA Detection Zone

The LCA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m(11 ft). The height of the zone isapproximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft)and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. The SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) warning areastarts at approximately the middle ofthe vehicle and goes back 5 m (16 ft).Drivers are also warned of vehiclesrapidly approaching from up to 70 m(230 ft) behind the vehicle.

How the System Works

The LCA symbol lights up in theoutside mirrors when the systemdetects a moving vehicle in the nextlane over that is in the side blind zoneor rapidly approaching that zone frombehind. A lit LCA symbol indicates itmay be unsafe to change lanes. Beforemaking a lane change, check the LCAdisplay, check mirrors, glance overyour shoulder, and use the turnsignals.

Left Outside MirrorDisplay

Right OutsideMirror Display

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror LCA displays willbriefly come on to indicate the systemis operating. When the vehicle is in aforward gear, the left or right outsidemirror display will light up if a movingvehicle is detected in the next laneover in that blind zone or rapidlyapproaching that zone. If the turn

signal is activated in the samedirection as a detected vehicle, thisdisplay will flash as an extra warningnot to change lanes.

LCA can be disabled. When youdisable LCA, Side Blind Zone Alert isalso disabled. See “Collision/DetectionSystems” under Vehicle Personalization0 157. If LCA is disabled by the driver,the LCA mirror displays will notlight up.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The LCA system requires some drivingfor the system to calibrate tomaximum performance. Thiscalibration may occur more quickly ifthe vehicle is driving on a straighthighway road with traffic and roadsideobjects (e.g., guardrails, barriers).

LCA displays may not come on whenpassing a vehicle quickly, for astopped vehicle, or when towing atrailer. The LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing a



trailer. LCA may alert to objectsattached to the vehicle, such as atrailer, bicycle, or object extending outto either side of the vehicle. Attachedobjects may also interfere with thedetection of vehicles. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not always alert the driver tovehicles in the next lane over,especially in wet conditions or whendriving on sharp curves. The systemdoes not need to be serviced. Thesystem may light up due to guardrails,signs, trees, shrubs, and othernon-moving objects. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service.

LCA may not operate when the LCAsensors in the left or right corners ofthe rear bumper are covered withmud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or inheavy rainstorms. For cleaninginstructions, see "Washing theVehicle" under Exterior Care 0 369.If the DIC still displays the systemunavailable message after cleaning

both sides of the vehicle toward therear corners of the vehicle, see yourdealer.

If the LCA displays do not light upwhen moving vehicles are in the sideblind zone or are rapidly approachingthis zone and the system is clean, thesystem may need service. Take thevehicle to your dealer.

Radio Frequency Information


Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide a warningif the vehicle is crossing a detectedlane marking without using a turnsignal in the lane departure direction.Since this system is part of the LaneKeep Assist (LKA) system, read theentire LKA section before using thisfeature.

Lane Keep Assist (LKA)If equipped, LKA may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel if thevehicle approaches a detected lanemarking without using a turn signal inthat direction. It may also provide aLane Departure Warning (LDW)system alert as the lane marking iscrossed. The LKA system will notassist or provide an LDW alert if itdetects that you are actively steering.Override LKA by turning the steeringwheel. LKA uses a camera to detectlane markings between 60 km/h (37mph) and 180 km/h (112 mph).

{ Warning

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle.It may not keep the vehicle in thelane or give a Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) alert, even if a lanemarking is detected.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The LKA and LDW systemsmay not:

. Provide an alert or enoughsteering assist to avoid a lanedeparture or crash.

. Detect lane markings underpoor weather or visibilityconditions. This can occur ifthe windshield or headlampsare blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, if they are not inproper condition, or if the sunshines directly into thecamera.

. Detect road edges.

. Detect lanes on winding orhilly roads.

If LKA only detects lane markingson one side of the road, it will onlyassist or provide an LDW alertwhen approaching the lane on theside where it has detected a lanemarking. Even with LKA and LDW,

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

you must steer the vehicle. Alwayskeep your attention on the road andmaintain proper vehicle positionwithin the lane, or vehicle damage,injury, or death could occur. Alwayskeep the windshield, headlamps,and camera sensors clean and ingood repair. Do not use LKA in badweather conditions.

{ Warning

Using LKA while towing a trailer oron slippery roads could cause lossof control of the vehicle and acrash. Turn the system off.

How the System Works

The LKA camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LKA on and off, pressAon the center stack.

When on, the LKA indicator is green ifLKA is available to assist and provideLDW alerts. It may assist by gentlyturning the steering wheel and displayamber if the vehicle approaches adetected lane marking without using aturn signal in that direction. It mayalso provide an LDW alert by flashingamber as the lane marking is crossed.Additionally, there may be threebeeps, or the driver seat may pulsethree times, on the right or left,depending on the lane departuredirection.

Take Steering

The LKA system does notcontinuously steer the vehicle. If LKAdoes not detect active driver steering,an alert, chime, or DIC message maybe provided. Steer the vehicle todismiss.



When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The system performance may beaffected by:

. Close vehicles ahead.

. Sudden lighting changes, such aswhen driving through tunnels.

. Banked roads.

. Roads with poor lane markings,such as two-lane roads.

If the LKA system is not functioningproperly when lane markings areclearly visible, cleaning the windshieldmay help.

A camera blocked message maydisplay if the camera is blocked.Cleaning the outside of the windshieldbehind the rearview mirror maycorrect the issue. Some driverassistance systems may have reducedperformance or not work at all. AnLKA or LDW unavailable message maydisplay if the systems are temporarilyunavailable. This message could bedue to a blocked camera. The LKA

system does not need service. Cleanthe outside of the windshield behindthe rearview mirror.

LKA assistance and/or LDW alertsmay occur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, temporary orconstruction lane markings, or otherroad imperfections. This is normalsystem operation; the vehicle does notneed service. Turn LKA off if theseconditions continue.

Surround Vision RecorderIf equipped, this system records the360° camera views to an SD card. Onlyimages are recorded, no sound. An SDcard will be needed for this system.The recommended SD card is a 64GBSDHC card with FAT32 file system,Class 10 and over.

Insert an SD card into the card readerin the trunk. Disable recording fromthe playback screen before removingthe SD card from the reader. Do notremove the card while recording isenabled. This could corrupt the videofile and/or the SD card.

Other files should not be stored onthe same SD card as the surroundvision recorder files. Storing other fileson the same card may increaserecording start up and playback timeor result in a loss of data.



To Activate : Touch Video Recorderon the Home Page. Touch the red dot.The red dot will illuminate when thevideo recorder is on. It will remain onuntil it has been turned off. Recordingwill start after exiting the playbackscreen. Advise other drivers andoccupants of the vehicle that videoimages are being recorded.

To Deactivate : Touch Video Recorderon the Home Page. Touch the red dot.

Select from the following when thevehicle is in P (Park).

Exit : Touch X to exit this applicationand return to the previous app.

Video List : Touch to display a list ofthe most recent and saved videos.Touch the delete button next to thename to delete a saved video.

Rewind : Touch to rewind the video.Touch again up to three times toincrease speed. Touch a fourth time tostop rewinding.

Play/Pause : Touch to play or pause arecorded video.

Fast Forward : Touch to fast forwardthe video. Touch again up to threetimes to increase speed. Touch afourth time to stop fast forward.

Save : Touch to save a video. Thisprotects the video from being erased.Once the SD card is full, the oldestfiles will be overwritten unless theyhave been saved.

Camera Views : When opening theVideo Recorder, the previous file willshow all camera views and can beplayed. Icons in the upper right cornerof each view indicate which camera.Touch one of the views to zoom toonly that camera view. Touch again to

return to all camera views. Press X atany time to exit the videorecorder app.

The latest recorded video file can beplayed. In addition:

. The recorded video is stored infive-minute-long files.

. All files can be viewed on theplayback app or when the SD cardis read by a personalcomputer (PC).

. Once the SD card is full, the oldestfiles will be overwritten.

To Delete Data : Remove the SD cardfrom the vehicle and insert into a PCto manually delete the file.

Error messages can occur if:

. No SD card is present.

. An empty SD card is present.

. The video files are the wrongformat.

. The video files are corrupt.

. The SD card is full.

. There is a system error.



Other files should not be stored onthe same SD card as the surroundvision recorder files. Storing other fileson the same card may increaserecording start up and playback timeor result in a loss of data. An errormessage may be displayed if nosurround vision recorded video file isavailable for playback.

Fuel

Top Tier FuelGM recommends the use of TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline to keep the engineclean, reduce engine deposits, andmaintain optimal vehicle performance.Look for the TOP TIER Logo or seewww.toptiergas.com for a list of TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline marketersand applicable countries.

Recommended Fuel (2.0LL4 Turbo Engine)Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Premium unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 93 is highlyrecommended for best performanceand fuel economy. Unleaded gasolinewith an octane rated as low as 87 canbe used. Using unleaded gasolinerated below 93 octane, however, willlead to reduced acceleration and fueleconomy. If knocking occurs, use agasoline rated at 93 octane as soon aspossible, otherwise, the engine couldbe damaged. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline with a93 octane rating, the engine needsservice.



Recommended Fuel (3.0LTwin Turbo V6 and 4.2LTwin Turbo V8 Engines)Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Use premium unleaded gasolinemeeting ASTM specification D4814with a posted octane rating of 93.If unavailable, unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 91 may beused, but with reduced performanceand fuel economy. If the octane is lessthan 91, the engine could be damagedand the repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. If heavyknocking is heard when using gasolinerated at 93 octane, the engine needsservice.

Recommended Fuel (3.6LV6 Engine)Do not use any fuel labeled E85 orFlexFuel. Do not use gasoline withethanol levels greater than 15% byvolume.

Use regular unleaded gasoline meetingASTM specification D4814 with aposted octane rating of 87 or higher.Do not use gasoline with a postedoctane rating of less than 87, as thismay cause engine knock and willlower fuel economy.

Prohibited Fuels

Caution

Do not use fuels with any of thefollowing conditions; doing so maydamage the vehicle and void itswarranty:

. For vehicles that are notFlexFuel, fuel labeled greaterthan 15% ethanol by volume,such as mid-level ethanolblends (16–50% ethanol), E85,or FlexFuel.

. Fuel with any amount ofmethanol, methylal, ferrocene,and aniline. These fuels can

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

corrode metal fuel systemparts or damage plastic andrubber parts.

. Fuel containing metals suchas methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl(MMT), which can damagethe emissions control systemand spark plugs.

. Fuel with a posted octanerating of less than therecommended fuel. Using thisfuel will lower fuel economyand performance, and maydecrease the life of theemissions catalyst.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesThe U.S., Canada, and Mexico postfuel octane ratings in anti-knock index(AKI). For fuel not to use in a foreigncountry, see Prohibited Fuels 0 275.



Fuel AdditivesTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is highlyrecommended for use with yourvehicle. If your country does not haveTOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, addACDelco Fuel System Treatment Plus−Gasoline to the vehicle’s gasoline fueltank at every oil change or 15,000 km(9,000 mi), whichever occurs first. TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline and ACDelcoFuel System Treatment Plus−Gasolinewill help keep your vehicle’s enginefuel deposit free and performingoptimally.

Filling the Tank

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Follow these guidelines:

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on thefuel pump island.

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Avoid using electronic deviceswhile refueling.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Fuel can spray out if therefueling nozzle is insertedtoo quickly. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearlyfull, and is more likely in hotweather. Insert the refuelingnozzle slowly and wait for anyhiss noise to stop prior tobeginning to flow fuel.

To open the fuel door, push andrelease the rearward center edge ofthe door. If equipped, the fuel door is



locked when the vehicle doors arelocked. Press K on the RKEtransmitter to unlock.

The vehicle has a capless refuelingsystem and does not have a fuel cap.The filling nozzle must be fullyinserted and latched prior to startingfuel flow.

{ Warning

Overfilling the fuel tank by morethan three clicks of a standard fillnozzle may cause:

. Vehicle performance issues,including engine stalling anddamage to the fuel system.

. Fuel spills.

. Potential fuel fires.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Wait a fewseconds after you have finishedpumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces assoon as possible. See Exterior Care0 369.

{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove the nozzle.Shut off the flow of fuel by shuttingoff the pump or by notifying thestation attendant. Leave the areaimmediately.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. Make sure thecap is fully installed.

Filling the Tank with a PortableGas Can

If the vehicle runs out of fuel andmust be filled from a portable gas can:

1. Locate the capless funneladapter from under the carpet inthe trunk.

2. Insert and latch the funnel intothe capless fuel system.

{ Warning

Attempting to refuel without usingthe funnel adapter may cause fuelspillage and damage the caplessfuel system. This could cause a fireand you or others could be badlyburned and the vehicle could bedamaged.

3. Remove and clean the funneladapter and return to the storagelocation.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuel vapor.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

You can be badly burned and thevehicle damaged if this occurs. Tohelp avoid injury to you and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

. Bring the fill nozzle incontact with the inside of thefill opening before operatingthe nozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using electronicdevices.

Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle. Contactyour dealer or trailering dealer forassistance with preparing the vehicleto tow a trailer. Read the entiresection before towing a trailer.

To tow a disabled vehicle, see Towingthe Vehicle 0 367. To tow the vehiclebehind another vehicle such as amotor home, see Recreational VehicleTowing 0 368.

When towing with the 2.0L L4 engine,only use unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 89 or higher. Usinggasoline with a lower octane ratingwhile towing may damage the engineand may not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. See Recommended Fuel (2.0LL4 Turbo Engine) 0 274 orRecommended Fuel (3.0L Twin TurboV6 and 4.2L Twin Turbo V8 Engines)0 275 or Recommended Fuel (3.6LV6 Engine) 0 275.

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips

{ Warning

You can lose control when towing atrailer if the correct equipment isnot used or the vehicle is not drivenproperly. For example, if the traileris too heavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load, the vehiclemay not stop as expected. You andothers could be seriously injured.The vehicle may also be damaged,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed. Askyour dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Trailering is different than just drivingthe vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, acceleration,braking, durability, and fuel economy.



Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be usedproperly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

When towing a trailer:

. Become familiar with and followall state and local laws that applyto trailer towing. Theserequirements vary from state tostate.

. State laws may require the use ofextended side view mirrors. Even ifnot required, you should installextended side view mirrors if yourvisibility is limited or restrictedwhile towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) of vehicleuse to prevent damage to theengine, axle, or other parts.

. It is recommended to perform thefirst oil change before heavytowing.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi) oftrailer towing, do not drive over80 km/h (50 mph) and do notmake starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).If the transmission downshifts toooften, a lower gear may beselected using M (Manual Mode).See Manual Mode 0 214.

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should be turnedoff when towing a trailer:

. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

. Super Cruise Control

. Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

. Park Assist

. Automatic Parking Assist (APA)

. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

If equipped, the following driverassistance features should be turnedto alert or off when towing a trailer:

. Forward Automatic BrakingSystem (FAB)

. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA)

. Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)

If equipped with Lane Change Alert(LCA), the LCA detection zones thatextend back from the side of thevehicle do not move further backwhen a trailer is towed. Use cautionwhile changing lanes when towing atrailer.

If equipped with Rear Cross TrafficAlert (RCTA), use caution whilebacking up when towing a trailer, asthe RCTA detection zones that extendout from the back of the vehicle donot move further back when a traileris towed.



{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or deathfrom carbon monoxide (CO), whentowing a trailer:

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information about carbonmonoxide, see Engine Exhaust0 208.

Towing a trailer requires experience.The combination of the vehicle andtrailer is longer and not as responsiveas the vehicle itself. Get used to thehandling and braking of thecombination by driving on a level roadsurface before driving on public roads.

The trailer structure, the tires, and thebrakes must be all be rated to carrythe intended cargo. Inadequate trailerequipment can cause the combinationto operate in an unexpected or unsafemanner. Before driving, inspect alltrailer hitch parts and attachments,safety chains, electrical connectors,lamps, tires, and mirrors. See TowingEquipment 0 283. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start the combinationmoving and then manually apply thetrailer brake controller to check thetrailer brakes work. During the trip,occasionally check that the cargo andtrailer are secure and that the lampsand any trailer brakes are working.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the stability controlsystem might be heard. The systemreacts to vehicle movement caused bythe trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving without a trailer. This can helpto avoid heavy braking and suddenturns.

Passing

More passing distance is needed whentowing a trailer. The combination ofthe vehicle and trailer will notaccelerate as quickly and is muchlonger than the vehicle alone. It isnecessary to go much farther beyondthe passed vehicle before returning tothe lane. Pass on level roadways.Avoid passing on hills if possible.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. To move the trailer tothe left, move that hand to the left. Tomove the trailer to the right, movethat hand to the right. Always back upslowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Caution

Turn more slowly and make widerarcs when towing a trailer toprevent damage to your vehicle.Making very sharp turns couldcause the trailer to contact thevehicle.

Make wider turns than normal whentowing, so trailer will not go over softshoulders, over curbs, or strike roadsigns, trees, or other objects. Alwayssignal turns well in advance. Do notsteer or brake suddenly.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore starting down a long or steepdownhill grade. If the transmission isnot shifted down, the brakes mayoverheat and result in reduced brakingefficiency.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

When towing at higher altitudes,engine coolant will boil at a lowertemperature than at lower altitudes.If the engine is turned off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steepuphill grades, the vehicle could showsigns similar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engine off.If the overheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating 0 310.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

To prevent serious injury or death,always park your vehicle and traileron a level surface when possible.

When parking your vehicle and yourtrailer on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but do notshift into P (Park) yet. Turn thewheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

. Start the engine.

. Shift into a gear.

. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.



Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service more oftenwhen used to tow trailers. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379. It isespecially important to check theautomatic transmission fluid, engineoil, axle lubricant, belts, coolingsystem, and brake system before andduring each trip.

Check periodically that all nuts andbolts on the trailer hitch are tight.

Engine Cooling when TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheating0 310.

Trailer Towing

Caution

Towing a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. To tow a trailercorrectly, follow the directions inthis section and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

Trailer Weight

{ Warning

Never exceed the towing capacityfor your vehicle.

Safe trailering requires monitoring theweight, speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, dimensions ofthe front of the trailer, and howfrequently the vehicle is used to tow atrailer.

{ Warning

You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed if the trailer is tooheavy or the trailer brakes areinadequate for the load. The vehiclemay be damaged, and the repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Only tow a trailer if all the steps inthis section have been followed. Askyour dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer.

Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR)

For information about the vehicle'smaximum load capacity, see VehicleLoad Limits 0 195. When calculatingthe GVWR with a trailer attached, thetrailer tongue weight must beincluded as part of the weight thevehicle is carrying.



Maximum Trailer Weight

The trailer should never weigh morethan 454 kg (1,000 lb). The maximumallowable weight of the trailer may belower based on the weight of thepassengers and cargo in your trailer.

Trailer Load Balance

The correct trailer load balance mustbe maintained to ensure trailerstability. Incorrect load balance is aleading cause of trailer sway.

The trailer tongue weight (1) shouldbe 10–15% of the loaded trailerweight (2). Some specific trailer types,such as boat trailers, fall outside of

this range. Always refer to the trailerowner’s manual for the recommendedtrailer tongue weight for each trailer.Never exceed the maximum loads foryour vehicle, hitch, and trailer.

After loading the trailer, separatelyweigh the trailer and then the trailertongue to see if the weights areappropriate for your vehicle. If thetrailer weight is too high, it may bepossible to transfer some of the cargointo your vehicle. If the trailer tongueweight is too high or too low, it maybe possible to rearrange some of thecargo inside of the trailer.

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for yourvehicle. Use the shortest hitchextension available to position thehitch ball closer to your vehicle. Thiswill help reduce the effect of thetrailer tongue weight on the trailerhitch and the rear axle.

If a cargo carrier is used in the trailerhitch receiver, choose a carrier thatpositions the load as close to thevehicle as possible. Make sure the

total weight, including the carrier, isno more than half of the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle or 227 kg (500 lb), whicheveris less.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or assistance.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Always use the correct hitchequipment for your vehicle.Crosswinds, large trucks going by, andrough roads can affect the trailer andthe hitch.

Never attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches. Only useframe-mounted hitches that do notattach to the bumper.

Always seal any holes in your vehicleif the trailer hitch removed. If notsealed, dirt, water, and carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaust mayenter your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust0 208.



Tires. Do not tow a trailer while using a

compact spare tire on the vehicle.

. Tires must be properly inflated tosupport loads while towing atrailer. See Tires 0 335 forinstructions on proper tireinflation.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer, and attach thechains to the holes on the trailer hitchplatform. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer.

Cross the safety chains under thetongue of the trailer to help preventthe tongue from contacting the road ifit becomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

State or local regulations may requiretrailers to have their own brakingsystem if the loaded weight of thetrailer exceeds certain minimums thatcan vary from state to state. Read andfollow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so they are installed, adjusted,and maintained properly. Neverattempt to tap into your vehicle'shydraulic brake system. If you do,both the vehicle anti-lock brakes andthe trailer brakes may not function,which could result in a crash.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

When properly connected, the trailerturn signals will illuminate to indicatethe vehicle is turning, changing lanes,or stopping. When towing a trailer,the arrows on the instrument clusterwill illuminate even if the trailer is notproperly connected or the bulbs areburned out.

Trailer Tires

Special Trailer (ST) tires differ fromvehicle tires. Trailer tires are designedwith stiff sidewalls to help preventsway and to support heavy loads.These features can make it difficult todetermine if the trailer tire pressuresare low only based on a visualinspection.

Always check all trailer tire pressuresbefore each trip when the tires arecool. Low trailer tire pressure is aleading cause of trailer tire blow-outs.

Trailer tires deteriorate over time. Thetrailer tire sidewall will show the weekand year the tire was manufactured.Many trailer tire manufacturersrecommend replacing tires more thansix years old.



Overloading is another leading causeof trailer tire blow-outs. Never loadyour trailer with more weight than thetires are designed to support. The loadrating is located on the trailer tiresidewall.

Always know the maximum speedrating for the trailer tires beforedriving. This may be significantlylower than the vehicle tire speedrating. The speed rating may be onthe trailer tire sidewall. If the speedrating is not shown, the default trailertire speed rating is 105 km/h(65 mph).

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Warning

The Data Link Connector (DLC) isused for vehicle service andEmission Inspection/Maintenancetesting. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp (Check Engine Light) 0 139.A device connected to the DLC —such as an aftermarket fleet ordriver-behavior tracking device —may interfere with vehicle systems.This could affect vehicle operationand cause a crash. Such devicesmay also access information storedin the vehicle’s systems.

Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work and wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, see Servicingthe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 93 andAdding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 93.


286 VEHICLE CARE

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

California Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 300Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Engine Air Filter Life System . . . . 302Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . 302Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Brake Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 312Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Battery - North America . . . . . . . . . 314All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . 317Windshield Replacement . . . . . . . . 317Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Electrical SystemElectrical System Overload . . . . . . 320Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . 320Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 328Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . 345Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . 353Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Jump StartingJump Starting - NorthAmerica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364


VEHICLE CARE 287

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . 368

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visit yourdealer. You will receive genuine GMparts and GM-trained and supportedservice people.

Genuine GM parts have one of thesemarks:

California Proposition65 Warning

{ Warning

Most motor vehicles, including thisone, as well as many of its serviceparts and fluids, contain and/oremit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductiveharm. Engine exhaust, many partsand systems, many fluids, andsome component wear by-productscontain and/or emit thesechemicals. For more information goto www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See Battery - North America 0 314 andJump Starting - North America 0 364and the back cover.


288 VEHICLE CARE

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbag initiators,seat belt pretensioners, and lithiumbatteries contained in Remote KeylessEntry transmitters, may containperchlorate materials. Specialhandling may be necessary. Foradditional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non-dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Damage to suspension componentscaused by modifying vehicle heightoutside of factory settings will not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non-GM certifiedparts, including control module orsoftware modifications, is not coveredunder the terms of the vehiclewarranty and may affect remainingwarranty coverage for affected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicle usinggenuine GM Accessories installed by adealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 93.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not have theproper knowledge, service manual,tools, or parts. Always followowner’s manual procedures andconsult the service manual for yourvehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how toservice the vehicle than this manualcan. To order the proper servicemanual, see Publication OrderingInformation 0 406.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle 0 93.


VEHICLE CARE 289

If equipped with remote vehicle start,open the hood before performing anyservice work to prevent remotestarting the vehicle accidentally. SeeRemote Vehicle Start 0 36.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records 0 391.

Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damage tovehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

Hood

{ Warning

Gas struts and other metalcomponents under the hood can gethot after running the engine. Donot touch these components asthey can burn unprotected skin andcould cause serious injury.

Clear any snow from the hood beforeopening.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handle. It ison the lower left side of theinstrument panel between thedoor and the steering wheel.

2. Release the handle, then pull thehandle again to fully openthe hood.

3. Go to the front of the vehicle andlift the hood open.

Caution

Be sure the hood is completelyclosed before driving. Damage mayoccur if it is not.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall filler caps are properlyinstalled.

2. Lower the hood approximately46 cm (18 in) from the closedposition.

3. Then push the front center of thehood with a swift, firm motion.

4. Check to make sure the hood isclosed. If not, release the hoodfrom inside and repeat Steps 1–3.


290 VEHICLE CARE

Engine Compartment Overview

2.0L L4 Engine


VEHICLE CARE 291

1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap (Under Cover). SeeCooling System 0 305.

2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System 0 305.

3. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 302.

4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil0 297.

5. Engine Oil Dipstick. See EngineOil 0 297.

6. Remote Positive (+) BatteryTerminal. See Jump Starting -North America 0 364.

7. Engine Compartment Fuse Block0 321.

8. Brake Fluid Reservoir (UnderCover). See Brake Fluid 0 313.

9. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid0 311.

10. Remote Negative (-) BatteryTerminal. See Jump Starting -North America 0 364.


292 VEHICLE CARE

3.0L V6 Engine


VEHICLE CARE 293

1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See Cooling System0 305.







8. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See BrakeFluid 0 313.




294 VEHICLE CARE

3.6L V6 Engine


VEHICLE CARE 295












296 VEHICLE CARE

4.2L V8 Engine


VEHICLE CARE 297

1. Passenger Side EngineCompartment Fuse Block. SeeEngine Compartment Fuse Block0 321.


3. Passenger Side Engine AirCleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter 0 302.




7. Driver Side Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 0 302.




11. Driver Side Engine CompartmentFuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block 0 321.


Engine OilTo ensure proper engine performanceand long life, careful attention mustbe paid to engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps will helpprotect your investment:

. Use engine oil approved to theproper specification and of theproper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section.

. Check the engine oil level regularlyand maintain the proper oil level.See “Checking Engine Oil” and“When to Add Engine Oil” later inthis section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System 0 300.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

Check the engine oil level regularly,every 650 km (400 mi), especially priorto a long trip. The engine oil dipstickhandle is a loop. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 290 for thelocation.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handle maybe hot; it could burn you. Use atowel or glove to touch the dipstickhandle.

If a low oil Driver Information Center(DIC) message displays, check the oillevel.


298 VEHICLE CARE

Follow these guidelines:

. To get an accurate reading, parkthe vehicle on level ground. Checkthe engine oil level after theengine has been off for at leasttwo hours. Checking the engine oillevel on steep grades or too soonafter engine shutoff can result inincorrect readings. Accuracyimproves when checking a coldengine prior to starting. Removethe dipstick and check the level.

. If unable to wait two hours, theengine must be off for at least15 minutes if the engine is warm,or at least 30 minutes if theengine is not warm. Pull out thedipstick, wipe it with a clean papertowel or cloth, then push it backin all the way. Remove it again,keeping the tip down, and checkthe level.

When to Add Engine Oil

2.0L L4 Turbo (LSY) and 4.2L V8 TwinTurbo (LTA) Engines

3.0L V6 Twin Turbo (LGW) and 3.6LV6 (LGX) Engines

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick and theengine has been off for at least15 minutes, add 1 L (1 qt) of therecommended oil and then recheckthe level. See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil” later in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications 0 393.

Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oil levelsabove or below the acceptableoperating range shown on thedipstick are harmful to the engine.If the oil level is above theoperating range (i.e., the engine hasso much oil that the oil level getsabove the cross-hatched area thatshows the proper operating range),the engine could be damaged. Drainthe excess oil or limit driving of thevehicle, and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess oil.

See Engine Compartment Overview0 290 for the location of the engine oilfill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


VEHICLE CARE 299

Selecting the Right Engine Oil(Except 4.2L V8 Twin Turbo(LTA) Engine)

Selecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 388.

Specification

Use full synthetic engine oils thatmeet the dexos1 specification. Engineoils that have been approved by GMas meeting the dexos1 specificationare marked with the dexos1 approvedlogo. See www.gmdexos.com.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Except the 2.0L L4 Turbo (LSY)engine, use SAE 5W-30 viscosity gradeengine oil. Cold TemperatureOperation: In an area of extreme cold,where the temperature falls below−29 °C (−20 °F), an SAE 0W-30 oil maybe used. An oil of this viscosity gradewill provide easier cold starting for theengine at extremely low temperatures.

For the 2.0L L4 Turbo (LSY) engine,use SAE 0W-20 viscosity gradeengine oil.

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil(4.2L V8 Twin Turbo (LTA)Engine)

Selecting the right engine oil dependson both the proper oil specificationand viscosity grade. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants 0 388.

Specification

Use engine oils that meet the dexos2specification.

Engine oils that have been approvedby GM as meeting the dexos2specification are marked with thedexos2 approved logo.

Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Viscosity Grade

Use SAE 0W-40 viscosity gradeengine oil.


300 VEHICLE CARE

When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, it isrecommended to select an oil of thecorrect specification. See“Specification” earlier in this section.

Engine Oil Additives/Engine OilFlushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils meeting the dexosspecification are all that is needed forgood performance and engineprotection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could cause enginedamage not covered by the vehiclewarranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change your ownoil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trashor pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is based on acombination of factors which includeengine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven. Basedon driving conditions, the mileage atwhich an oil change is indicated canvary considerably. For the oil lifesystem to work properly, the systemmust be reset every time the oil ischanged.

When the system has calculated thatoil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes on. Change theoil as soon as possible within the next1 000 km (600 mi). It is possible that,if driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might indicate thatan oil change is not necessary for upto a year. The engine oil and filtermust be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has trained servicepeople who will perform this work andreset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly over thecourse of an oil drain interval andkeep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally,the oil must be changed at 5 000 km(3,000 mi) since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil life systemwhenever the oil is changed.


VEHICLE CARE 301

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystem

Reset the system whenever the engineoil is changed so that the system cancalculate the next engine oil change.To reset the system:


2. Press and hold SEL to clear theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage and reset the oil lifeat 100%.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil ischanged. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oilchange.

The oil life system can also be reset asfollows:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message is not on, thesystem is reset.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageis off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs,take the vehicle to your dealer andhave it repaired as soon as possible.

The vehicle is not equipped with atransmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at the dealer. Contact your dealerfor additional information.

Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage thevehicle, and the damage may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use the correct automatictransmission fluid. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 388.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule 0 379, and be sure to use thefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.


302 VEHICLE CARE

Engine Air Filter LifeSystemIf equipped, this feature provides anindication of when to change theengine air filter. It is based on drivingconditions, which can cause when tochange to vary greatly. It is possiblean air filter change may not beindicated for up to four years.

When to Change Engine AirFilter

Replace the engine air filter when theREPLACE NOW message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).This should be done as soon aspossible within the next 1 000 km(600 mi) or at the next oil change,depending on the DIC message. Thesystem must be reset after the engineair filter is changed. See your dealerfor service and to reset the system.

When a REPLACE AT NEXT OILCHANGE message displays, thisindicates that the engine air filterchange is necessary at the next engineoil change.

How to Reset Engine Air FilterLife System

Reset the system whenever the engineair filter is replaced so that the systemcan calculate the next engine air filterchange.

To reset:

1. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

2. Select Engine Air Filter Life onthe DIC menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 149.

3. Press p to move to the Reset/Disable display area. Select Resetthen press SEL. Then press Yesto confirm the reset.

4. 100% Air Filter Life will bedisplayed when the Engine AirFilter Life System is successfullyreset.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is in theengine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 290.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter. For intervals on changing and

inspecting the engine air filter, seeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

. If equipped with Engine Air FilterLife System, see Engine Air FilterLife System 0 302.

. If driving in very dusty areas,follow the engine air filterinspecting and changing intervals,see Maintenance Schedule 0 379.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Do not start the engine or have theengine running with the engine aircleaner/filter housing open. Beforeremoving the engine air cleaner/filter,make sure that the engine air cleaner/filter housing and nearby componentsare free of dirt and debris. Remove theengine air cleaner/filter. Lightly tapand shake the engine air cleaner/filter(away from the vehicle), to releaseloose dust and dirt. Inspect the engineair cleaner/filter for damage, andreplace if damaged. Do not clean the


VEHICLE CARE 303

engine air cleaner/filter orcomponents with water orcompressed air.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Remove the six screws on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filter cover.

2. Lift and slide the engine aircleaner/filter cover open.

3. Lift and remove the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall theengine air cleaner/filter cover.

3.0L V6 Engine

1. Remove the 10 screws on top ofthe engine air cleaner/filter coverto gain access to both aircleaners/filters.

2. Lift the engine air cleaner/filtercover open on the hinge.

3. Lift and remove one or bothengine air cleaner(s)/filter(s).

4. Inspect or replace one or bothengine air cleaner(s)/filter(s).

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 to reinstall theengine air cleaner/filter cover.

3.6L V6 Engine

1. Screws (6)2. Bolts (3)3. Diagonal Brace

1. Remove the three bolts (2) andthe diagonal brace (3).

2. Remove the six screws (1) on topof the engine air cleaner/filtercover.





304 VEHICLE CARE

6. Reverse Steps 1–4 to reinstall theengine air cleaner/filter coverand diagonal brace.

4.2L V8 Engine (Driver Side)

1. Diagonal Brace2. Bolts (3)3. Screws (4)


2. Remove the four screws (3) ontop of the engine air cleaner/filter cover.





4.2L V8 Engine (Passenger Side)

1. Screws (4)2. Bolts (3)3. Diagonal Brace


2. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the engine air cleaner/filter cover.





{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. Use cautionwhen working on the engine. Donot start the engine or drive thevehicle with the air cleaner/filteroff, as flames may be present if theengine backfires.


VEHICLE CARE 305

Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Always havethe air cleaner/filter in place whendriving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows the engineto maintain the correct workingtemperature.

2.0L L4 Engine

1. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap (UnderCover)

2. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

3.0L V6 Engine

1. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap


3.6L V6 Engine




306 VEHICLE CARE

4.2L V8 Engine



{ Warning

An underhood electric fan can startup even when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surgetank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. The vehicleshould be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at thecold fill mark on the middle of thetank. If it is not, the vehicle may havea leak at the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump,or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{ Warning

Do not touch heater or radiatorhoses, or other engine parts. Theycan be very hot and can burn you.Do not run the engine if there is aleak; all coolant could leak out.That could cause an engine fire andcan burn you. Fix any leak beforedriving the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with theengine on, check to see if the electriccooling fan is running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, the vehicle needsservice. Turn off the engine.

Engine Coolant

The engine cooling system in thevehicle is filled with a DEX-COOLengine coolant mixture. This coolantneeds to be checked and replaced atappropriate intervals. See MaintenanceSchedule 0 379.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating, seeEngine Overheating 0 310.

What to Use

{ Warning

Plain water, or other liquids such asalcohol, can boil before the propercoolant mixture will. With plainwater or the wrong mixture, theengine could get too hot but therewould not be an overheat warning.The engine could catch fire and youor others could be burned.


VEHICLE CARE 307

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture, nothingelse needs to be added. This mixture:

. Gives freezing protection down to−37 °C (−34 °F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129 °C (265 °F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Caution

Do not use anything other than amix of DEX-COOL coolant thatmeets GM Standard GMW3420 andclean, drinkable water. Anythingelse can cause damage to theengine cooling system and thevehicle, which would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding used coolantdisposal. This will help protect theenvironment and your health.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a level surfacewhen checking the coolant level.

3.0L V6 Engine Coolant Surge Tank

2.0L L4, 3.6L V6, and 4.2L V8 EngineCoolant Surge Tank

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on the passengerside of the vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview 0 290.

Check to see if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. See Engine Overheating0 310.


308 VEHICLE CARE

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

If no problem is found, check to see ifcoolant is visible in the coolant surgetank. If coolant is visible but not at orabove the indicated mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant. Be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before this is done. See EngineOverheating 0 310.

{ Warning

Spilling coolant on hot engine partscan burn you. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn ifthe engine parts are hot enough.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

Caution

Failure to follow the specificcoolant fill procedure could causethe engine to overheat and couldcause system damage. If coolant isnot visible in the surge tank,contact your dealer.

All Engines Except 2.0L L4

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still leftto be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to theindicated level mark.


VEHICLE CARE 309

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start the engineand let it run until you can feelthe upper radiator hose gettinghot. Watch out for the enginecooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surgetank until the level reaches theindicated level mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1–6.

If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the systemcools down again, see yourdealer.

Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and enginedamage may occur. Be sure the capis properly and tightly secured.

2.0L L4 Engine Only - AutomaticCoolant Service Fill Instructions

If equipped, this feature assists infilling and removing air from thecooling system after service ofcomponents or when coolant is addedafter being too low.

To activate the fill and air removalprocess:

1. With a cold system, add coolantto the COLD FILL mark on thesurge tank.

2. Replace the cap on thesurge tank.

3. Connect the vehicle to a batterycharger.

4. Turn the ignition to ServiceMode. See Ignition Positions0 200.

5. Turn off the air conditioning.

6. Set the parking brake.

7. At the same time, press theaccelerator and the brake fortwo seconds, then release.

At the end of the cycle, check thecoolant level in the surge tank andadd coolant if it is low. Turn off thevehicle, allow the Electronic ControlModule (ECM) to go to sleep, about2 minutes, and repeat Steps 4-7.

Listen for pump activation andmovement of the control valves whilewatching the level of the coolant inthe surge tank. If the tank empties,turn the ignition off, carefully removethe surge tank cap, refill to the COLDFILL mark, and repeat Steps 4-7. Thefill and air removal process will runfor approximately 10 minutes.


310 VEHICLE CARE

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicators towarn of the engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge and an enginecoolant temperature warning light onthe instrument cluster. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge 0 135 andEngine Coolant Temperature WarningLight 0 146. The vehicle may alsodisplay a message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears, getservice help right away. See RoadsideService 0 401.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface. Then check to see ifthe engine cooling fan is running.If the engine is overheating, the fanshould be running. If it is not, do notcontinue to run the engine. Have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Do not run the engine if there is aleak in the engine cooling system.This can cause a loss of all coolantand can damage the system andvehicle. Have any leaks fixedright away.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system are underpressure. Turning the pressure cap,even a little, can cause them tocome out at high speed and youcould be burned. Never turn the capwhen the cooling system, includingthe pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and pressurecap to cool.

If No Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can geta little too hot when the vehicle:

. Climbs a long hill on a hot day

. Stops after high-speed driving

. Idles for long periods in traffic

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral), and let theengine idle.

If the engine coolant temperaturegauge is no longer in the overheatedarea or the engine coolanttemperature warning light no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.


VEHICLE CARE 311

Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safedistance from the vehicle in front.If the warning does not come back on,continue to drive normally and havethe cooling system checked for properfill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicle right away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes while parked.If the warning is still displayed, turnoff the engine until it cools down.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall belowfreezing, use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washer symbolon it. Add washer fluid until the tankis full. See Engine CompartmentOverview 0 290 for reservoir location.

Caution

. Do not use washer fluid thatcontains any type of waterrepellent coating. This cancause the wiper blades tochatter or skip.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

BrakesDisc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or can be


312 VEHICLE CARE

heard all the time when the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes will notwork well. That could lead to acrash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,

inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 393.

Brake pads should always be replacedas complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or ifthere is a rapid increase in pedaltravel. This could be a sign that brakeservice may be required.

Replacing Brake System Parts

Always replace brake system partswith new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes may notwork properly. The brakingperformance expected can change inmany other ways if the wrongreplacement brake parts are installedor if parts are improperly installed.

Electric Brake Boost

If equipped, this vehicle may have anelectrically boosted power brakingsystem. The system works with the

Antilock Brake System (ABS) and theBrake Assist system to aid the driverduring various braking situations. SeeAntilock Brake System (ABS) 0 215.

Brake Pad Life System

When to Change Brake Pads

If equipped, this system estimates theremaining life of the front and rearbrake pads. Brake pad life is displayedin the Driver Information Center(DIC), along with a percentage foreach axle. The system must be resetevery time the brake pads arechanged.

When the system has determined thatthe brake pads need to be replaced, amessage will display, which mayinclude mileage remaining.

Brake pads should always be replacedas complete axle sets.

How to Reset the Brake Pad LifeSystem

The system will automatically detectwhen significantly worn brake padsare replaced. When the ignition isturned on after new pads and wear


VEHICLE CARE 313

sensors are installed, a message willdisplay. Follow the prompts to resetthe system.

The brake pad life system can also bemanually reset:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on theDIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 149.

2. Press and hold SEL. Select frontor rear pads as appropriate.

3. Select YES on the confirmationmessage. Repeat for pads on theother axle if they were alsoreplaced.

How to Disable the Brake PadLife System

The brake pad life system can beturned off. This may be necessary ifaftermarket brake pads without wearsensors are installed. When thesystem is turned off, the front andrear brake pad life percentages willnot display. However, the built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake pads

are worn can still determine when thepads should be replaced. See Brakes0 311.

To turn off the brake pad life system:

1. Display Brake Pad Life on theDIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) 0 149.

2. Select DISABLE.

To turn the brake pad life system backon, follow the above steps but selectENABLE in Step 2.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoir isfilled with GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overview0 290 for the location of the reservoir.

Checking Brake Fluid

With the vehicle in P (Park) on a levelsurface, the brake fluid level should bebetween the minimum and maximummarks on the brake fluid reservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoir maygo down:

. Normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are installed, the fluidlevel goes back up.

. A fluid leak in the brake hydraulicsystem. Have the brake hydraulicsystem fixed. With a leak, thebrakes will not work well.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoircap and the area around the capbefore removing it.

Do not top off the brake fluid. Addingfluid does not correct a leak. If fluid isadded when the linings are worn,there will be too much fluid whennew brake linings are installed. Add orremove fluid, as necessary, only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.


314 VEHICLE CARE

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. You orothers could be burned, and thevehicle could be damaged. Addbrake fluid only when work is doneon the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System Warning Light(3.0L Twin Turbo and 3.6L V6 Engines)0 141 or Brake System Warning Light(2.0L L4 Turbo and 4.2L Twin TurboV8 Engines) 0 141.

Brake fluid absorbs water over timewhich degrades the effectiveness ofthe brake fluid. Replace brake fluid atthe specified intervals to preventincreased stopping distance. SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

What to Add

Use only GM approved DOT 3 brakefluid from a clean, sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

{ Warning

The wrong or contaminated brakefluid could result in damage to thebrake system. This could result inthe loss of braking leading to apossible injury. Always use theproper GM approved brake fluid.

Caution

If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be damaged. Immediatelywash off any painted surface.

Battery - North AmericaThe original equipment battery ismaintenance free. Do not remove thecap and do not add fluid.

The battery is in the trunk under thespare tire. Refer to the replacementnumber shown on the original batterylabel when a new 12-volt battery isneeded.

The vehicle has an Absorbed GlassMat (AGM) 12-volt battery.Installation of a standard 12-voltbattery will result in reduced 12-voltbattery life.

When using a 12-volt battery chargeron the 12-volt AGM battery, somechargers have an AGM battery settingon the charger. If available, use theAGM setting on the charger, to limitcharge voltage to 14.8 volts.

Stop/Start System

Vehicles equipped with a 2.0L LSY,3.0L LGW, 3.6L LGX, or 4.2L LTAengine are equipped with a Stop/Startsystem to shut off the engine to helpconserve fuel. See Stop/Start System0 202.


VEHICLE CARE 315

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. WASHHANDS AFTER HANDLING. Formore information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning0 287 and the back cover.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode. Youcan be badly hurt if you are notcareful. See Jump Starting - NorthAmerica 0 364 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove the 12-voltbattery black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove the 12-voltbattery black, negative (−) cable fromthe battery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Remember to reconnect the batterywhen ready to drive the vehicle.

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle is equipped withAll-Wheel Drive (AWD), this is anadditional system that needslubrication.

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularly checkthe transfer case fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.


316 VEHICLE CARE

How to Check Lubricant

1. Fill Plug2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, the vehicleshould be on a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of thefill plug hole on the transfer case,some lubricant will need to be added.Add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fill plughole. Use care not to overtighten thefill plug.

What to Use

To determine what kind of lubricantto use, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this inspection,the vehicle could move suddenly.If the vehicle moves, you or otherscould be injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake. Donot use the accelerator pedal,and be ready to turn off theengine immediately if it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check, thevehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured andproperty could be damaged. Makesure there is room in front of thevehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake atonce should the vehicle beginto move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake, set theparking brake.

. To check the parking brake'sholding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


VEHICLE CARE 317. To check the P (Park) mechanism's

holding ability: With the enginerunning, shift to P (Park). Thenrelease the parking brake followedby the regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts 0 389.

To replace the wiper blade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Lift up on the latch in the middleof the wiper blade where thewiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiper bladeis installed could damage the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

windshield. Any damage that occurswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperarm to touch the windshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Windshield Replacement

Head-Up Display (HUD) System

The windshield is part of the HUDsystem. If the windshield must bereplaced, get one that is designed forHUD or the HUD image may look outof focus.

Driver Assistance Systems

When a windshield replacement isneeded and the vehicle is equippedwith a front-looking camera sensor forthe Driver Assistance Systems, thewindshield must be installedaccording to GM specifications forthese systems to work properly. If it is


318 VEHICLE CARE

not, there may be unexpectedbehavior and/or messages from thesesystems.

Acoustic Windshield

The vehicle is equipped with anacoustic windshield. If the windshieldneeds to be replaced, be sure to get anacoustic windshield so you willcontinue to have the benefits anacoustic windshield can provide.

Gas Strut(s)This vehicle is equipped with gasstrut(s) to provide assistance in liftingand holding open the hood/trunk/liftgate system in full open position.

{ Warning

If the gas struts that hold open thehood, trunk, and/or liftgate fail, youor others could be seriously injured.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice immediately. Visuallyinspect the gas struts for signs ofwear, cracks, or other damage

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

periodically. Check to make sure thehood/trunk/liftgate is held openwith enough force. If struts arefailing to hold the hood/trunk/liftgate, do not operate. Have thevehicle serviced.

Caution

Do not apply tape or hang anyobjects from gas struts. Also do notpush down or pull on gas struts.This may cause damage to thevehicle.

See Maintenance Schedule 0 379.

Hood

Trunk


VEHICLE CARE 319

Liftgate

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, or any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contact yourdealer.

Caution

Do not replace incandescent bulbswith aftermarket LED replacementbulbs. This can cause damage tothe vehicle electrical system.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.


320 VEHICLE CARE

Electrical System

Electrical System OverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load is tooheavy, the circuit breaker opens andcloses, protecting the circuit until thecurrent load returns to normal or theproblem is fixed. This greatly reducesthe chance of circuit overload and firecaused by electrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can be borrowed.Choose some feature of the vehiclethat is not needed to use and replaceit as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may cause thelamps to go on and off, or in somecases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right away ifthe lamps go on and off or remain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop. Wiper function isavailable immediately after the wiperswitch is set to off, and back to on.

To protect the wiper motor fromoverheating, the wipers may slowdown when the windshield is dry for along period of time. If a period of dryoperation, or little moisture, exceeds10 minutes, the wipers may switch tointermittent operation, and remainthere. When moisture is againdetected on the windshield, wiperoperation will return to the operatorselected speed.

Although the circuit is protected fromelectrical overload, overload due toheavy snow or ice may cause wiperlinkage damage. Always clear ice andheavy snow from the windshieldbefore using the windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused by electricalproblems.


VEHICLE CARE 321

{ Danger

Fuses and circuit breakers aremarked with their ampere rating.Do not exceed thespecified amperage rating whenreplacing fuses and circuit breakers.Use of an oversized fuse or circuitbreaker can result in a vehicle fire.You and others could be seriouslyinjured or killed.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replace abad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage can betemporarily borrowed from anotherfuse location, if a fuse goes out.Replace the fuse as soon as possible.

Engine Compartment FuseBlock2.0L, 3.0L and 3.6L Engines

This fuse block is on the driver side ofthe engine compartment.

Lift the fuse block cover to access thefuses.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses and relays shown.

Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep the coverson any electrical component.


322 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

1 –

2 –

Fuses Usage

3 –

4 –

Fuses Usage

5 Transfer case control/Transmission controlmodule ignition

6 –

7 Starter motor

8 Starter pinion

9 Horn

10 –

11 –

12 –

13 High-beam headlampsleft/right

18 Right cornering LED

21 Air conditioning clutch

22 Transmission auxiliaryoil pump cooling

23 –

24 Cabin heater pump

26 Engine control moduleignition

27 Steering column lockignition


VEHICLE CARE 323

Fuses Usage

28 Rear heated seatsignition

29 Front heated seatsignition

30 –

31 Headlamp/Daytimerunning lamps/Rightheadlamp

32 –

33 –

34 –

35 Engine control moduleignition – 2

36 Engine control moduleignition – 1

37 Coolant pump/Ignitioncoils – odd

38 Ignition coils – even/Non walk 2

39 Non walk

Fuses Usage

40 Electric brake controlmodule1/Instrumentcluster/central gatewaymodule ignition

41 –

42 Fuel tank zone module/Ignition

43 Heated steering wheelmodule/Reflective lightaux display/HVAC IGN/Automatic occupantsensing display

44 Aeroshutter

45 Washer

46 Front short range radarsensors

47 Left cornering LED

54 –

55 –

56 –

57 –

58 –

Fuses Usage

59 –

60 Antilock brake systempump/Electric brakecontrol module – 1

61 Front wiper

62 Headlamp leveling

63 –

64 –

66 Transfer case controlmodule

67 –

68 –

69 –

70 –

71 Antilock brake systemvalve

72 –

73 –


324 VEHICLE CARE

Relays Usage

14 Air conditioningcontrol

15 Starter motor

16 Starter pinion

17 Run/Crank

19 –

20 High-beam headlamp

25 Cabin heater pump

48 –

49 –

50 Engine controlmodule

51 Wiper speed

52 Wiper control

53 Headlamp control

65 –

4.2L Engine

The 4.2L engine has an underhoodfuse block on each side of the enginecompartment.

Driver Side Fuse Block



Caution



VEHICLE CARE 325

Fuses Usage

F1 –

F2 –

F3 –

F4 –

F5 High-beam headlampsleft/right

F6 –

Fuses Usage

F7 Front wiper

F8 –

F9 Instrument cluster/Electric brake controlmodule 1/Centralgateway moduleignition

F10 –

Fuses Usage

F11 Transmission control/Transfer case controlmodule ignition

F12 –

F13 Front heated seatsignition

F14 Exhaust valve solenoid

F15 Rear heated seatsignition

F16 Fuel tank zone moduleignition

F17 –

F18 –

F19 –

F20 –

F21 Heated steering wheelmodule/Reflective lightaux display/HVAC IGN/Automatic occupantsensing display

F22 Electric steeringcolumn lock ignition

F23 Washer


326 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

F24 Left cornering LED

F25 –

F26 –

F27 –

F28 –

F29 Electric brake controlmodule – 1

Relays Usage

R1 –

R2 –

R3 –

R4 High-beam headlamp

R5 Wiper control

R6 Wiper speed

R7 Run/Crank

R8 –

The 8-cylinder engine has anunderhood fuse block on each side ofthe engine compartment.

Passenger Side Fuse Block



Caution



VEHICLE CARE 327

Fuses Usage


F2 –

F3 Headlamp/Daytimerunning lamps

F4 Right cornering LED

F5 –

Fuses Usage

F6 Front short rangeradar sensors

F7 Horn

F8 Air conditioningclutch

F9 –

F10 –

Fuses Usage

F11 Automatic headlampleveling

F12 Starter motor

F13 Starter pinion

F14 –

F15 –

F16 –

F17 Cabin heater pump

F18 Transmissionauxiliary oil pumpcooling

F19 Engine controlmodule ignition

F20 Non walk

F21 Ignition coils – even/Non walk – 2

F22 Engine controlmodule ignition – 1

F23 Transfer case controlmodule

F24 –

F25 Ignition coils – odd


328 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

F26 Charge aircoolant pump

F27 Engine controlmodule ignition – 2

F28 –

F29 –

Relays Usage

R1 Headlamp/Daytimerunning lamps

R2 Air conditioningcontrol

R3 Starter motor

R4 Starter pinion

R5 Cabin heater pump

R6 Engine controlmodule

R7 –

R8 –

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse block isbehind the driver side instrumentpanel storage compartment.

The storage compartment has a pressto open latch. To access the fuses,open the compartment by pressingand releasing near the top centersquare.

Apply pressure to the two retainingtabs on the sides of the compartment,until the two retaining tabs clear thesides of the instrument panel. Allowthe compartment to move downward,and out of the way.

To reinstall the compartment, reversethe steps.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses shown.


VEHICLE CARE 329

Fuses Usage

F1 Auxiliary power outletfront console

F2 Visor

F3 Front blower

F4 Body control module 8

F5 Power steering column

Fuses Usage

F6 Electric steeringcolumn lock

F7 Glove box door

F8 Front heated seatmodule

F9 Sensing and diagnosticmodule


Fuses Usage


F12 Data link connector

F13 –

F14 Electronic shifter

F15 Front camera

F16 Display

F17 Heating, ventilation,and air conditioningcontrol

F18 OnStar

F19 –

F20 –

F21 Traction powerinverter 2

F22 –

F23 Central gatewaymodule

F24 Center stack module/Infotainment

F25 Video processingmodule night vision

F26 Steering wheel controls


330 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

F27 USB charge port

F28 Wireless charger

F29 –

F30 Speaker

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block isbehind a cover on the passenger side.

The vehicle may not be equipped withall of the fuses, relays, and featuresshown.

Vehicles without Super Cruise

Fuses Usage

F01 –

F02 Auxiliary trunk poweroutlet

F03 Left window

F04 –

F05 Canister vent

F06 Right rear memory seat

Fuses Usage


F08 Passenger/Rear seatadjustment switch

F09 Passive entry/Passivestart battery

F10 Rear subwoofer


VEHICLE CARE 331

Fuses Usage

F11 Left front memory seatmodule

F12 –

F13 –

F14 Rear seat memory/Heated

F15 Left front subwoofer

F16 Right frontmemory seat

F17 Rear heated seat

F18 Regulated voltagecontrol battery

F19 Driver passenger doorwindow/Mirror/Driverseat adjustment/Fueldoor switch


F21 Vehicle integrationcontrol module

F22 –

F23 Rear closure latch

Fuses Usage

F24 –

F25 Left front motorizedseat belt pretensioner

F26 Rear defogger

F27 Right front subwoofer

F28 Amplifier

F29 Sunroof



F32 Exterior heated mirrors

F33 Right window

F34 Power trunk module

F35 On-board chargingmodule

F36 Pedestrian friendlyalert function

F37 –

F38 Rear blower

F39 Fuel pump powermodule/Fuel tank zonemodule

Fuses Usage

F40 –

F41 Rear seat auxiliarypower outlet

F42 Left rear memory seat

F43 –

F44 Rear closure releaseswitch/Liftgate module/Integrated chassiscontrol module battery

F45 Auxiliary audio/Video

F46 External objectcalculating module/Side blind zone alert/Rear center short rangeradar sensor/Longrange radar sensors

F47 –

F48 –

F49 Memory bolstermodule


F51 Transmission controlmodule


332 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage

F52 Park assist

F53 Ventilated seats

F54 Headliner

F55 Front memory seatmodule

F56 Evaporative emissionsleak check module/RearHVAC display

F57 Voltage currenttemperature module

F58 –

F59 Engine control modulebattery

F60 Right front motorizedseat belt pretensioner

F61 –

F62 –

F63 Rear seat infotainmentmodule

Fuses Usage

F64 Engine control moduleignition

F65 Rear window sunshade

F66 Rear vision camera/Rearview mirror

F67 Run/Crank misc/Airquality sensor/Integrated chassiscontrol module/Electronic shifter/DCDC converter

F68 Damping controlmodule

F69 Television tunermodule

F70 –

F71 –

F72 –

Fuses Usage

F73 –

F74 –

F75 –

Relays Usage

R1 Rear seat auxiliarypower outlet

R2 Spare

R3 Run/Crank


VEHICLE CARE 333

Vehicles with Super Cruise

Fuses Usage

F01 –

F02 Body control module2 and 4

F03 Left rear externalobject calculatingmodule

F04 Steering wheel displaytouch sensor

Fuses Usage

F05 –

F06 –

F07 Left front and rightrear short range radarsensor/Camera imageprocessing module

Fuses Usage

F08 Driver memory seatmodule

F09 Column friction device

F10 Left headlamp

F11 –

F12 –

F13 Left front subwoofer

F14 Rear blower

F15 Left window

F16 Canister vent

F17 Rear seat memory/Heated

F18 Rear subwoofer

F19 Damping controlmodule

F20 –

F21 Electric brake controlmodule - 2

F22 –

F23 Left front motorizedseat belt pretensioner


334 VEHICLE CARE

Fuses Usage


F25 Passive entry/Passivestart battery

F26 Rear closure latch

F27 Amplifier

F28 Rear defogger

F29 Park assist module


F31 Driver monitoringsystem

F32 Driver passenger doorwindow/Mirror/Driverseat adjustment/Fueldoor switch

F33 Passenger/Rear seatadjustment switch

F34 Left front memory seat

F35 Right rear memory seat

F36 External heated mirror

F37 –

F38 Transmission controlmodule

Fuses Usage

F39 Rear seat infotainmentmodule

F40 –

F41 –

F42 –

F43 Power trunk module

F44 Right frontmemory seat

F45 –

F46 Right window

F47 Engine control modulebattery

F48 Right front subwoofer


F50 –

F51 –

F52 Fuel pump powermodule/Fuel tank zonemodule

F53 Rear seat auxiliarypower outlet

F54 Left rear memory seat

Fuses Usage

F55 –

F56 Rear closure releaseswitch/Liftgate module

F57 Rear left and rearcenter short rangeradar sensors/Longrange radar sensors/Right rear externalobject calculatingmodule

F58 Auxiliary audio/Video

F59 –

F60 Memory bolstermodule

F61 –

F62 Ventilated seat

F63 Headliner

F64 Passenger memory seatmodule

F65 Right front short rangeradar sensor/Advancedriver assist map


VEHICLE CARE 335

Fuses Usage

F66 Television tunermodule

F67 –

F68 –

F69 –

F70 Right front motorizedseat belt pretensioner

F71 Rear heated seatmodule

F72 Sunroof

F73 Rear vision camera/Rearview mirror/Airquality sensor

F74 Rear window sunshade

F75 Engine control moduleignition

F76 Misc run crank/Energystorage control module/DC DC converter/Rearexternal objectcalculating module

F77 Trunk auxiliary poweroutlet

Fuses Usage

F78 Rear HVAC display

F79 –

F80 –

F81 –

F82 –

F83 –

F84 –

F85 –

F86 –

F87 –

Relays Usage

R01 Rear seat auxiliarypower outlet

R02 Spare

R03 Run/Crank

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. See thewarranty manual for informationregarding the tire warranty andwhere to get service. Foradditional information refer to thetire manufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowoutand a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 195.

(Continued)


336 VEHICLE CARE

Warning (Continued)

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash could causeserious injury. Check alltires frequently tomaintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or an authorizedtire service center shouldrepair, replace, dismount,and mount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

See Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation 0 344 for inflationpressure adjustment forhigh-speed driving.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come with all-seasontires. These tires are designed toprovide good overall performance onmost road surfaces and weatherconditions. Original equipment tiresdesigned to GM's specific tireperformance criteria have a TPCspecification code molded onto thesidewall. Original equipmentall-season tires can be identified bythe last two characters of this TPCcode, which will be “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires on thevehicle if frequent driving on snow orice-covered roads is expected.All-season tires provide adequateperformance for most winter drivingconditions, but they may not offer thesame level of traction or performanceas winter tires on snow or ice-coveredroads. See Winter Tires 0 336.

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-covered


VEHICLE CARE 337

roads. Consider installing winter tireson the vehicle if frequent driving onice or snow covered roads is expected.See your dealer for details regardingwinter tire availability and proper tireselection. Also, see Buying New Tires0 352.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction, increasedroad noise, and shorter tread life.After changing to winter tires, be alertfor changes in vehicle handling andbraking.

If using winter tires:

. Use tires of the same brand andtread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, and speedrating as the original equipmenttires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has 245/45R19,245/40R20, or 245/40ZR20 sizetires, they are classified aslow-profile tires.

Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage can occurwhen coming into contact withroad hazards like potholes, or sharpedged objects, or when sliding intoa curb. The warranty does not coverthis type of damage. Keep tires setto the correct inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

Summer TiresThis vehicle may come with245/40ZR20 high performancesummer tires. These tires have aspecial tread and compound that areoptimized for maximum dry and wetroad performance. This special treadand compound will have decreasedperformance in cold climates, and onice and snow. It is recommended thatwinter tires be installed on the vehicleif frequent driving at temperaturesbelow approximately 5 °C (40 °F) or onice or snow covered roads is expected.See Winter Tires 0 336.

Caution

High performance summer tireshave rubber compounds that loseflexibility and may develop surfacecracks in the tread area attemperatures below −7 °C (20 °F).Always store high performancesummer tires indoors and attemperatures above −7 °C (20 °F)when not in use. If the tires have

(Continued)


338 VEHICLE CARE

Caution (Continued)

been subjected to −7 °C (20 °F) orless, let them warm up in a heatedspace to at least 5 °C (40 °F) for24 hours or more before beinginstalled or driving a vehicle onwhich they are installed. Do notapply heat or blow heated airdirectly on the tires. Always inspecttires before use. See Tire Inspection0 349.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typical passengervehicle tire and a compact sparetire sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

(1) Tire Size : The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection.

(2) TPC Spec (Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification) : Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification code

molded onto the sidewall. GM'sTPC specifications meet or exceedall federal safety guidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation) : TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

DOT Tire Date of Manufacture :The last four digits of the TINindicate the tire manufactureddate. The first two digits representthe week (01–52) and the last twodigits, the year. For example, thethird week of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date the


VEHICLE CARE 339

tire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire,although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) : Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire Quality Grading0 353.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(1) Tire Ply Material : The typeof cord and number of plies in thesidewall and under the tread.

(2) Temporary Use Only : Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire should not be driven atspeeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).The compact spare tire is foremergency use when a regularroad tire has lost air and gone flat.If the vehicle has a compact sparetire, see Compact Spare Tire 0 363and If a Tire Goes Flat 0 356.

(3) Tire Identification Number(TIN) : The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). TheTIN shows the manufacturer andplant code, tire size, and date thetire was manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of the tire,although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(4) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit : Maximum load thatcan be carried and the maximumpressure needed to supportthat load.

(5) Tire Inflation : The temporaryuse tire or compact spare tireshould be inflated to 420 kPa(60 psi). For more information ontire pressure and inflation see TirePressure 0 343.

(6) Tire Size : A combination ofletters and numbers define a tire'swidth, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service


340 VEHICLE CARE

description. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(7) TPC Spec (Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification) : Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. GM'sTPC specifications meet or exceedall federal safety guidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire :The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tire andRim Association.

(2) Tire Width : The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio : A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspectratio is 60, as shown in item 3 ofthe illustration, it would meanthat the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(4) Construction Code : A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D means

diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description : Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of the tire.The load index represents the loadcarrying capacity a tire is certifiedto carry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certifiedto carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure : The amount of airinside the tire pressing outwardon each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed in kPa(kilopascal) or psi (pounds persquare inch).

Accessory Weight : The combinedweight of optional accessories.Some examples of optional


VEHICLE CARE 341

accessories are automatictransmission, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio : The relationship ofa tire's height to its width.

Belt : A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead : The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline of thetread.

Cold Tire Pressure : The amountof air pressure in a tire, measuredin kPa (kilopascal) or psi (poundsper square inch) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving. SeeTire Pressure 0 343.

Curb Weight : The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengersand cargo.

DOT Markings : A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT code includesthe Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designatorwhich can also identify the tiremanufacturer, production plant,brand, and date of production.

GVWR : Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limits0 195.

GAWR FRT : Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 195.

GAWR RR : Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 195.

Intended Outboard Sidewall :The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unitfor air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index : An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 thatcorresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure :The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.


342 VEHICLE CARE

Maximum Load Rating : The loadrating for a tire at the maximumpermissible inflation pressure forthat tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight : The sum of curb weight,accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production optionsweight.

Normal Occupant Weight : Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits 0 195.

Occupant Distribution :Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall : Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears whitelettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name

molding that is higher or deeperthan the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure : Vehicle manufacturer'srecommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tireplacard. See Tire Pressure 0 343and Vehicle Load Limits 0 195.

Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tirein which the ply cords that extendto the beads are laid at 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Rim : A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beads areseated.

Sidewall : The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating : An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicatingthe maximum speed at which atire can operate.

Traction : The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread : The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators : Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)of tread remains. See When It IsTime for New Tires 0 351.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards) : A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire'straction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading 0 353.


VEHICLE CARE 343

Vehicle Capacity Weight : Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargoload. See Vehicle Load Limits 0 195.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire : Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard : A labelpermanently attached to a vehicleshowing the vehicle capacityweight and the original equipmenttire size and recommendedinflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” underVehicle Load Limits 0 195.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operate effectively.

{ Warning

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tires thatdo not have enough air, canresult in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, can result in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel on the vehicle indicates theoriginal equipment tires and thecorrect cold tire inflationpressures. The recommendedpressure is the minimum airpressure needed to support thevehicle's maximum load carryingcapacity. See Vehicle Load Limits0 195.

How the vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ride comfort.Never load the vehicle with moreweight than it was designed tocarry.

When to Check

Check the pressure of the tiresonce a month or more. Do notforget the compact spare, if thevehicle has one. The cold compactspare tire pressure should be at420 kPa (60 psi). See CompactSpare Tire 0 363.


344 VEHICLE CARE

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been driven forat least three hours or no morethan 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve to geta pressure measurement. If thecold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label, no furtheradjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add airuntil the recommended pressure isreached. If the inflation pressureis high, press on the metal stem inthe center of the tire valve torelease air.

Recheck the tire pressure with thetire gauge.

Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems to keep out dirt andmoisture and prevent leaks. Useonly valve caps designed for thevehicle by GM. TPMS sensorscould be damaged and would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ Warning

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100 mph) or higher, puts additionalstrain on tires. Sustainedhigh-speed driving causes excessiveheat buildup and can cause suddentire failure. This could cause acrash, and you or others could bekilled. Some high-speed rated tiresrequire inflation pressureadjustment for high-speed

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

operation. When speed limits androad conditions allow the vehicle tobe driven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, are in excellentcondition, and are set to the correctcold tire inflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with 235/50R18 97V or245/45R19 98V size tires requireinflation pressure adjustment whendriving the vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set thecold inflation pressure for all fourtires to 270 kPa (39 psi).

Vehicles with 245/40R20 95W sizetires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) orhigher. Set the cold inflation pressureto 290 kPa (42 psi).

Vehicles with 245/40ZR20 95Y sizetires require inflation pressureadjustment when driving the vehicleat speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or


VEHICLE CARE 345

higher. Set the cold inflation pressurefor the front tires to 280 kPa (41 psi)and the rear tires to 300 kPa (44 psi).

Return the tires to the recommendedcold tire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 195 and TirePressure 0 343.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your tires and transmittire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to theinflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tire causesthe tire to overheat and can lead totire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire treadlife, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver's responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combinedwith the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.


346 VEHICLE CARE

See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation0 346.


Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). The TPMS isdesigned to warn the driver when alow tire pressure condition exists.TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, excluding thespare tire and wheel assembly. TheTPMS sensors monitor the airpressure in the tires and transmit thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition isdetected, the TPMS illuminates thelow tire pressure warning light on theinstrument cluster. If the warninglight comes on, stop as soon aspossible and inflate the tires to therecommended pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 195.

A message to check the pressure in aspecific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tire pressurelevels can be viewed. For additionalinformation and details about the DICoperation and displays see DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 149.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the airpressure is getting low and needs tobe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information label,attached to your vehicle, shows thesize of the original equipment tiresand the correct inflation pressure forthe tires when they are cold. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 195 for anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location.Also see Tire Pressure 0 343.

The TPMS can warn about a low tirepressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. SeeTire Inspection 0 349, Tire Rotation0 350, and Tires 0 335.

Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


VEHICLE CARE 347

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properly ifone or more of the TPMS sensors aremissing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the lowtire pressure warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message also displays.The malfunction light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditions thatcan cause these to come on are:

. One of the road tires has beenreplaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a TPMSsensor. The malfunction light andDIC message should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully. See “TPMSSensor Matching Process” later inthis section.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. The malfunction

light and the DIC message shouldgo off after successfullycompleting the sensor matchingprocess. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. See yourdealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires 0 352.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire pressure condition. See yourdealer for service if the TPMSmalfunction light and DIC messagecome on and stay on.

Tire Fill Alert (If Equipped)

This feature provides visual andaudible alerts outside the vehicle tohelp when inflating an underinflatedtire to the recommended cold tirepressure.

When the low tire pressure warninglight comes on:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe, levelplace.

2. Set the parking brake firmly.

3. Place the vehicle in P (Park).

4. Add air to the tire that isunderinflated. The turn signallamp will flash.

When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once and the turn signallamp will stop flashing andbriefly turn solid.


348 VEHICLE CARE

Repeat these steps for allunderinflated tires that haveilluminated the low tire pressurewarning light.

{ Warning

Overinflating a tire could cause thetire to rupture and you or otherscould be injured. Do not exceed themaximum pressure listed on thetire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 338 and Vehicle LoadLimits 0 195.

If the tire is overinflated by more than35 kPa (5 psi), the horn will soundmultiple times and the turn signallamp will continue to flash for severalseconds after filling stops. To releaseand correct the pressure, while theturn signal lamp is still flashing,briefly press the center of the valvestem. When the recommendedpressure is reached, the hornsounds once.

If the turn signal lamp does not flashwithin 15 seconds after starting toinflate the tire, the tire fill alert hasnot been activated or is not working.

If the hazard warning flashers are on,the tire fill alert visual feedback willnot work properly.

The TPMS will not activate the tire fillalert properly under the followingconditions:

. There is interference from anexternal device or transmitter.

. The air pressure from the inflationdevice is not sufficient to inflatethe tire.

. There is a malfunction inthe TPMS.

. There is a malfunction in the hornor turn signal lamps.

. The identification code of theTPMS sensor is not registered tothe system.

. The battery of the TPMS sensoris low.

If the tire fill alert does not operatedue to TPMS interference, move thevehicle about 1 m (3 ft) back orforward and try again. If the tire fillalert feature is not working, use a tirepressure gauge.

TPMS Sensor Matching Process

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one or moreof the TPMS sensors. The TPMSsensor matching process should alsobe performed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go off atthe next ignition cycle. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheelpositions, using a TPMS relearn tool,in the following order: driver sidefront tire, passenger side front tire,passenger side rear tire, and driverside rear tire. See your dealer forservice or to purchase a relearn tool.A TPMS relearn tool can also bepurchased. See Tire Pressure MonitorSensor Activation Tool at


VEHICLE CARE 349

www.gmtoolsandequipment.com orcall 1-800-GM TOOLS(1-800-468-6657).

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takes longer,the matching process stops and mustbe restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching process is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place the vehicle in ServiceMode. See Ignition Positions0 200.

3. Make sure the Tire Pressure infodisplay option is turned on. Theinfo displays on the DIC can beturned on and off through theOptions menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) 0 149.

4. Use the five-way DIC control onthe right side of the steeringwheel to scroll to the TirePressure screen under the DICinfo page. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) 0 149.

5. Press and hold SEL in the centerof the five-way DIC control.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool against thetire sidewall, near the valve stem.Then press the button to activatethe TPMS sensor. A horn chirpconfirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.


12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressure levelas indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspected forsigns of wear or damage at leastonce a month.


350 VEHICLE CARE

Replace the tire if:

. The indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire canbe seen.

. There is cord or fabric showingthrough the tire's rubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snagged deepenough to show cord or fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule 0 379.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. The firstrotation is the most important.

Anytime unusual wear is noticed,rotate the tires as soon aspossible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Time forNew Tires 0 351 and WheelReplacement 0 355.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and LoadingInformation label after the tireshave been rotated. See TirePressure 0 343 and Vehicle LoadLimits 0 195.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 346.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 393, and“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” underTire Changing 0 358.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. When

(Continued)


VEHICLE CARE 351

Warning (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towelcan be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

Lightly coat the inner diameter ofthe wheel hub opening with wheelbearing grease after a wheelchange or tire rotation to preventcorrosion or rust buildup. Do notget grease on the wheel mountingsurface or on the wheel nuts orbolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds, vehicleloading, and road conditions affect thewear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear when thetires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. See TireInspection 0 349 and Tire Rotation0 350.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factors includingtemperatures, loading conditions, andinflation pressure maintenance affecthow fast aging takes place. GMrecommends that tires, including thespare if equipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. The

tire manufacture date is the last fourdigits of the DOT Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN) which is molded intoone side of the tire sidewall. The firsttwo digits represent the week (01–52)and the last two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Park avehicle that will be stored for at leasta month in a cool, dry, clean areaaway from direct sunlight to slowaging. This area should be free ofgrease, gasoline, or other substancesthat can deteriorate rubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires that mayresult in vibrations while driving.When storing a vehicle for at least amonth, remove the tires or raise thevehicle to reduce the weight from thetires.


352 VEHICLE CARE

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of the vehicle,including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM'sTPC Spec number is molded ontothe tire's sidewall near the tiresize. If the tires have an all-seasontread design, the TPC Specnumber will be followed by MS for

mud and snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling 0 338, for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handling performancemay be adversely affected if all thetires are not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done, allfour tires should wear out atabout the same time. See TireRotation 0 350 for information onproper tire rotation. However, if itis necessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipmenttires may not be available for H, V,W, and ZR speed rated tires. Neverexceed the winter tire's maximum

speed capability when usingwinter tires with a lower speedrating.

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount ordismount the tires.

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes (otherthan those originally installed onthe vehicle), brands, or types maycause loss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or other vehicledamage. Use the correct size, brand,and type of tire on all four wheels.


VEHICLE CARE 353

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheel rimflanges to develop cracks aftermany miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. Use onlyradial-ply tires with the wheelson the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, loadrange, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low-pressure warning ifnon-TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation 0 346.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits 0 195.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed that area different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also be affected.

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. This increases

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

the chance of a crash and seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheeland tire systems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires 0 352 andAccessories and Modifications 0 288.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingThe following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold in theUnited States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of mostpassenger car tires. The UniformTire Quality Grading (UTQG)


354 VEHICLE CARE

system does not apply to deeptread, winter tires, compact sparetires, tires with nominal rimdiameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they mustalso conform to federal safetyrequirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire PerformanceCriteria (TPC) standards.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half(1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differencesin road characteristics andclimate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highestto lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.Those grades represent the tire'sability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlledconditions on specified

government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance. Warning: Thetraction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representingthe tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its abilityto dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under the


VEHICLE CARE 355

Federal Motor Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance onthe laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.Warning: The temperature gradefor this tire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were aligned andbalanced at the factory to provide thelongest tire life and best overallperformance. Adjustments to wheelalignment and tire balancing are notnecessary on a regular basis. Consideran alignment check if there is unusualtire wear or the vehicle is significantlypulling to one side or the other. Someslight pull to the left or right,depending on the crown of the roadand/or other road surface variations

such as troughs or ruts, is normal.If the vehicle is vibrating when drivingon a smooth road, the tires andwheels may need to be rebalanced.See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted or corroded.If wheel nuts keep coming loose, thewheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaksair, replace it. Some aluminum wheelscan be repaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter,width, offset, and be mounted thesame way as the one it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors with new GM originalequipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nutscan be dangerous. It could affectthe braking and handling of thevehicle. Tires can lose air, andcause loss of control, causing acrash. Always use the correct wheel,wheel bolts, and wheel nuts forreplacement.

Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim, bumperheight, vehicle ground clearance,and tire or tire chain clearance tothe body and chassis.


356 VEHICLE CARE

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a used oneis dangerous. How it has been usedor how far it has been driven maybe unknown. It could fail suddenlyand cause a crash. When replacingwheels, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

Caution

Use tire chains only where legal andonly when necessary. Use lowprofile chains that add no morethan 10 mm thickness to the tiretread and inner sidewall. Use chainsthat are the proper size for the tires.Install them on the tires of the rearaxle. Do not use chains on the tiresof the front axle. Tighten them astightly as possible with the ends

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

securely fastened. Drive slowly andfollow the chain manufacturer'sinstructions. If the chains contactthe vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slowdown until it stops. Driving too fastor spinning the wheels with chainson will damage the vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tires aremaintained properly. See Tires 0 335.If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But ifthere ever is a blowout, here are a fewtips about what to expect and whatto do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire createsa drag that pulls the vehicle towardthat side. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid and mayrequire the same correction as used ina skid. Stop pressing the acceleratorpedal and steer to straighten thevehicle. It may be very bumpy andnoisy. Gently brake to a stop, well offthe road, if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash. Neverattempt to re-inflate a tire that hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat. Have yourdealer or an authorized tire servicecenter repair or replace the flat tireas soon as possible.


VEHICLE CARE 357

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injuredor killed if the vehicle slips off thejack. If a jack is provided with thevehicle, only use it for changing aflat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers 0 169.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can be dangerous.The vehicle can slip off the jack androll over or fall causing injury ordeath. Find a level place to changethe tire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks,if equipped, on both sides ofthe tire at the opposite cornerof the tire being changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as a guideto assist in the placement of thewheel blocks (1), if equipped.

1. Wheel Block (If Equipped)2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


358 VEHICLE CARE

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The jack and tools will be stored inone of the following ways.

1. Jack2. Retainer Nut3. Fuel Funnel4. Strap5. Wrench6. Tow Hook (If Equipped)7. Tool Bag

1. Jack2. Retainer Nut3. Fuel Funnel4. Tow Hook (If Equipped)5. Strap6. Wrench

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Lift the spare tire cover andattach the handle to thetrunk edge.

3. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and remove thespare tire. Place the spare tirenext to the tire being changed.

4. Remove the jack and tools fromtheir container and place themnear the tire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire Goes Flat0 356.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen andremove the wheel nut caps.


VEHICLE CARE 359

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

4. Place the jack near the flat tire.

5. Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, you couldbe badly injured or killed. Never getunder a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damagethe vehicle and even make thevehicle fall. To help avoid personalinjury and vehicle damage, be sureto fit the jack lift head into theproper location before raising thevehicle.

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without the appropriatesafety equipment and training. If ajack is provided with the vehicle, itis designed only for changing a flattire. If it is used for anything else,you or others could be badly injuredor killed if the vehicle slips off thejack. If a jack is provided with thevehicle, only use it for changing aflat tire.

6. Place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.

7. Place the jack under the vehicle.

Caution

Make sure that the jack lift head isin the correct position or you maydamage your vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by yourwarranty.


360 VEHICLE CARE

8. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tirewithin the depression of the jackpads, as shown. The jack mustnot be used in any otherposition.

9. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off the groundso there is enough room for theroad tire to clear the ground.

10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause a crash. Whenchanging a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

can be used; however, use a scraperor wire brush later to remove allrust or dirt.

12. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tire onthe wheel-mounting surface.


VEHICLE CARE 361

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on bolts ornuts because the nuts might comeloose. The vehicle's wheel could falloff, causing a crash.

14. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheelis held against the hub.

15. Lower the vehicle by turning thejack handle counterclockwise.

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can cause thewheels to become loose or come off.The wheel nuts should be tightenedwith a torque wrench to the propertorque specification after replacing.Follow the torque specificationsupplied by the aftermarket

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

manufacturer when using accessorylocking wheel nuts. See Capacitiesand Specifications 0 393 for originalequipment wheel nut torquespecifications.

Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torquespecification. See Capacities andSpecifications 0 393 for the wheelnut torque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, as shown.

17. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.


362 VEHICLE CARE

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Replace the jack and tools asthey were, originally, stored intheir container near thespare tire.

3. Replace the spare tire cover.

4. Place the tire, lying flat, in therear storage compartment.

If there is a loop on the end ofthe strap used to secure the flattire, go to Step 5. If there is not aloop, go to Step 8.

5. Route the loop end of thestrap (3) through one of thecargo tie-downs (1) in the rear ofthe vehicle.

6. Route the hook (2) through theloop (3).

7. Pull the strap to tighten itaround the cargo tie-down (1).

8. Route the hook end of the strapthrough the wheel.

9. Attach the hook to the cargotie-down in the rear of thevehicle.

10. Tighten the strap.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soon asyou can.


VEHICLE CARE 363

Compact Spare Tire

{ Warning

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to a crashand you or others could be injured.Use only one compact spare tire ata time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when new;however, it can lose air over time.Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 420 kPa (60 psi).

Caution

Exceeding the 80 km/h (50 mph)maximum speed when a compactspare assembly is installed candamage the vehicle’s drivelinecomponents.

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctly inflatedafter being installed on the vehicle.The compact spare tire is designed fortemporary use only. The vehicle willperform differently with the spare tireinstalled and it is recommended thatthe vehicle speed be limited to80 km/h (50 mph). To conserve thetread of the spare tire, have thestandard tire repaired or replaced assoon as convenient and return thespare tire to the storage area.

When using a compact spare tire, theAWD (if equipped), ABS, and TractionControl systems may engage until thespare tire is recognized by the vehicle,especially on slippery roads. Adjustdriving to reduce possible wheel slip.

Caution

When the compact spare isinstalled, do not take the vehiclethrough an automatic car washwith guide rails. The compact sparecan get caught on the rails whichcan damage the tire, wheel, andother parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. Theywill not fit. Keep the spare tire and itswheel together.

Caution

Tire chains will not fit the compactspare. Using them can damage thevehicle and the chains. Do not usetire chains on the compact spare.


364 VEHICLE CARE

Jump Starting

Jump Starting - NorthAmericaFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery - NorthAmerica 0 314.

If the battery has run down, try to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure touse the following steps to do it safely.

{ Warning

WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Batteries also contain otherchemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer. WASHHANDS AFTER HANDLING. Formore information go towww.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

See California Proposition 65 Warning0 287 and the back cover.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of these thingscan hurt you.

Caution

Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to the vehicle thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Trying to start the vehicleby pushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

2.0L L4 Engine Shown, 3.0LV6 Engine, and 3.6L V6 Engine Similar

1. Discharged Remote BatteryPositive Terminal

2. Discharged Remote BatteryNegative Ground Terminal

3. Good Battery NegativeTerminal

4. Good Battery PositiveTerminal


VEHICLE CARE 365

4.2L V8 Engine

1. Discharged Remote BatteryPositive Terminal

2. Discharged Remote BatteryNegative Ground Terminal

3. Good Battery NegativeTerminal

4. Good Battery PositiveTerminal

The jump start remote positiveterminal (1) and the remote negativeground terminal (2) for the dischargedbattery are on the driver side of thevehicle.

The jump start negative terminal (3)and positive terminal (4) are on thebattery of the vehicle providing thejump start.

The positive jump start connection forthe discharged battery is under a redcover. Remove the cover to expose theterminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Caution

If the other vehicle does not have a12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake and shiftto P (Park). See Shifting Into Park0 205.

Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Wheneverpossible, turn off or unplug allaccessories on either vehicle whenjump starting.

4. Turn the ignition off. Turn off alllights and accessories in bothvehicles, except the hazardwarning flashers if needed.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not running andcan injure you. Keep hands,clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.


366 VEHICLE CARE

{ Warning

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode. Peoplehave been hurt doing this, andsome have been blinded. Use aflashlight if you need more light.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you.If you accidentally get it in youreyes or on your skin, flush the placewith water and get medical helpimmediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engine partscan injure you badly. Keep yourhands away from moving partsonce the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the remotepositive (+) terminal on thedischarged battery.

6. Connect the other end of the redpositive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery.

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery.

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to theremote negative (–) groundterminal on the driver side shocktower for the discharged battery.

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it probablyneeds service.

Caution

If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order,electrical shorting may occur anddamage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

After starting the disabled vehicle andremoving the jumper cables, allow itto idle for several minutes.


VEHICLE CARE 367

Towing the Vehicle

Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lash orhook to suspension components.Use the proper straps around thetires to secure the vehicle. Do notdrag a locked wheel/tire whileloading the vehicle. Do not use asling type lift to tow the vehicle.This could damage the vehicle.

GM recommends a flatbed tow truckto transport a disabled vehicle. Useramps to help reduce approach angles,if necessary. A towed vehicle shouldhave its drive wheels off the ground.Contact Roadside Service or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

If the vehicle is equipped with a toweye, it is located in the trunk next tothe spare tire tools. Only use the toweye to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed

car carrier from a flat road surface. Donot use the tow eye to pull the vehiclefrom snow, mud, or sand.

Caution

Improper use of the tow eye cancause vehicle damage. Use cautionand low speeds to prevent damageto the vehicle.

Front Attachment Point

Carefully open the cover in the fasciaby using the small notch that concealsthe tow eye socket.

Install the tow eye into the socket andturn it until it is fully tightened. Whenthe tow eye is removed, reinstall thecover with the notch in the originalposition.


368 VEHICLE CARE

Rear Attachment Point

Carefully open the cover in the fasciaby using the small notch that concealsthe tow eye socket.

Install the tow eye into the socket andturn it until it is fully tightened. Whenthe tow eye is removed, reinstall thecover with the notch in the originalposition.

Recreational VehicleTowing

Caution

Do not tow this vehicle with twowheels on the ground, or vehicledamage could occur. This damagewould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

The vehicle was neither designed norintended to be towed with any of itswheels on the ground. If the vehiclemust be towed, see Towing the Vehicle0 367.


VEHICLE CARE 369

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants0 388.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish, washit often and out of direct sunlight.

Caution

Do not use petroleum-based, acidic,or abrasive cleaning agents as theycan damage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regarding

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

correct product usage, necessarysafety precautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Caution

Avoid using high-pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damage orremoval of paint and decals.

Caution

Do not power wash any component

under the hood that has thisesymbol.

This could cause damage thatwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

If using an automatic car wash, followthe car wash instructions. Thewindshield wiper and rear windowwiper, if equipped, must be off.Remove any accessories that may bedamaged or interfere with the carwash equipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, before washingand after, to remove all cleaningagents completely. If they are allowedto dry on the surface, they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfaces aredamaged, see your dealer to have thedamage assessed and repaired. Foreignmaterials such as calcium chlorideand other salts, ice melting agents,road oil and tar, tree sap, birddroppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage thevehicle's finish if they remain onpainted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as


370 VEHICLE CARE

soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are markedsafe for painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. See yourdealer for approved cleaning products.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals,simulated wood, or flat paint asdamage can occur.

Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damageit. Use only non-abrasive waxes andpolishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish onthe vehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can result ina hazy white finish or pitting. Thisdamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. To prevent damage,always follow these cleaninginstructions:

. Be sure the molding is cool to thetouch before applying any cleaningsolution.

. Use only approved cleaningsolutions for aluminum, chrome,or stainless steel. Some cleanersare highly acidic or containalkaline substances and candamage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses,Emblems, Decals, and Stripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soap toclean exterior lamps, lenses, emblems,decals, and stripes. Follow instructionsunder "Washing the Vehicle"previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic, andsome have a UV protective coating. Donot clean or wipe them when dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:

. Abrasive or caustic agents.

. Washer fluids and other cleaningagents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels, or otherharsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.


VEHICLE CARE 371. Aftermarket appearance caps or

covers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessive heatgenerated.

Caution

Failure to clean lamps properly cancause damage to the lamp coverthat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Caution

Using wax on low gloss black finishstripes can increase the gloss leveland create a non-uniform finish.Clean low gloss stripes with soapand water only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakesbetween the hood and windshieldwhen washing the vehicle.

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help increase fueleconomy. Keep the shutter systemclean for proper operation.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades.

Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildupof vehicle wash/wax treatments maycause wiper streaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dusty conditions,sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply weatherstrip lubricant onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstrips atleast once a year. Hot, dry climatesmay require more frequentapplication. Black marks from rubbermaterial on painted surfaces can beremoved by rubbing with a cleancloth. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants 0 388.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.


372 VEHICLE CARE

Caution

Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on the vehicle maydamage the paint finish and/ortires. When applying a tire dressing,always wipe off any overspray fromall painted surfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Wheel Trim

Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soapand water to clean the wheels. Afterrinsing thoroughly with clean water,dry with a soft, clean towel. A waxmay then be applied.

Caution

Chrome wheels and chrome wheeltrim may be damaged if the vehicleis not washed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium chloride or calciumchloride. These are used on roadsfor conditions such as dust and ice.Always wash the chrome with soapand water after exposure.

Caution

To avoid surface damage on wheelsand wheel trim, do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, or brushes. Use only GMapproved cleaners. Do not drive thevehicle through an automatic carwash that uses silicone carbide tire/wheel cleaning brushes. Damagecould occur and the repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Brake System

Visually inspect brake lines and hosesfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brakepads for wear and rotors for surfacecondition. Inspect brake linings/shoesfor wear or cracks. Inspect all otherbrake parts.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering, suspension,and chassis components for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signs ofwear at least once a year.

Inspect power steering for properattachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hoodhinges, liftgate hinges, and the steelfuel door hinges, unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with aclean cloth will make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, spring and fall,use plain water to flush any corrosivematerials from the underbody. Take


VEHICLE CARE 373

care to thoroughly clean any areaswhere mud and other debris cancollect.

Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfer caseand/or axles and should be replaced.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requiressheet metal repair or replacement,make sure the body repair shopapplies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restorecorrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoid

corrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall upon andattack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. See “Finish Care” previously inthis section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Newspapers or dark garments cantransfer color to the vehicle’s interior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mild soapsolution, immediately remove handlotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Use cleaners specifically designed forthe surfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply all cleanersdirectly to the cleaning cloth. Do notspray cleaners on any switches orcontrols. Remove cleaners quickly.

Before using cleaners, read and followall safety instructions on the label.While cleaning the interior, open thedoors and windows to get properventilation.

To prevent damage, do not clean theinterior using the following cleanersor techniques:

. Never use a razor or any othersharp object to remove soil fromany interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surface aggressivelyor with too much pressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners, useapproximately 20 drops per 3.8 L(1 gal) of water. A concentratedsoap solution will create streaks


374 VEHICLE CARE

and attract dirt. Do not usesolutions that contain strong orcaustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.If necessary, use a commercial glasscleaner after cleaning with plain water.

Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six months ofownership will reduce tendency to fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will not bedamaged. Clean spots with water andmild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.

. When lightly soiled, wipe with asponge or soft, lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surface usinga soft brush attachment. If a rotatingvacuum brush attachment is beingused, only use it on the floor carpet.Before cleaning, gently remove asmuch of the soil as possible:

. Gently blot liquids with a papertowel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as much aspossible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean, lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completely removed,it may be necessary to use acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. Test a small hidden area for


VEHICLE CARE 375

colorfastness before using acommercial upholstery cleaner or spotlifter. If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

After cleaning, use a paper towel toblot excess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

Use a microfiber cloth on high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays. First, usea soft bristle brush to remove dirt thatcan scratch the surface. Then gentlyclean by rubbing with a microfibercloth. Never use window cleaners orsolvents. Periodically hand wash themicrofiber cloth separately, using mildsoap. Do not use bleach or fabricsoftener. Rinse thoroughly and air drybefore next use.

Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. This maycause damage and would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl,Other Plastic Surfaces, LowGloss Paint Surfaces, andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith water to remove dust and loosedirt. For a more thorough cleaning,use a soft microfiber cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.

Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, as wellas other interior surfaces, maycause permanent damage. Wipeexcess moisture from these surfacesafter cleaning and allow them todry naturally. Never use heat,steam, or spot removers. Do not usecleaners that contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleanerscontaining these solvents canpermanently change the appearanceand feel of leather or soft trim, andare not recommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plastics andpainted surfaces. If an air freshenercomes in contact with any plasticor painted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Cargo Cover andConvenience Net

If equipped, wash with warm waterand mild detergent. Do not usechlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water,and then dry completely.


376 VEHICLE CARE

Care of Seat Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye seat beltwebbing. It may severely weakenthe webbing. In a crash, they mightnot be able to provide adequateprotection. Clean and rinse seat beltwebbing only with mild soap andlukewarm water. Allow the webbingto dry.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size or isnot properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distancewhich can cause a crash and injury.Make sure the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.

. The original equipment floor matswere designed for your vehicle.If the floor mats need replacing, itis recommended that GM certifiedfloor mats be purchased. Non-GMfloor mats may not fit properlyand may interfere with the pedals.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Do not use a floor mat if thevehicle is not equipped with afloor mat retainer on the driverside floor.

. Use the floor mat with the correctside up. Do not turn it over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat on thedriver side.

. Do not place one floor mat on topof another.

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two button-type retainers.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock the retainers andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured in place. Verifythe floor mat does not interferewith the pedals.


SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE 377

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Special Application ServicesSpecial Application Services . . . . . 384

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describes therequired maintenance for the vehicle.Follow this schedule to help protectagainst major repair expensesresulting from neglect or inadequatemaintenance. It may also help tomaintain the value of the vehicle if itis sold. It is the responsibility of theowner to have all requiredmaintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and online schedulingto assist with service needs.

Your dealer recognizes the importanceof providing competitively pricedmaintenance and repair services. Withtrained technicians, the dealer is theplace for routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, and lubricantsare important to keep the vehicle ingood working condition.

Do not have chemical flushes thatare not approved by GM performedon the vehicle. The use of flushes,solvents, cleaners, or lubricants thatare not approved by GM coulddamage the vehicle, requiringexpensive repairs that are notcovered by the vehicle warranty.


378 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy, andreduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be more frequentchecks and services. The AdditionalRequired Services - Normal are forvehicles that:

. Carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits 0 195.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal driving limits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel (2.0L L4Turbo Engine) 0 274 orRecommended Fuel (3.0L TwinTurbo V6 and 4.2L Twin TurboV8 Engines) 0 275 or RecommendedFuel (3.6L V6 Engine) 0 275.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services -Severe are for vehicles that are:

. Mainly driven in heavy city trafficin hot weather.

. Mainly driven in hilly ormountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed or competitivedriving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services - Severe chart.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can cause seriousinjury. Perform maintenance workonly if the required information,proper tools, and equipment areavailable. If they are not, see yourdealer to have a trained techniciando the work. See Doing Your OwnService Work 0 288.



Maintenance ScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop

. Check the engine oil level. SeeEngine Oil 0 297.

Once a Month

. Check the tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure 0 343.

. Inspect the tires for wear. See TireInspection 0 349.

. Check the windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 311.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, the engineoil life system may not indicate theneed for vehicle service for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and theoil life system must be reset. Yourtrained dealer technician can performthis work. If the engine oil life system

is reset accidentally, service thevehicle within 5 000 km/3,000 mi sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed. SeeEngine Oil Life System 0 300.

Air Conditioning Desiccant(Replace Every Seven Years)

The air conditioning system requiresmaintenance every seven years. Thisservice requires replacement of thedesiccant to help the longevity andefficient operation of the airconditioning system. This service canbe complex. See your dealer.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform the followingservices. See Tire Rotation 0 350.

. Check engine oil level and oillife percentage. If needed, changeengine oil and filter, and reset oillife system. See Engine Oil 0 297and Engine Oil Life System 0 300.

. Inspect the engine air filter andcheck the air filter life percentage.If necessary, replace engine airfilter and reset the Engine AirFilter Life System. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter 0 302 and Engine AirFilter Life System 0 302.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeCooling System 0 305.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid 0 311.

. Check tire inflation pressures. SeeTire Pressure 0 343.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection 0 349.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect brake system. See ExteriorCare 0 369.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damage, includingcracks or tears in the rubber boots,loose or missing parts, or signs ofwear at least once a year. SeeExterior Care 0 369.


380 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE. Inspect power steering for proper

attachment, connections, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

. Visually inspect halfshafts anddrive shafts for excessive wear,lubricant leaks, and/or damageincluding: tube dents or cracks,constant velocity joint or universaljoint looseness, cracked or missingboots, loose or missing bootclamps, center bearing excessivelooseness, loose or missingfasteners, and axle seals leaks.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck 0 82.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields for looseor damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care 0 369.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check 0 316.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check 0 316.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut for signsof wear, cracks, or other damage.Check the hold open ability of thestrut. If the hold open ability islow, service the gas strut. See GasStrut(s) 0 318.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof 0 59.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires, if recommended for the vehicle, andperform Required Services. Check engine oil leveland oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter,if needed. (1)

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (2) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (3) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (4.2L EngineOnly) (4)

@ @ @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (Except 4.2LEngine) (5)

@ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.(Except 3.6L Engine)

@ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. (3.6LEngine Only)

@

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (6) @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (7)

@

Change rear axle fluid. (Except V-Series) @

Replace rear axle fluid. (V-Series Only) @ @ @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (8) @

Replace brake fluid. (9)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (10) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @



Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Normal

(1) Vehicles with different size frontand rear tires do not have tirerotation. See Tire Rotation 0 350.

(2) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(3) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.

(4) Or every three years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(5) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(6) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 305.

(7) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(8) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(9) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears for DOT 3 fluid or every threeyears for DOT 4 fluid. See Brake Fluid0 313.

(10) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 317.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

12000km/7

,500mi

24000km/1

5,000mi

36000km/2

2,500mi

48000km/3

0,000mi

60000km/3

7,500mi

72000km/4

5,000mi

84000km/5

2,500mi

96000km/6

0,000mi

108000km/6

7,500mi

120000km/7

5,000mi

132000km/8

2,500mi

144000km/9

0,000mi

156000km/9

7,500mi

168000km/1

05,000mi

180000km/1

12,500mi

192000km/1

20,000mi

204000km/1

27,500mi

216000km/1

35,000mi

228000km/1

42,500mi

240000km/1

50,000mi

Rotate tires, if recommended for the vehicle, andperform Required Services. Check engine oil leveland oil life percentage. Change engine oil and filter,if needed. (1)

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (2) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (3) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (4.2L EngineOnly) (4)

@ @ @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (Except 4.2LEngine) (5)

@ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires.(Except 3.6L Engine)

@ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. (3.6LEngine Only)

@

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped withAWD. (6)

@ @ @

Change rear axle fluid. @ @ @

Change front axle fluid, if equipped with AWD. @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (7) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (8) @

Replace brake fluid. (9)

Replace windshield wiper blades. (10) @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace hood and/or body lift support gas struts. @ @



Footnotes — Maintenance ScheduleAdditional Required Services -Severe

(1) Vehicles with different size frontand rear tires do not have tirerotation. See Tire Rotation 0 350.

(2) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequent passengercompartment air filter replacementmay be needed if driving in areas withheavy traffic, poor air quality, highdust levels, or environmentalallergens. Passenger compartment airfilter replacement may also be neededif there is reduced airflow, windowfogging, or odors. Your GM dealer canhelp determine when to replace thefilter.

(3) Visually check all fuel and vaporlines and hoses for proper attachment,connection, routing, and condition.

(4) Or every three years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(5) Or every four years, whichevercomes first. If driving in dustyconditions, inspect the filter at eachoil change or more often as needed.

(6) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case and/or front/rear axleoutput seals. High pressure water canovercome the seals and contaminatethe transfer case fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and/or axles and shouldbe replaced.

(7) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System 0 305.

(8) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage; replace,if needed.

(9) Replace brake fluid every fiveyears for DOT 3 fluid or every threeyears for DOT 4 fluid. See Brake Fluid0 313.

(10) Or every 12 months, whichevercomes first. See Wiper BladeReplacement 0 317.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles

Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every oil change.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See "UnderbodyMaintenance" in Exterior Care0 369.



Additional Maintenanceand CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additional maintenanceservices may be required.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — their traineddealer technicians know your vehiclebest. Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti-point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditions tolook for that may indicate services arerequired.

Battery

The 12-volt battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts

. Belts may need replacing if theysqueak or show signs of crackingor splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the belts and recommendadjustment or replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucialto safe driving.

. Signs of brake wear may includechirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipment toinspect the brakes and recommendquality parts engineered for thevehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approved fluidsprotect the vehicle’s systems andcomponents. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants 0 388 for GM approvedfluids.

. Engine oil and windshield washerfluid levels should be checked atevery fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to be filled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and should beregularly inspected to ensure thatthere are no cracks or leaks. With amulti-point inspection, your dealercan inspect the hoses and advise ifreplacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.

. Signs that the headlamps needattention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage. Thebrake lamps need to be checkedperiodically to ensure that theylight when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.

. Signs of wear may include steeringwheel vibration, bounce/swaywhile braking, longer stoppingdistance, or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signs ofleaking, blown seals, or damage,and can advise when service isneeded.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.

. Signs that the tires need to bereplaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cord

or fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in the treador sidewall; or a bulge or split inthe tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can also providetire/wheel balancing services toensure smooth vehicle operationat all speeds. Your dealer sells andservices name brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care 0 373 andExterior Care 0 369.



Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliver optimalwear and performance.

. Signs that the alignment may needto be adjusted include pulling,improper vehicle handling,or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure proper wheelalignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and the bestviewing, keep the windshield cleanand clear.

. Signs of damage include scratches,cracks, and chips.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacement ifneeded.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleaned andkept in good condition to provide aclear view.

. Signs of wear include streaking,skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades and replacethem when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Automatic Transmission DEXRON-ULV Automatic Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19352619, inCanada 19352620).

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.

Engine Oil (Except 4.2L V8 Twin TurboEngine)

Engine oil meeting the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade.ACDelco dexos1 full synthetic is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 297.

Engine Oil (4.2L V8 Twin TurboEngine Only)

Engine oil meeting the dexos2 specification of the proper SAE viscosity grade.ACDelco dexos2 is recommended. See Engine Oil 0 297.

Hood Latch Assembly, Pivots, SpringAnchor, and Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19353126, in Canada 19353127).

Key Lock Cylinders, Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Rear Axle (Except V-Series)/Front Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88863089, inCanada 88863090).

Rear Axle (V-Series) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 88862624, inCanada 88862625).

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 19331044, in Canada 19331045).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orequivalent.

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

2.0L L4 Engine 23418368 A3219C

3.0L V6 Engine (Driver Side) 23441383 A3207C

3.0L V6 Engine (Passenger Side) 23450879 A3206C

3.6L V6 Engine 23458700 A3204C

4.2L V8 Engine 84166540 A3242C

Engine Oil Filter

2.0L L4 Engine 55495105 PF66

3.0L V6 Engine 19330000 PF63E

3.6L V6 Engine 19330000 PF63E



Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

4.2L V8 Engine 19330000 PF63E

Passenger Compartment Air Filter

Particulate 13508023 CF185

Carbon 13356914 CF184

Spark Plugs

2.0L L4 Engine 55504354 41-103-IP

3.0L V6 Engine 12650283 41-131

3.6L V6 Engine 12646780 41-130

4.2L V8 Engine 12672175 41-104

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.62 in) 23368186 —

Passenger Side – 45 cm (17.72 in) 23353587 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type ofservices performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed


392 TECHNICAL DATA

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Vehicle DataCapacities and Specifications . . . . 393Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . 396

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, on thedriver side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) also appears on theVehicle Certification and Service Partslabels and certificates of title andregistration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is theengine code. This code identifies thevehicle's engine, specifications, andreplacement parts. See “Engine

Specifications” under Capacities andSpecifications 0 393 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service Parts IdentificationLabelThere may be a label on the inside ofthe trunk that contains the followinginformation:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Model designation

. Paint information

. Production options and specialequipment

If there is no label, there is a barcodeon the certification label on thecenter (B) pillar to scan for this sameinformation.


TECHNICAL DATA 393

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants0 388 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Brake Fluid 0.4 L 0.4 qt

Cooling System – Engine

2.0L L4 Engine 9.4 L 10.0 qt

2.0L L4 Engine with Rear A/C 11.0 L 11.6 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 10.6 L 11.2 qt

3.0L V6 Engine with Rear A/C 12.3 L 13.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine Intercoolers 3.2 L 3.4 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 9.8 L 10.4 qt


4.2L V8 Engine 10.9 L 11.5 qt


394 TECHNICAL DATA

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English


4.2L V8 Engine with Intercooler 2.7 L 2.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L L4 Engine 5.0 L 5.3 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

3.6L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

4.2L V8 Engine 9.5 L 10.0 qt

Front Axle 0.5 L 0.53 qt

Rear Axle 0.5 L 0.53 qt

Rear Axle 4.2L V8 Twin Turbo (LTA) Engine or V-Series 1.1 L 1.16 qt

Fuel Tank 72.7 L 19.2 gal

Transfer Case – AWD 0.8 L 0.85 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 150Y 110 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.Recheck fluid level after filling.


TECHNICAL DATA 395

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.0L L4 Engine K Automatic 0.75–0.90 mm (0.030–0.035 in)

3.0L V6 Engine 6 Automatic 0.65–0.75 mm (0.26–0.030 in)

3.6L V6 Engine S Automatic 0.80–0.90 mm (0.031–0.035 in)

4.2L V8 Engine J Automatic 0.74–0.75 mm (0.029–0.030 in)


396 TECHNICAL DATA

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.0L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine

3.6L V6 Engine

4.2L V8 Engine


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 397

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Customer Assistance Offices . . . . 399Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . 400

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . 404Publication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . 407

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects to theUnited States Government . . . . . 407

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . 408

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . 409OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or the operationof the vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer's sales or service departments.Sometimes, however, despite the bestintentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following stepsshould be taken:

STEP ONE : Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concerns canbe quickly resolved at that level. If thematter has already been reviewed withthe sales, service or parts manager,contact the owner of your dealershipor the general manager.


398 CUSTOMER INFORMATION

STEP TWO : If after contacting amember of dealership management, itappears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800–458–8006. In Canada, callthe Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre at 1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call the toll-freenumber in order to give your inquiryprompt attention. Have the followinginformation available to give theCustomer Assistance representative:

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date and presentmileage.

When contacting Cadillac, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : BothGeneral Motors and your dealer arecommitted to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with the newvehicle. However, if you continue toremain unsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto LineProgram to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administered bythe Council of Better Business Bureausto settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or theinterpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-free telephonenumber or write them at the followingaddress:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.3033 Wilson BoulevardSuite 600Arlington, VA 22201

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100http://www.bbb.org/council/programs-services/dispute-handling-and-resolution/bbb-auto-line

This program is available in all50 states and the District of Columbia.Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,mileage, and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/ordiscontinue its participation in thisprogram.



STEP THREE — Canadian Owners :In the event that you do not feel yourconcerns have been addressed afterfollowing the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors ofCanada Company wants you to beaware of its participation in ano-charge mediation/arbitrationprogram. General Motors of CanadaCompany has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims.The program provides for the reviewof the facts involved by an impartialthird party arbiter, and may includean informal hearing before the arbiter.The program is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe Cadillac Customer Care Centre,1-888-446-2000, or write to:

General Motors Cadillac CustomerCare CentreGeneral Motors of Canada CompanyMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesCadillac encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Cadillac, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-224-1400

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada CompanyCadillac Customer Care Centre, MailCode: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-2000 (English/French)Cadillac Roadside Service:1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones (TTYs),Cadillac has TTY equipment availableat its Customer Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate withCadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-2622.TTY users in Canada can dial1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience (U.S.)my.cadillac.com

The Cadillac online owner experienceallows interaction with Cadillac andkeeps important vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E : Download owner’s manuals andview vehicle-specific how-to videos.

G : View maintenance schedules,alerts, and Vehicle DiagnosticInformation. Schedule serviceappointments.

I : View printable dealer-recordedservice records and self-recordedservice records.

D : Select a dealer and viewlocations, maps, phone numbers, andhours.

r : Track your vehicle’s warrantyinformation.

J : View active recalls or search byVehicle Identification Number (VIN).See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)0 392.

H : View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio (if equipped), and OnStaraccount information.

F : Chat with online helprepresentatives.

See my.cadillac.com to register yourvehicle.

Cadillac Owner Centre (Canada)www.cadillacowner.ca

Visit the Cadillac Owner Centre:

. Chat live with online helprepresentatives.

. Locate owner resources such aslease-end, financing, and warrantyinformation.

. Retrieve favorite articles, quizzes,tips, and multimedia galleriesorganized into the FeaturedArticles and Auto Care Sections.

. Download owner’s manuals.


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 401. Find Cadillac-recommended

maintenance services.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available to qualifiedapplicants for cost reimbursement, upto certain limits, of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such as handcontrols or a wheelchair/scooter liftfor the vehicle.

To learn about the GM Mobilityprogram, see www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has aMobility program. See www.gm.ca orcall 1-800-GM-DRIVE (800-463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400.

Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service, havethe following information ready:

. Your name, home address, andhome telephone number

. Telephone number of yourlocation

. Location of the vehicle

. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided for the durationof the vehicle’s powertrain warranty.

In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicleis covered. In Canada, a person drivingthe vehicle without permission fromthe owner is not covered.

Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the RoadsideService program at any time withoutnotification.

General Motors North America andCadillac reserve the right to limitservices or payment to an owner ordriver if they decide the claims aremade too often, or the same type ofclaim is made many times.



Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identification beforethis service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is not givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with a spare tire.The spare tire, if equipped, mustbe in good condition and properlyinflated. It is your responsibilityfor the repair or replacement ofthe tire if it is not covered by thewarranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip is interrupteddue to a warranty failure,incidental expenses may bereimbursed during the Powertrainwarranty period. Items consideredare hotel, meals, and rental car ora vehicle being delivered back tothe customer, up to 500 miles.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional Roadside Serviceis more than an auto club or towingservice. It provides every Cadillacowner in the United States with theadvantage of contacting a Cadillacadvisor and, where available, aCadillac trained dealer technician whocan provide on-site service.

A dealer technician will travel to yourlocation within a 30-mile radius of aparticipating Cadillac dealership.If beyond this radius, we will arrangeto have your car towed to the nearestCadillac dealership. Each techniciantravels with a specially equipped

service vehicle complete with thenecessary Cadillac parts and toolsrequired to handle most roadsiderepairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws

. Legal fines

. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires, chains,or other traction devices

Service is not provided if a vehicle isin an area that is not accessible to theservice vehicle or is not a regularlytraveled or maintained public road,which includes ice and winter roads.Off-road use is not covered.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is

up to 7 liters. Diesel fuel deliverymay be restricted. Propane andother fuels are not providedthrough this service.


CUSTOMER INFORMATION 403. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle

registration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy of therepair orders are required. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Service advisor willhelp you make arrangements andexplain how to receive payment.Items considered are hotel, meals,and rental car or a vehicle beingdelivered back to the customer, upto 800 km.

. Alternative Service: If assistancecannot be provided right away, theRoadside Service advisor may giveyou permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered, howeverany cost for parts and labor forrepairs not covered by thewarranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointment andadvising the service consultant ofyour transportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safetyrelated. If it is, please call yourdealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you are urgedto do so as early in the work day aspossible to allow for same-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada), extendedpowertrain, and/or hybrid-specificwarranties in both the U.S. andCanada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a partof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.A separate booklet entitled “LimitedWarranty and Owner AssistanceInformation” furnished with each newvehicle provides detailed warrantycoverage information.



Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to do so, your dealermay offer the following transportationoptions:

Shuttle Service

This includes one-way or round-tripshuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters of yourdealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If overnight warranty repairs areneeded, and public transportation isused, the expense must be supportedby original receipts and within themaximum amount allowed by GM forshuttle service. If U.S. customersarrange their own transportation,limited reimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by original receipts.See your dealer for information.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

For an overnight warranty repair, thedealer may provide an availablecourtesy rental vehicle or provide forreimbursement of a rental vehicle.Reimbursement is limited and mustbe supported by original receipts aswell as a signed and completed rentalagreement and meet state/provincial,local, and rental vehicle providerrequirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage,credit card, etc. Additional fees suchas fuel usage charges, taxes, levies,usage fees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair are also your responsibility.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional Program Information

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available at everydealer. Contact your dealer for specificavailability.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue Courtesy

Transportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in a collisionand it is damaged, have the damagerepaired by a qualified technicianusing the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorlyperformed collision repairs diminishthe vehicle resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as the partswith which the vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts arethe best choice to ensure that thevehicle's designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses in priorcrashes. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sectionsof the vehicle. A recycled originalequipment GM part may be anacceptable choice to maintain thevehicle's originally designedappearance and safety performance;however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not coveredby the GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures arenot covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly,exhibit premature durability/corrosionproblems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered bythe GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failurerelated to such parts is not covered bythat warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that you choosea collision repair facility that meetsyour needs before you ever needcollision repairs. Your dealer may havea collision repair center withGM-trained technicians andstate-of-the-art equipment, or be ableto recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians andcomparable equipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. There aresignificant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by variousinsurance policy terms. Manyinsurance policies provide reducedprotection to the GM vehicle bylimiting compensation for damagerepairs by using aftermarket collisionparts. Some insurance companies willnot specify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.

If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your current insurancecarrier, consider switching to anotherinsurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Readthe lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of the lease forpoor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of. Movethe vehicle only if its position putsyou in danger, or you are instructed tomove it by a police officer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involved inthe crash.

For emergency towing see RoadsideService 0 401.



Gather the following information:

. Driver name, address, andtelephone number

. Driver license number

. Owner name, address, andtelephone number

. Vehicle license plate number

. Vehicle make, model, andmodel year

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Insurance company and policynumber

. General description of the damageto the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facility thatuses quality replacement parts. See“Collision Parts” earlier in this section.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an Airbag Inflates?0 88.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommends thatyou take an active role in its repair.If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take the vehiclethere, or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GMparts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits, yourinsurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts.Discuss this with the repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember, if the vehicle isleased, you may be obligated to havethe vehicle repaired with Genuine GMparts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurance companyis paying for the repairs, you are notobligated to accept a repair valuationbased on that insurance company'scollision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you can havecontrol of the repair and parts choicesas long as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Publication OrderingInformation

Service Manuals

Service manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on the engine,transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,electrical system, steering system,body, etc.

Customer Literature

Owner’s manuals are writtenspecifically for owners and areintended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. Theowner’s manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for all models.



Customer literature publicationsavailable for purchase include owner’smanuals, warranty manuals,infotainment manuals, and portfolios.Portfolios include an owner’s manual,warranty manual, infotainmentmanual, if applicable, and zip lock bagor pouch.

Current and Past Models

Service manuals and customerliterature are available for manycurrent and past model year GMvehicles.

To order, call 1-800-551-4123Monday–Friday, 8:00 a.m.–6:00 p.m.eastern time

For credit card orders only (VISA,MasterCard, or Discover), see Helm,Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

To order by mail, write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems that operateon a radio frequency that complieswith Part 15/Part 18 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Innovation, Scienceand Economic Development (ISED)Canada's RSP-100 / license-exemptRSS's / ICES-001.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or GeneralMotors.



To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of CanadaCompany. Call Transport Canadaat 1-800-333-0510; go to:

www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)

www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French)

or write to:

Transport CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety DirectorateDefect Investigations and RecallsDivision80 Noel StreetGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer Assistance CenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Company1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, to monitorthe conditions for airbag deploymentand deploy them in a crash, and,if equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may store datato help the dealer technician servicethe vehicle. Some modules may alsostore data about how the vehicle isoperated, such as rate of fuelconsumption or average speed. Thesemodules may retain personalpreferences, such as radio presets, seatpositions, and temperature settings.



Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with an eventdata recorder (EDR). The mainpurpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as an air bagdeployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. The EDRin this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:

. How various systems in yourvehicle were operating;

. Whether or not the driver andpassenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur.

NoteEDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by theEDR under normal driving conditionsand no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties, suchas law enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have the specialequipment, can read the informationif they have access to the vehicle orthe EDR.

GM will not access these data or shareit with others except: with the consentof the vehicle owner or, if the vehicleis leased, with the consent of thelessee; in response to an official

request by police or similargovernment office; as part of GM'sdefense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as required bylaw. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM researchneeds or may be made available toothers for research purposes, where aneed is shown and the data is not tiedto a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStarIf the vehicle is equipped with OnStarand has an active service plan,additional data may be collectedthrough the OnStar system. Thisincludes information about thevehicle’s operation; collisions involvingthe vehicle; the use of the vehicle andits features; and, in certain situations,the location and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to theOnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

See OnStar Additional Information0 413.



Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.


ONSTAR 411

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

OnStar Overview

= Voice Command Button

Q Blue OnStar Button

> Red Emergency Button

This vehicle may be equipped with acomprehensive, in-vehicle system thatcan connect to an OnStar Advisor forEmergency, Security, Navigation,Connections, and Diagnostics Services.OnStar services may require a paidservice plan and data plan. OnStarrequires the vehicle battery andelectrical system, cellular service, andGPS satellite signals to be availableand operating. OnStar acts as a link toexisting emergency service providers.

OnStar may collect information aboutyou and your vehicle, includinglocation information. See OnStar UserTerms, Privacy Statement, andSoftware Terms for more detailsincluding system limitations atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

The OnStar system status light is nextto the OnStar buttons. If the statuslight is:

. Solid Green: System is ready.

. Flashing Green: On a call.

. Red: Indicates a problem.

. Off: System is off. PressQ twiceto speak with an OnStar Advisor.

PressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion.


412 ONSTAR

Press= to:

. Open the OnStar app on theinfotainment display. See theinfotainment manual forinformation on how to use theOnStar app.

Or

. Make a call, end a call, or answeran incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.

. Obtain and customize the Wi-Fihotspot name or SSID andpassword, if equipped.

PressQ to connect to an Advisor to:

. Verify account information orupdate contact information.

. Get driving directions.

. Receive a Diagnostic check of thevehicle's key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

. Manage Wi-Fi Settings,if equipped.

Press> to get a priority connectionto an OnStar Advisor available 24/7 to:

. Get help for an emergency.

. Be a Good Samaritan or respondto an AMBER Alert.

. Get assistance in severe weatheror other crisis situations and findevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyEmergency Services require an activesafety and security plan. WithAutomatic Crash Response, built-insensors can automatically alert aspecially trained OnStar Advisor whois immediately connected in to thevehicle to help.

Press> for a priority connection toan OnStar Advisor who can contactemergency service providers, directthem to your exact location, and relayimportant information.

With OnStar Crisis Assist, speciallytrained Advisors are available24 hours a day, 7 days a week, toprovide a central point of contact,assistance, and information during acrisis.

With Roadside Assistance, Advisorscan locate a nearby service provider tohelp with a flat tire, a battery jump,or an empty gas tank.


ONSTAR 413

SecurityIf equipped, OnStar provides theseservices:

. With Stolen Vehicle Assistance,OnStar Advisors can use GPS topinpoint the vehicle and helpauthorities quickly recover it.

. With Remote Ignition Block,if equipped, OnStar can block theengine from being restarted.

. With Stolen Vehicle Slowdown,if equipped, OnStar can work withlaw enforcement to gradually slowthe vehicle down.

Theft Alarm Notification

If equipped, if the doors are lockedand the vehicle alarm sounds, anotification by text, e-mail, or phonecall will be sent. If the vehicle isstolen, an OnStar Advisor can workwith authorities to recover the vehicle.

OnStar AdditionalInformationIn-Vehicle Audio Messages

Audio messages may play importantinformation at the following times:

. Prior to vehicle purchase. PressQto set up an account.

. After change in ownership and at90 days.

Transferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan cancel or change accountinformation.

Selling/Transferring the Vehicle

Call 1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827)immediately to terminate your OnStaror connected services if the vehicle isdisposed of, sold, transferred, or if thelease ends.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible. The Advisor will updatevehicle records and explain OnStar orconnected service options.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, RemoteServices, Roadside Assistance, andHands-Free Calling are available onmost vehicles. Not all OnStar servicesare available everywhere or on allvehicles. For more information, a fulldescription of OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar User Terms,Privacy Statement, and SoftwareTerms:

. Call 1-888-4ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).

. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).

. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with an Advisor.


414 ONSTAR

OnStar or connected services cannotwork unless the vehicle is in a placewhere OnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider for servicein that area. The wireless serviceprovider must also have coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar orconnected services. Service involvinglocation information about the vehiclecannot work unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStar hardware.OnStar or connected services may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar or connectedservices may not work. Otherproblems beyond the control ofOnStar — such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the vehicle,damage to the vehicle in a crash,or wireless phone network congestionor jamming — may prevent service.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to help withphysical disabilities and medicalconditions.

PressQ to help:

. Locate a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Find a hotel, restaurant, etc., thatmeets accessibility needs.

. Provide directions to the closesthospital or pharmacy in urgentsituations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability to communicateto deaf, hard-of-hearing,or speech-impaired customers while inthe vehicle. The availabledealer-installed TTY system canprovide in-vehicle access to all OnStarservices, except Virtual Advisor andOnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation.

If equipped, TTY mode can be turnedon or off by touching Settings, thenApps, and then Phone. When TTY

mode is on, phone calls can be madeor received with OnStar using theinfotainment display.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access someOnStar services. The PIN will need tobe changed the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To changethe OnStar PIN, contact an OnStarAdvisor by pressingQ or calling1-888-4ONSTAR.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may be warrantedas part of the vehicle warranty.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask for an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish, and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.


ONSTAR 415

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform Remote DoorUnlock or Stolen Vehicle Assistanceafter the vehicle has been offcontinuously for 10 days without anignition cycle. If the vehicle has notbeen started for 10 days, OnStar cancontact Roadside Assistance or alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global Positioning System (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can occur

in a large city with tall buildings;in parking garages; aroundairports; in tunnels andunderpasses; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to call OnStar.However, OnStar could havedifficulty identifying the exactlocation.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

A temporary loss of GPS can causeloss of the ability to send aTurn-by-Turn Navigation route. TheAdvisor may give a verbal route ormay ask for a call back after thevehicle is driven into an open area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Cellular reception is required forOnStar to send remote signals to thevehicle. Do not place items over ornear the antenna to prevent blockingcellular and GPS signal reception.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverage orthe cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this message maycome on. PressQ to try the call againor try again after driving a few milesinto another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service, andGPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features to

function properly. These systems maynot operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integrated intothe electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment 0 285. Added electricalequipment may interfere with theoperation of the OnStar system andcause it to not operate.

Vehicle Software Updates

OnStar or GM may remotely deliversoftware updates or changes to thevehicle without further notice orconsent. These updates or changesmay enhance or maintain safety,security, or the operation of thevehicle or the vehicle systems.Software updates or changes mayaffect or erase data or settings thatare stored in the vehicle, such asOnStar Hands-Free Calling name tags,saved navigation destinations,or pre-set radio stations. NeitherOnStar nor GM is responsible for anyaffected or erased data or settings.


416 ONSTAR

These updates or changes may alsocollect personal information. Suchcollection is described in the OnStarprivacy statement or separatelydisclosed at the time of installation.These updates or changes may alsocause a system to automaticallycommunicate with GM servers tocollect information about vehiclesystem status, identify whetherupdates or changes are available,or deliver updates or changes. Anactive OnStar agreement constitutesconsent to these software updates orchanges and agreement that eitherOnStar or GM may remotely deliverthem to the vehicle.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Werecommend that you review it. If youhave any questions, call1-888-4ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orpressQ to speak with an Advisor.Users of wireless communications arecautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellular

communications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfully interceptor access transmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - SoftwareAcknowledgements

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software and otherthird party software. Below are thenotices and licenses associatedwith libcurl and unzip and for otherthird party software please seehttp://opensource.lge.com/index

www.onstar.com/us/en/

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify, anddistribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee is herebygranted, provided that the abovecopyright notice and this permissionnotice appear in all copies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “ASIS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANYKIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TOTHE WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ANDNONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRDPARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALLTHE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHTHOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANYCLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHERLIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTIONOF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUTOF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THESOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHERDEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, thename of a copyright holder shall notbe used in advertising or otherwise topromote the sale, use or otherdealings in this Software without priorwritten authorization of the copyrightholder.


ONSTAR 417

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license.The definitive version of thisdocument should be available atftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyright andlicense, “Info-ZIP” is defined as thefollowing set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, Chris Herborth,Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, RobertHeath, Jonathan Hudson, Paul Kienitz,David Kirschbaum, Johnny Lee, Onnovan der Linden, Igor Mandrichenko,Steve P. Miller, Sergio Monesi, KeithOwens, George Petrov, Greg Roelofs,Kai Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White.

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind, expressor implied. In no event shall Info-ZIPor its contributors be held liable forany direct, indirect, incidental, specialor consequential damages arising outof the use of or inability to use thissoftware.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or othermaterials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of a

self-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has not beenremoved from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as being Info-ZIPreleases–including, but notlimited to, labeling of the alteredversions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but notlimited to, differentcapitalizations), “Pocket UnZip,”“WiZ” or “MacZip” without theexplicit permission of Info-ZIP.Such altered versions arefurther prohibited frommisrepresentative use of the


418 ONSTAR

Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,” and“MacZip” for its own source andbinary releases.


CONNECTED SERVICES 419

Connected Services

Connected ServicesNavigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Connected Services

NavigationNavigation requires a specific OnStaror connected service plan.

PressQ to receive Turn-by-Turndirections or have them sent to thevehicle’s navigation screen,if equipped.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to anAdvisor.

2. Request directions to bedownloaded to the vehicle.

3. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.

Using Voice Commands During aPlanned Route

Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton, if equipped, may vary byvehicle and region. For some vehicles,press= to open the OnStar app onthe infotainment display. For othervehicles press= as follows.

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want to canceldirections?”

3. Say “Yes.” System responds: “OK,request completed, thank you,goodbye.”

Route Preview


2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given,then responds with “OnStarready,” then a tone.


420 CONNECTED SERVICES

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.” Systemresponds with the address anddistance to the destination, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Send Destination to Vehicle

Directions can be sent to the vehicle’snavigation screen, if equipped.

PressQ, then ask the Advisor todownload directions to the vehicle’snavigation system, if equipped. Afterthe call ends, the navigation screenwill provide prompts to begin drivingdirections. Routes that are sent to thenavigation screen can only becanceled through the navigationsystem.

See www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsThe following services help withstaying connected.

For coverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

Ensuring Security

. Change the default passwords forthe Wi-Fi hotspot and myCadillacmobile app. Make these passwordsdifferent from each other and usea combination of letters, numbers,and symbols to increase thesecurity.

. Change the default name of theSSID (Service Set Identifier). Thisis your network’s name that isvisible to other wireless devices.Choose a unique name and avoidfamily names or vehicledescriptions.

Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)

The vehicle may have a built-in Wi-Fihotspot that provides access to theInternet and web content at 4G LTEspeed. Up to seven mobile devices canbe connected. A data plan is required.Use the in-vehicle controls only whenit is safe to do so.

1. To retrieve Wi-Fi hotspotinformation, press= to openthe OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectWi-Fi Hotspot. On some vehicles,touch Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Settings onthe screen.

2. The Wi-Fi settings will displaythe Wi-Fi hotspot name (SSID),password, and on some vehicles,the connection type (no Internetconnection, 3G, 4G, 4G LTE), andsignal quality (poor, good,excellent).

3. To change the SSID or password,pressQ or call 1-888-4ONSTARto connect with an Advisor. Onsome vehicles, the SSID andpassword can be changed in theWi-Fi Hotspot menu.

After initial set-up, your vehicle’sWi-Fi hotspot will connectautomatically to your mobile devices.Manage data usage by turning Wi-Fion or off on your mobile device, byusing the myCadillac mobile app,or by contacting an OnStar Advisor.


CONNECTED SERVICES 421

On some vehicles, Wi-Fi can also bemanaged from the Wi-FiHotspot menu.

MyCadillac Mobile App (If Available)

Download the myCadillac mobile appto compatible Apple and Androidsmartphones. Cadillac users canaccess the following services from asmartphone:

. Remotely start/stop the vehicle,if factory-equipped.

. Lock/unlock doors, if equippedwith automatic locks.

. Activate the horn and lamps.

. Check the vehicle’s fuel level, oillife, or tire pressure,if factory-equipped with the TirePressure Monitor System.

. Send destinations to the vehicle.

. Locate the vehicle on a map (U.S.market only).

. Turn the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspoton/off, manage settings, andmonitor data consumption,if equipped.

. Locate a dealer and scheduleservice.

. Request roadside assistance.

. Set a parking reminder with pindrop, take a photo, make a note,and set a timer.

. Connect with Cadillac on socialmedia.

Features are subject to change. FormyCadillac mobile app informationand compatibility, see my.cadillac.com.

An active OnStar or connected serviceplan may be required. A compatibledevice, factory-installed remote start,and power locks are required. Datarates apply. See www.onstar.com fordetails and system limitations.

Remote Services

Contact an OnStar Advisor to unlockthe doors or sound the horn and flashthe lamps.

Marketplace

OnStar Advisors can provide offersfrom restaurants and retailers on yourroute, help locate hotels, or book aroom. These services vary by market.

OnStar Hands-Free Calling

Make and receive calls with thebuilt-in wireless calling service, whichrequires available minutes.Functionality of the Voice Commandbutton may vary by vehicle andregion. For some vehicles, press= toopen the OnStar app on theinfotainment display, then selectHands-Free calling. For other vehiclespress= as follows.

Make a Call

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds: “Call.Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds: “OK,calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency



422 CONNECTED SERVICES

2. Say “Call.” System responds: “Call.Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds: “OK,dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

If equipped, press= and touchAccount Services to view the numberof remaining minutes, available Wi-Fidata, and other account information.

DiagnosticsBy monitoring and reporting on thevehicle’s key systems, OnStarAdvanced Diagnostics, if equipped,provides a way to keep up onmaintenance. Capabilities vary bymodel. See www.onstar.com for detailsand system limitations. Features aresubject to change. For updates onfeature capabilities, seemy.cadillac.com. Message and datarates may apply.


INDEX 423

Index AAccessories and Modifications . . . . . 288Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Active Fuel Management . . . . . . . . . . . 207Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 285Additional InformationOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Lumbar, Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73Thigh Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 302Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 180Air FilterLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . .87Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . .89What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . .87What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Airbag System (cont'd)When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . .85AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . 138Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

AlertLane Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Rear Pedestrian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Side Blind Zone (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . 268

All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215, 315Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . 215Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Assistance Systems for Driving . . . . 259


424 INDEX

Assistance Systems for Parkingand Backing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Auto StopStop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . 175, 180Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Forward Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Vehicle Hold Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Automatic Vehicle Hold (AVH) . . . . 218

BBatteryExterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Battery - North America . . . . . .314, 364Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . . . . . . . 317BrakeParking, Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Brake Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Pad Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Automatic Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Braking SystemFront Pedestrian (FPB) . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Bulb ReplacementHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122CaliforniaPerchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 314, 364,

Back CoverCanadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . .2Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . 393Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Carbon Monoxide (cont'd)Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Caution, Danger, and Warning . . . . . . . .3Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356ChargingWireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139CheckEngine Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Child RestraintsInfants and Young Children . . . . . . . .97Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108, 110Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Climate Control SystemsAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175, 180


INDEX 425

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 130Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . 404Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Connected ServicesConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

ConnectionsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51CoolantEngine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . 135Engine Temperature WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 180Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Cornering Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cruise Control, Adaptive . . . . . . . . . . . 227Cruise Control, Super . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 400

Customer InformationPublications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . 404Danger, Warning, and Caution . . . . . . . .3Data CollectionInfotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . 168Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40DiagnosticsConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Rear Seat Pass-Through . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . 396Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 315

Driver Assistance Systems . . . . . . . . . 250Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Driver Mode Control Light . . . . . . . . . 146DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190For Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . .27Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 193If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Track Events and Competitive . . . 192


426 INDEX

Driving (cont'd)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

EElectric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Electric Parking Brake Light . . . . . . . 142Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . 285Electrical SystemEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 320Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 328Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

EmergencyOnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Check Light (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . 290Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . 135Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Engine (cont'd)Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . 209Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Engine Air Filter Life System . . . . . . 302Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Extended Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . . . 168Exterior Lighting Battery Saver . . . . 173

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . 169Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . 301Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Forward Automatic Braking . . . . . . . . 262Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Frequency StatementRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Front Pedestrian Braking (FPB)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

FuelAdditives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 147


INDEX 427

Fuel (cont'd)Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 275Top Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

FusesEngine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . 320Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . 328Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Gas Strut(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318GaugesEngine Coolant Temperature . . . . 135Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Gear Shifting Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 377Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . 169Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Head-up Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 168Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Heated and Ventilated RearSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 180High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . 193Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120How to Wear Seat Belts Properly . . . 76HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175, 180

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50IndicatorPedestrian Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Vehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

InformationPublication Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 130


428 INDEX

Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . .6Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 53Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

JJump Starting - North America . . . . 364

KKeyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338LampsCornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . 168Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . . 168Exterior Lighting BatterySaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Malfunction Indicator (CheckEngine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Lamps (cont'd)Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Lane Change Alert (LCA) . . . . . . . . . . . 268Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Lane Keep Assist (LKA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Lane Keep Assist Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after a Crash . . . . 107

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Automatic Vehicle Hold . . . . . . . . . . 144Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . 141Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Check Engine (MalfunctionIndicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Lights (cont'd)Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Driver Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Gear Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . 168Lane Keep Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Seat Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Service Electric Parking Brake . . . 143StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40


INDEX 429

Locks (cont'd)Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . 147Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) . . . . . . . . 102

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64, 73Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Maintenance and CareAdditional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . 139Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Massage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66MessagesEngine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Messages (cont'd)Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

MirrorRear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . .53Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Tilt in Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . 53Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Driver Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Monitor System, Tire Pressure . . . . . 345

NNavigationConnected Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Night Vision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . 300Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . 134Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . 95Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409OnStar Additional Information . . . . 413OnStar Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411OnStar Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251ParkingBrake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251


430 INDEX

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . 89Pedestrian Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . 144Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . . . . . 288

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . 205Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . 81PrivacyVehicle Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . 408

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . 403

Prohibited Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Proposition65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287, 314, 364,

Back Cover

Publication OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

RRadio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . 407Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Rear AxleLocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Rear Camera Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Rear Pedestrian Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258Rear Seat Pass-Through Door . . . . . . . 75Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . 251Rear Window Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 275

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

RecorderVideo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . 368

Reimbursement Program, GMMobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Replacing LATCH System Partsafter a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Replacing Seat Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 408General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Reverse Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350


INDEX 431

Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . 396Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

SSafety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . 408General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . 403Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81How to Wear Seat BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Replacing after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . .82Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62Heated and Ventilated Front . . . . . . .69Heated and Ventilated, Rear . . . . . . .74Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . .64Lumbar Adjustment, Rear . . . . . . . . . .73Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Seats (cont'd)Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . .64Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Securing Child Restraints . . . . .108, 110SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . 288Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 391Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377

Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . 392Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . 403

Service Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

ServicesSpecial Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . 268

Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . 170Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Special Application Services . . . . . . . 384Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . 393Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Start Assist, Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Stop/Start System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114StrutsGas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318


432 INDEX

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59SunshadeRear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Super Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3SystemBrake Pad Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Engine Air Filter Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Forward Collision Alert (FCA) . . . . 260Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174, 410Night Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . 400Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Thigh Support Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 65Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335All-Season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Tires (cont'd)Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343, 344Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . 346Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . 345Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Terminology and Definitions . . . . 340Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . 353Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Top Tier Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 278Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Towing (cont'd)Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Track Events and CompetitiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

TractionControl System(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . 145

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . 170

UUniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . 353Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . 162Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2


INDEX 433

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Automatic Hold Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . 392Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Vehicle HoldAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Vehicle Hold (AVH)Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Video Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Caution and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

WarningsHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance . . . . . 355Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . 351Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . 101Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 317Wireless Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

CT6

2019

CT6

84075049 A

C

M

Y

CM

MY

CY

CMY

K

19_CAD_CT6_COV_en_US_84075049A_2018JUL20.ai 1 6/29/2018 7:53:08 AM19_CAD_CT6_COV_en_US_84075049A_2018JUL20.ai 1 6/29/2018 7:53:08 AM

Documents

M Y CM CT6 - Cadillac...the turn signal lamps flash. 3. Start the vehicle normally after entering. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on. Remote start can be extended